Valtra T-Series-Classic-Hitech Manual Sec Wat

www.maskinisten.
net
www.classicmachinery.net
Operator’s manual
T Series
Classic
HiTech
www.maskinisten.net
Operator’s manual T121c---T171c, T121h---T191h

Serial numbers of your tractors
Model = model indication used by service / spare part

department
Identification number = tractor serial number
If you need spare parts or service, give the

model indication--- and serial numbers
and also if necessary engine---, front axle---
cab and transmission numbers (see on
page 181) as well and you will get the right
parts and fast service.
Cab number
..............................
Type plate EEC
..................................
Tractor serial number
..................................
Engine number Industrial front axle number
.................................. .................................
Agricultural front axle number
.................................
T1ch 1
---1---
www.maskinisten.net
Main table of contents
The Operator’s Manual is divided into 12 main parts, using the letters A, B, C ... L. These are futher sub divided
into number sections. There are four levels of titles. E.g. on the marking D.1.3 the letter D tells that it is the main
part D, Instruments and controls. The first number 1 (see detailed table of contents) tells that it is the illustration
section of the instruments and controls part, etc.
The detailed table of contents provides a lettering, a numbering and page system. The bottom of each page
displays a reference to the main part of the manual it is in.
page no
A Detailed table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 --- 6
B Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 --- 9
C General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 --- 22
D Instruments and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 --- 90
E Starting and running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 --- 99
F Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 --- 115
G Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 --- 122
H Periodic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 --- 142
I Checks and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 --- 156
J Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 --- 184
K Extra and alternative equipment . . . . . . . . 185 --- 224
L Alphabetical index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 --- 227
---2---
www.maskinisten.net
To the operator
T Series
Classic = T121c, T131c, T161c, T171c
HiTech = T121h, T131h, T151eh, T161h, T171h, T191h
(models sold may vary in different marketing areas)
This Operator’s Manual is primarily intended for drivers of VALTRA power
shuttle tractors.
The manual contains detailed instructions for driving, operating and
maintaining the tractor. Make sure your new tractor is always handled and
maintained in the correct way which will ensure reliability and provide
economical operation for many years. You can also get more information from
Valtra Internet pages (www.valtra.com) about e.g. how to use the transmission
and driving.
This Operator’s Manual is only for agricultural tractors. If the tractor is used for
other applications, it is the responsibility of the owner to ensure compliance
with local regulations. In this case always contact your Valtra dealer first.
In this manual, information which refers to more than one model is given as
e.g. T121h--T171h this refers to the models T121h--T171h =T121h, T131h,
T151eh, T161h and T171h.
Alternative equipment in the book means equipment, which can be selected
when ordering the tractor. This equipment can not easily be fitted at a later
time to the tractor. Extra equipment means the equipment, which can be
bought and mounted at a later time to the tractor.
We recommend that you read the manual thoroughly. Follow the maintenance
program carefully and include the daily maintenance in your normal routine.
Maintenance, repairs and adjustments which are not described in this
Operator’s Manual require the use of special tools and exact technical data.
For such work you should contact your dealer who has specially trained
personnel to help you. Only use genuine Valtra spare parts for optimum
performance from your tractor. You should order spare parts according to the
instructions given in the illustrated parts catalogue.
Due to the continual development of Valtra products, the content of this manual
may not always correspond to the new product. Therefore, we retain the right
to make alterations without prior notification.
Please note: when using the tractor you must always follow all
valid laws and regulations even, if they are not specifically
pointed out in this manual.
Valtra Inc.
---3---
www.maskinisten.net
A. Detailed table of contents
Serial numbers of your tractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1. Fixed displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Main table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2. Displays chosen with change over switch . . 61
To the operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3. Proline instrument panel LCD display (liquid
A. Detailed table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 crystal display) setting switch . . . . . . . . . 65
B. Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 4. Changing the parameters of the Proline
B 1. Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 instrument panel LCD display (liquid crystal
C. General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
C 1. Illustration, VALTRA T121c---T171c, D 2.3. Controls on RH side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
T121h ---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 D 2.3.1. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
C 2. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 D 2.3.1.8. Switch for Powershift---automatics . . . 73
C 3. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 D 2.3.2. Linkage /PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
C 3.1. Electronic engine management (EEM) . . . . . 15 D 2.3.2.1. Rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
C 3.2.Common Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Drive balance control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
C 4. Power transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Slip control, extra equipment on Autocontrol D ---
C 4.2. HiTech power shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
C 4.4. Powershift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
C 5. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 D 2.3.2.2. Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
C 5.1. Unboosted system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 D 2.3.2.3. Rear power take ---off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
C 5.2. Boosted system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 D 2.3.2.4. Front PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
C 6. Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 D 2.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
C 7. Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 D 2.3.4. Side pillar control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
D. Instruments and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 D 2.3.5. Other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
D 1. Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 D 2.4. Controls on rear side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
D 1.1. Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 D 2.5. Controls on LH side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
D 1.2. Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 D 2.6. Roof console on the front side . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
D 1.2.1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 D 2.7. Roof console on the right side . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
D 1.2.1.1. Agroline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 D 2.8. Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
D 1.2.1.2. Proline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 D 2.9. Other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
D 1.3. Controls on RH side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 E. Starting and running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
D 1.3.1. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 E 1. Points to note during the first 50 hours running . 91
D 1.3.2. Linkage/ Power take ---off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 E 2. Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
D 1.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 E 2.1. Normal start/cold start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
D 1.3.4. Side pillar controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 E 2.2. Starting gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
D 1.3.5. Other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 E 2.3. Starting with an auxiliary battery
D 1.4. Rear side controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 (jump starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
D 1.5. Controls on LH side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 E 3. Driving start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
D 1.6. Front roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 E 3.1. Accelerator pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
D 1.7. Right hand side roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 E 4. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
D 1.8. Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 E 4.1. HiShift--- switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
D 1.9. Other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 E 4.2. Power shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
D 2. Instruments and controls, more detail . . . . . . . . . 35 E 4.2.1. Programming of Powershift . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
D 2.1. Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 E 4.3. Automatic traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
D 2.2. Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 E 4.4. Powershift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
D 2.2.3. Shuttle --- and parking brake lever . . . . . . . 36 E 4.4.1. Powershift---automatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
D 2.2.4. Pre ---programming E 4.5. Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
switch of Powershift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 E 4.6. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
D 2.2.5. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 E 4.7. Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1. Service function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 E 4.8. Front wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2. Resetting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 E 4.9. Engine speed range selector (ECO) . . . . . . . 97
2.1. Changing selection of driving start--- and E 5. Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
shuttle ---automatic ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . 45 E 6. Action to be taken during use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.2. Resetting driving speed / tyre parameters . 47 E 6.1. Permitted driving inclinations for a tractor on a
2.3. Rear PTO engaging speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.4. Changing temperature unit of outdoor E 6.2. Using chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 E 6.3. Off ---road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.5. Changing driving speed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 E 6.4. Door limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
D 2.2.12. Agroline ---instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . 53 E 6.5. Rear mudguards adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
D 2.2.12.6. Indicator lights on instrument panel . 54 E 6.6. Front mudguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
D 2.2.12.7. LCD ---display unit in Agroline instrument E 6.7. Towing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 F. Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
1. Continuously shows a display . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 F 1. Power take ---off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2. Displays chosen with change over switch . . 55 F 1.1. Sigma Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3. Setting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 F 1.2. Power take ---off shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Changing the Agroline tyre parameters for different F 1.3. Proportional ground speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . 102
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 F 1.4. Checking the transmission ratio of a PTO driven
D 2.2.13. Proline ---instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 trailer for use with proportional
D 2.2.13.7. Indicator lights on instrument panel . 60 ground speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
D 2.2.13.8. LCD ---display unit (liquid crystal display) in F 2. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Proline instrument panel . . . . . . . . . 61 F 2.1. Trailer socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
A. Detailed table of contents ---4---

www.maskinisten.net
F 3. Three ---point linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 I 4. Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

F 3.1. Lifting links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 I 4.1. Adjusting travel of brake pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
F 3.2. Check links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 I 5. Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
F 3.3. Quick couplings for lower links . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 I 5.1. Checking and adjusting toe ---in of front wheels 152
F 4. Using the hydraulic lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 I 5.2. Steering angle adjustment, 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . 152
F 4.1. Lift/stop/lower switch (Autocontrol switch) . . . 107 I 6. Adjusting track width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
F 4.1.1. Activating the linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 I 6.1. Adjusting track width, 4WD axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
F 4.2. Position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 I 6.2. Adjusting track width, rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
F 4.3. Setting transport height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 I 7. If the tractor is not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
F 4.4. Floating ---position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 J. Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
F 4.5. Draft control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 J 1. Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
F 4.6. Lowering speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 J 2. Maximum permissible axle loadings . . . . . . . . . . 158
F 4.7. Override switch for position control knob . . . 108 J 3. Tyres (alternative tyre equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
F 4.8. Drive balance control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 J 3. Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
F 4.9. Slip control, J 3.1. Wheel nuts, tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
extra equipment on Autocontrol D model . . . 109 J 3.2. Tyre loadings and pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
F 5. Auxiliary hydraulic valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 J 4. Track widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
F 5.1. Valve functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 J 5. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
F 5.1.1. Valve adjustment between J 5.1. Engine lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
single/double ---action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 J 5.2. Fuel system and air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
F 5.1.2. Position locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 J 5.3. Coolant system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
F 5.1.3. Floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 J 6. Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
F 5.2. Return coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 J 7. Power transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
F 5.3. Action to be taken during operation . . . . . . . . 111 J 7.1. Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
F 5.4. Hydraulic motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 J 7.2. Power shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
F 6. Attaching implements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 J 7.3. Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
F 6.1. Using PTO shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 J 7.4. Final drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
F 7. Ploughing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 J 7.4.1. Differential lock, rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
F 7.1. Recommendations when ploughing with a fully J 7.5. Speed ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
mounted plough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 J 7.6. Power take ---off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
F 7.2. When using a semi ---mounted plough . . . . . . 114 J 7.6.1. Driving speeds at different rear PTO nominal
F 7.3. Ploughing with a reversible plough . . . . . . . . 114 revs (km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
F 7.4. Ploughing with Autocontrol, brief summary . . 115 J 7.6.2. Proportional ground speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
G. Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 J 7.6.3. Max. power take ---off output at nominal revs of
G 1. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 1000 r/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
G 1.1. General instructions concerning oil checks and oil J 7.6.4.Front PTO (extra equipment) nominal revs 1000
filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 r/min corresponding engine revs . . . . . . . . 177
G 1.2. Cleaning the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 J 7.7. Powered front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
G 1.3. Lubrication and maintenance schedule . . . . 117 J 8. Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
G 1.4. Service inspection (after 100 hours) . . . . . . . 117 J 9. Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
G 2. Recommended fuel and lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . 118 J 9.1. Turning circle radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
G 2.1. Oil recommendations according to outdoor J 10. Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 J 10.1. Electro---hydraulic linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
G 2.2. Quality requirements of engine fuel . . . . . . . . 119 J 10.2. Low pressure circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
G 2.2.1. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 J 10.3. Working hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
G 2.2.2. Fuel storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 J 10.3.1. Valves for auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . . . 180
G 2.2.3. Filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 J 10.3.2. Counter pressures when using return
G 2.2.4. Biodiesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 connection for auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . 180
G 3. Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 J 10.4. Hydraulic linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
G 4. Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 J 10.4.1. Max lifting force on the whole lifting area 181
H. Periodic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 J 10.4.2. Lifting range at end of lower links . . . . . . 181
H 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 J 11. Other specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
H 1.1. Air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 J 11.1. Markings of gearbox and power take ---off . . 181
H 2. Maintenance daily or every 10 hours . . . . . . . . . . 124 J 11.2. The capacity of the cab filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
H 3. Maintenance weekly or every 50 hours . . . . . . . . 125 J 11.3. Stud dimensions and spacing for wheel discs 182
H 4. Maintenance every 500 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 J 11.4. Code number table for calibrating . . . . . . . . 183
H 5. Maintenance every 1000 hours or yearly . . . . . . 134 K. Extra and alternative equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
H 5.2.2. Hub reduction gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 K 1. Extra equipment catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
H 6. Maintenance every 2000 hours K 2. Extra and alternative equipment, operating and
or every other year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
I. Checks and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 K 2.1. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
I 1. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 K 2.2. Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
I 1.1. Bleeding fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 K 2.2.1.Control Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
I 1.2. Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 K 2.2.2. Electric main circuit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
I 1.3. Maintenance ---cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 K 2.2.3. Implement signal connection . . . . . . . . . . 188
I 2. Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 K 2.3. Power transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 2.1. Battery checks and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 145 K 2.3.1. Front power take ---off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 2.2. Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 1. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 2.3. Safety precautions for the electrical system . . 145 2. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 2.3.1. Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 2.4. Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 4. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
I 2.5. Headlight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 K 2.4. Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
I 3. Power transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 K 2.4.1. Trailer air pressure brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
I 3.1. Bleeding clutch system of air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 1. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
---5--- A. Detailed table of contents

www.maskinisten.net
2. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 L. Alphabetical index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

K 2.4.2. Fluid brake valve of the trailer . . . . . . . . . . 193 Conversion table for common units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
1. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
2. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
3. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
K 2.4.3. Emergency brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
K 2.5. Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
K 2.5.1. Reverse drive controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
K 2.5.2. Air suspension of front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
K 2.5.3. Flexible front mudguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
2. Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
K 2.6. Cab and shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
K 2.6.1. Air suspension ---driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . 197
K 2.6.2. Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
K 2.6.2.1. Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
K 2.6.2.2. Automatic air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 201
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
2. Air conditioning operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
K 2.6.3. Forest cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
2. Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
K 2.6.4. Auto Comfort---Cabin suspension system 206
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
K 2.7. Hydraulic and towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
K 2.7.1. Trailer hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
2. The trailer hitch mechanic unlatching . . . . . . 207
2.1. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
3. Trailer hitch hydraulic unlatching . . . . . . . . . . 208
3.1. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5. Drawbar eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
6. Adjusting and checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
7. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
K 2.7.2. Agricultural drawbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
K 2.7.3. Towing device (Scharmüller) . . . . . . . . . . . 210
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2. Instructions for operating hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
3. Maintenance and greasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
4. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
K 2.7.4. Euro trailer hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
3. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
K 2.7.5. Euro trailer hitch with hydraulic extension 213
3. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
K 2.7.6. Automatic check links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
1. Adjusting the automatic check links . . . . . . . 215
2. Floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
K 2.7.7. Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
3. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4. Pressure accumulators for front linkage . . . . 217
K 2.7.8. Electric front loader valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
1.Instructions for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
K 2.7.9. Flow control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
K 2.8. Other equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
K 2.8.1. Mounting readiness for the extra equipment in
the front housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
A. Detailed table of contents ---6---

www.maskinisten.net
B. Safety precautions
B 1. Safety rules
This section summarizes the regulations which must 3 Brakes --- Always check that the brakes are operating
always be followed when working with the tractor. correctly before moving. The brake pedals should be
However, these regulations do not exempt the driver from locked together when driving on the road. Extensive
statutory and other national regulations as regards traffic repairs to the braking system should be undertaken only
safety and occupational health and safety. by Valtra approved service personnel.
When implements or ballast weights are front end
Safety regulations applicable for different types of working
mounted the rear axle loading is decreased:
sites and existing road traffic laws must always be
---In these circumstances the driver should check that the
followed.
rear brakes are still effective.
When designing the tractor priority was given to the safety ---When needed use opposite ballast weights at rear
of the operator. Steps and handles have been placed with
4 Children and the tractor --- Never allow children in the
ease of entry into the cab in mind. The tractor has several
cab or near the tractor or an attached implement while the
safety features eg: guards for belts and pulleys etc.
engine is running. Always lower the implement to the
1 Danger, Warning, Caution --- Whenever you see the ground when leaving the tractor.
words and symbols shown below, used in this book and
on decals, you MUST take note of their instructions as
they relate to personal safety.
DANGER: This symbol together with the
word DANGER indicates an imminently
hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will
result in DEATH OR VERY SERIOUS
INJURY. 1
WARNING: This symbol together with the
word WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation that if not avoided
could result in DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY.
CAUTION: This symbol together with the
word CAUTION is used to indicate a 2 T B2
potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, may result in MINOR INJURY.
5 Roof hatch (extra equipment)--- Open the hatch by
pulling the knob 1 on the handle forwards and pushing
IMPORTANT: The word IMPORTANT is used to identify the hatch upwards.
special instructions or procedures which, if not strictly To open the hatch fully (for emergency exit) detach the
observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of the gas spring upper end 2 from its fastener and push the
machine, process or its surroundings. hatch fully open.
NOTE: The word NOTE is used to indicate points of WARNING: When driving on ice it is
particular interest for more efficient and convenient repair recommended to keep the roof hatch open.
or operation.
Decals
6 Passengers --- No passenger may ride on the tractor
WARNING: DO NOT remove or obscure unless it is provided with a special seat. Any passenger
Danger, Warning, Caution or Instruction must not ride on the platform placed in the tractor. Other
Decals. Replace any Danger, Warning, personal transport, for example, on front---mounted
Caution or Instruction Decals that are not loaders, is not permissible.
readable or are missing. Replacement 7 Caution --- Hold on to the steering wheel or safety
decals are available from your Dealer in the handles in the cab if the tractor tips over. Never try to jump
event of loss or damage. The actual location out.
of these Safety Decals is illustrated at the
end of this section. 8 Maintenance --- The driver is responsible for following
the maintenance instructions in this Manual and the safety
2 Tractor construction --- The tractor construction must regulations applicable to the tractor. No maintenance
not be changed (f.ex. max. driving speed, max. power work is to be carried out on the tractor or implement
etc.) The tractor is type approved to comply with construc- unless the engine is stopped and the implement lowered.
tion and use regulations. Any changes to the tractor may
reduce the safety and durability and affect the warranty 9 Lending --- Never lend the tractor to a person who is not
terms. used to driving it. You may be held responsible for any
resulting accidents.
---7--- B. Safety precautions

www.maskinisten.net
10 Lights --- Always make sure that the lights and done with a flag and during darkness with a red light and
reflectors are clean and in working order. Do not forget reflector arrangement.
that the headlights must be correctly adjusted.
19 Trailer --- A trailer should only be coupled to the
drawbar. A loaded drawbar must always be lowered with
the hydraulic lift. Check that trailer brakes are operating
properly and observe any special instructions issued by
the trailer manufacturer.
WARNING: When the tractor is towing a
trailer the brake pedals must be locked
together. The brakes are not to be used
individually for steering.
WARNING: When using a trailer make sure
that the hitch latch is locked.
WARNING: When using the trailer always

use the brakes, if the law requires.The
trailer brakes are recommended to use in 50
km/h models also in those countries, where
it is not required by the law.
20 Front ---end loader --- When working with a front
loader, be sure that no one is in the working area. There is
T B3 a danger that the tractor may tip over when the loader is
lifted. The driver should put the front---end loader in the
down position before leaving the tractor. Any special
11 Carbon monoxide --- Never start the engine, or run it instructions issued by the loader manufacturer should
indoors while the doors are closed as this may lead to also be observed.
carbon monoxide poisoning.
21 Running --- Before driving always check that the tractor
12 Downhill --- Never drive downhill with the gear lever in is in a safe condition for driving on the road. Rear view
neutral or the clutch pedal pressed down. Check the mirrors should be adjusted to give the correct viewing
brakes often. Always change down to a lower gear before angle before setting off. When towing an implement
driving down a steep incline. When driving downhill do not whose centre of gravity is located at a significant distance
brake continuously --- Danger of overheating the behind the tractor, the driver should remember that there
brakes! Do not let the engine over run to avoid damage to may be considerable sway during cornering.
the engine.
22 Differential lock --- The differential lock must only be
13 Running speed --- Adjust the speed to suit the driving used when running on loose or slippery ground.
surface, visibility and load. Avoid any sudden increase or
reduction (braking) in the running speed as well as tight
turns at high speed. If care is not taken the tractor may tip
over or the load may be displaced.
IMPORTANT: The maximum speed of the tractor must
not be altered. Maximum operating forward speed is 40
Km/h (traffic tractors 50 Km/h), for safety the maximum
operating speed in reverse is 20 Km/h.
14 Power take ---off driven attachments --- When running
with power take---off driven attachments or machines it is
very important that the prescribed safety devices are used
and that they are in good condition. Serious accidents
have occurred due to failure to use the prescribed
safety devices. Follow the directions given by the
implement or machine manufacturer.
T B5
15 Check links --- When transporting implements using
the three---point linkage, the check links must be locked
with pins. 23 Ballast weights --- When driving on the road at least
20 % of the gross weight of the tractor must be on the
16 Emergency exits --- The cab is provided with four front axle. When lifting an implement the weight on the
emergency exits. These are the doors, the rear window front end of the tractor is reduced, and the steering ability
and the roof hatch (extra equipment). of the tractor is impaired or sometimes lost. Therefore
17 Stairs --- Keep the stairs clean. Build up of dirt can cau- sufficient ballast weights should be carried. Ballast
se slippery conditions and can cause injury. weights should be mounted only at the points intended for
this purpose.
18 Trailer load --- On tractors with trailers the load must
be properly secured. The load must not obstruct the 24 Attaching implements --- Care must be taken when
driver’s vision or cover lights and reflectors. Loads which implements are being attached. There is a risk of an
project more than 1 m (39 in) behind the vehicle train accident if the tractor or implement should move. It is only
must be suitably marked. During day-time this should be safe to enter the space between the tractor and the
B. Safety precautions ---8---

www.maskinisten.net
implement if the parking brake is applied or the wheels

blocked in order to prevent the tractor from moving.
25 Damage --- The driver is responsible for seeing to the
repair of any damage or wear which might endanger the
safety of the tractor.
WARNING: If damage occurs to the cab, all
parts affected should be replaced with new
ones. No repair work (welding, drilling,
cutting, or grinding) should be attempted.
N B3
28 Radar --- DO NOT to go under a tractor which has

radar (slip control models) until the ignition switch has
been turned off. --- this presents a hazard to your eyes.
29 Hydraulic/fuel pressure --- Oil/fuel under high
pressure easily penetrates through clothing and skin and
can cause serious injury. Never attempt to locate a leak in
the hydraulic system or attempt to close a leak using any
part of your body.
T B6 30 Implements maintenance --- Implements connected to
the linkage or the auxiliary hydraulic system must be
26 Triangle for slow vehicle (SMV ---Slow Moving lowered to the ground during maintenance.
Vehicle) --- When driving on public roads always use the
31 Motor noise --- When you are operating the engine or
SMV emblem on the rear end of the tractor. Also use the
working near it, use hearing protectors to avoid noise
rotating light where required by law.
injuries.
32 Naked flames and smoking --- Naked flames,
smoking and sparks are prohibited near the fuel system
and batteries. (Specially, when charging batteries,
explosive gases present).
33 Cleaning --- Keep the tractor clean (cleaning
instructions see on page 116). Avoid the risk of fire by
throughly cleaning before use!
34 By a fire --- At temperatures in excess of 300˚ C, e.g. if
the engine is on fire, the viton seals of the engine (e.g the
undermost 0---ring of the oil pressure regulating value)
produce very highly corrosive hydrofluoric acid. Do not
touch with your bare hands, viton seals which have been
subjected to abnormally high temperatures. Always use
neoprene rubber or heavy duty gloves and safety glasses
when decontaminating. Wash seals and the contaminated
area with 10 % calcium hydroxide or other alkali solution.
Put all the removed material in sealed plastic bags and
deliver them to the point stated by the Authorities
concerned.
WARNING: Never destroy viton ---seals by
burning!
35 Engine stop and restart --- If the engine has stalled

eg. due too heavy loading, turn the ignition switch to the
STOP position. Restart the engine according to the start-
M B1
ing instructions. Keep an eye on the indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
27 Mobile phones --- Mobile phones may cause failure for
36 Quick couplings for lower links --- Clean, if necessary
the electric linkage function. A mobile phone can not be
kept inside the cab, especially above the right side panel. the quick couplings and ball joints for the lower links befo-
When using a mobile phone in the tractor it is re attaching the implement. DANGER OF THE IMPLE-
recommended that it is connected to the outside antenna. MENT RELEASING!
---9--- B. Safety precautions

www.maskinisten.net
C. General description
C 1. Illustration, VALTRA T121c---T171c, T121h---T191h
T1 C1
The models dealt with here belong to the Valtra’s (PS). In addition these tractors have hydrostatic steering,
medium---weight category of the series. electro---hydraulic lift and an engine heater as standard.
The tractors feature a powered front axle as standard (as
The Tc models are equipped with a flywheel, and clutch
alternative equipment also suspension) equipped with an
assy operated by clutch pedal. The Th models have a
automatic differential brake, and as alternative equipment
power shuttle unit which operates at the same time as the
an electro hydraulic front axle differential lock operated in
clutch. The gearbox is fully synchronized (except the
conjunction with the rear axle lock. As standard the
creeper gear). These tractors have electro---hydraulically
tractors have a safety cab with an adjustable driver’s seat.
controlled PTO, differential lock and 3---step Powershift
C. General description ---10---

www.maskinisten.net
c
c b
4
c
15 b a
11
5
9
12
10
19
2 8 16
17
14 13 3 7
18 1 6
T1ch C4
Left side of tractor:

1 Dipstick for engine oil
2 Engine oil filler cap
3 Engine oil filter
4 Airfilter housing
5 Coolant pump
6 Engine heater 21
7 Engine heater plug (not in picture, under the cab door)
8 High pressure pump
9 High pressure accumulator
10 Fuel filler cap
11 Pre heating of induction air, electric
12 Electric feed pump, fuel system
13 Prefilter for the fuel , water trap in lower part
14 Fuel filter
15 Air conditioning compressor, extra equipment
16 Air conditioning receiver, extra equipment
17 Electronic engine control unit
18 Draining plug for coolant, coolant fluid
19 Accumulator (when with forest equipment, extra
equipment)
A The models T121c---T171c, when with HiShift switch

a HiShift clutch fluid reservoir
b Clutch fluid reservoir
c Brake fluid reservoir (not T161c---T171c)
B The models T121c---T131c
b Clutch fluid reservoir
20
c Brake fluid reservoir T1Ch C5
C The models T121h---T131h
c Brake fluid reservoir 20 Engine oil draining plug
21 Draining plug for coolant, cylinder block
---11--- C. General description

www.maskinisten.net
4
1
6
2 3
T1ch C9
Right side of tractor:

1. Thermostat housing
2. Starter motor
3. Alternator
4. Turbocharger
5. Expansion tank, coolant system 8
6. Air compressor, extra equipment
7
T1ch C7
7. Battery
8. Toolbox (can be locked)
9. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir (common for front
and rear windows) (under the toolbox)

www.maskinisten.net
7
3a 5
3
2
3a
3
10
4
11
T1ch C13
Rear view of tractor: 6. Trailer socket

1. Oil dipstick, transmission and hydraulics 7. Inlet for remote control cables
2. Oil filling cap, transmission and hydraulics 8. Remote (Emergency) power take off stop
3. Quick---action couplings, auxiliary hydraulics 9. Power transmission and hydraulic pressure filter
3. a Quick---action couplings, auxiliary hydraulics, extra 10. Auxiliary hydraulic return oil filter, Th models, on Tc
equipment models as extra equipment
4. Leakage oil reservoir 11. Bracket for ring pin
5. Auxiliary hydraulic system return coupling

www.maskinisten.net
3
2
T1ch C14
Front view of tractor:

1 DIN---socket for current, max 8A (current on, when the
C 3. Engine
parking lights are on)
2 Auxiliary hydraulics quick couplings (with front linkage,
extra equipment)
3 Front power take---off (extra equipment)
4 Front linkage (extra equipment)
C 2. Service
In order to function satisfactorily the tractor must be
properly maintained. The necessary daily lubrication and
routine checks, can, of course, be carried out by the
driver.
Where adjustments and repairs are necessary which
require the attention of a qualified mechanic and the use
of special tools, it is advisable to rely on a workshop. In
this case we advise you to consult your local dealer as to
how your tractor should be looked after as he is in a
position to give you the best possible service. Through T1LS C6
service bulletins and special training courses he is kept

constantly informed of the factory’s recommendations
regarding care of the tractor. T121c---T171c and T121h
The tractors have 4---stroke, 4 valves, six---cylinder, turbo-
C 2.1. Cost---free service charged and intercoolered common rail direct injection
diesel engines.
Before leaving the factory the tractor was thoroughly T131h---T191h

tested and adjusted to ensure it is in first-class condition
when delivered to you. However, it is important that the The tractors have 4---stroke, 4 valves, six---cylinder, turbo-
tractor is given further checks during the first period of charged and intercoolered multi power common rail direct
operation. injection diesel engines.
Bolts must be checked for tightness, various settings
Two power ranges
inspected and other minor adjustments made. Your dealer
therefore provides a cost---free service inspection --- The models T131h, T151eh, T161h, T171h have also a
(excluding oil and filter costs) after 100 hours running. larger transport boost power area, when the main gear
is H2 or higher.
Two engine running speed ranges
--- On the model T151eh it is possible to choose either
standard engine range (max. 2200 r/min) or low engine
range (max. 1800 r/min) with the “ECO” switch. On the
low engine range the fuel consumption, and the emissi-
ons are lower and the noise will be reduced. On the low

www.maskinisten.net
engine range there is also Transport boost range in use.

Electronic engine
C 3.1.
Three power ranges
--- The model T191h has a larger transport boost power
management (EEM)
area, when the main gear is H2 or higher and Powershift
boost area, when quick---shift is 2 or 3. The trans boost The electronic engine management includes a controller
and Powershift boost power areas are equal. The lar- installed on the engine (EC).
gest Sigma Power area with all gears is in use, when the The electronic engine management improves the
power transferred through the power---take---off is large technical features of the engine such as fuel efficiency,
enough. The symbol is illuminated in the instru- power, torque and cold starting. It also reduces emissions
and noise.
ment panel.
The principle of the turbocharged engine is that exhaust
gases from the engine cylinders drive the turbo unit which C 3.2.Common Rail
forces air into the cylinders. This means that higher power
output can be obtained with economical fuel In the Common Rail system the injection pump has been
consumption. On intercooler models cooled inlet air is fed replaced with the high---pressure pump, which pumps the
into the cylinders. amount of fuel to over 1000 bar pressure, to the high
The engine induction air passes through the air filter and a pressure accumulator (rail), common for all cylinders. The
safety filter inside the air filter. The air intake system has high---pressure fuel injects to the cylinders through the
an effective ejector system, most of the impurities are electric controlled injectors. The Common Rail system
removed before they reach the filter by the exhaust fume makes it possible to develop quiet---running, economic
flow. The safety filter prevents the engine being damaged engines featuring, reduced emissions and noise,
if the main filter fails. especially by lower rotating speeds.
These engines have lower fuel consumption and cleaner

exhaust gases.
C 4. Power transmission
so there is no need to use the foot clutch pedal.
C 4.1. Clutch Traditional use of clutch pedal is however always possible.
Tc models
N C10
The clutch is disengaged hydraulically and is coupled to

the flywheel. It has a single dry disc with a diaphragm
spring. The clutch disc diameter is 330 mm. The disc
material is organic. Clutch disc vibration damping has
been improved. This causes lower noise levels and
setting---off is now smoother. The clutch operates by fluid
and is self adjusting. As extra equipment it is available to
have the push buttons for HiShift for making driving easier

www.maskinisten.net
C 4.2. HiTech power shuttle
Th models
T1ch C1
In tractors with the HiTech power shuttle unit the

traditional forward/reverse gear lever is replaced with a C 4.3. Gearbox
shuttle lever beside the steering wheel.
By moving the shuttle lever forwards or backwards (the The speed gearbox has four synchronized gears which
centre position is neutral) you get a gentle and light are controlled with a speed gear lever. In addition, the
shuttle operation without using the clutch pedal. Use of gearbox has three range gears; LL=creeper range,
the clutch pedal for shuttle operation is still possible. M=Medium range and H= High range. M and H ranges
are synchronized. All these range of gears are controlled
The power shuttle is placed between the gearbox and the with one lever.
Powershift. It has planetary---type gear drives which are There is an EcoSpeed---function available on the models
operated by two wet multi---disc clutches, one for forward T131h---T191h and T161c, T171c (as alternative
driving and one for reverse driving. Multi disc clutches equipment). The EcoSpeed---function is based on the 50
operate at the same time as the driving clutch due to this km/h transmission and the highest ratio with the electric
the tractor not having a traditional dry clutch disc. speed limiter (40 km/h). When driving at road speeds the
The function of the HiTech system is controlled by the fuel consumption is lower and the noise will be reduced.
electronic control unit of the gearbox. This means that the
electronics smoothly adjust the disengaging and Tc models
engaging pressures of the hydraulic multi---discs
according to program. This provides smooth forward and Between the power shift and gearbox there is a
power shuttle driving. forward---reverse shuttle and this is synchronized. The
forward/reverse shuttle is controlled with a separate lever.
In addition the system has the HiShift--- operation, with For this reason forward/reverse changing can be made
switches placed in the speed gear--- and range lever, quickly and very easily e.g when loading work is carried
which controls the operation of the multi---discs when out.
changing gear. So it is possible to change gear without
using the clutch.
However, traditional use of clutch pedal is still possible.

www.maskinisten.net
electro---hydraulically. When 4WD is engaged the springs

C 4.4. Powershift force the discs together and four---wheel drive engages.
Consequently the 4WD is always engaged when the
In addition in front of the gearbox is a 3---step quick---shift engine is stopped (multi---disc clutch not pressurized).
gear, the Powershift (PS). In addition when braking, the front---wheel drive always
engages in order to provide the braking function for the
The main gearbox has 12 forward speeds and 12 re-
front wheels.
verse speeds. The 3---step Powershift gear on tractors
give 36 gears forward and 36 reverse gears. The front axle is also equipped with an automatic
Shafts and gearwheels in the gearbox are pressure lubri- differential brake. Simultaneously electro hydraulically
cated. controlled front axle differential lock is available as
alternative equipment.
Tc models In all tractors is available as alternative equipment an in-
The Powershift is controlled with electric push buttons dustrial front axle allowing larger axle loading (on the mo-
placed on the speed gear lever knob. dels T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h as standard).
An air suspensioned front axle is also available as extra
Th models equipment on all models.
Control of the Powershift function is also controlled by the

electronic control unit, at which time the gearing is C 4.7. Power take---off
selected according to the driving conditions.
Manual control of the Powershift--- gears is done with the
push buttons on the gear lever. The driver can choose
from the system, preprogrammed automatic functions of
Powershift for different driving conditions and power
shuttle.
The digital display panel in the tractor keeps the driver
informed at all times by displaying the status of different
operations, e.g. driving direction, which of the
Powershift--- gears is engaged, chosen automatic
operations, outdoor temperature, suggests when to
change to a lower or higher gear, it also shows when the
PTO is engaged and indicates any possible fault with a
fault code.
C 4.5. Rear axle

The rear axle is fitted directly to the gearbox. The
differential lock in the rear axle is electro---hydraulically
controlled. When it is engaged, pressurized oil is pumped
to the multi---disc differential clutch, and this causes the
T C11
differential to lock. When the brake pedal is pressed the
differential lock is automatically disengaged. An indicator
lamp on the instrument panel lights when the differential The PTO rotating speed is selected with a lever, which can
lock is engaged. select either 540 r/min or 1000 r/min nominal rotating
Final drives are of the planetary gear type. From the speed. Engagement and disengagement is electro---
planetary gears power is transmitted to the rear wheels. hydraulically through a different button. It is also possible
as alternative equipment to have a 540E (750) r/min PTO .
C 4.6. Powered front axle Th models
The control unit of the gearbox also controls the function

of the power take---off. This makes the power take---off
engagement smooth without loading the implement. The
display shows a symbol if the power take---off shaft is
rotating.
The tractor T191h is a Sigma Power model, whose princi-
pal function is, that the tractor power take---off has been
constructed to transfer larger output and torque than the
tractor driving transmission. The engine has three different
output and torque areas. The power ranges are controlled
automatically through an electric system.
M C7
The powered front axle is driven from the gearbox bevel All models
pinion shaft front end.
The power take---off shaft is easy to change. As standard
Front wheel drive can be engaged and disengaged the tractor is provided with a 6---spline shaft and as extra

www.maskinisten.net
equipment shafts with 21---, 20---, 6--- or 8 splines for The front power take---off is available as extra equipment
greater torque can be fitted on the tractor. As alternative (with front linkage). The front PTO shaft nominal rotating
equipment a ground speed PTO is also available. speed is 1000 r/min and the shaft is 6---spline.
C 5. Brakes
C 5.1. Unboosted system
T121c---T131c and T121h---T131h
T1ch C2
The oil bath multi---disc brakes are located on the rear T121h---T131h
axle between the differential and final drives. The brakes
operate hydraulically from the brake pedals. When both The parking brake is electro---hydraulic and is controlled
brake pedals are depressed the front wheel drive is en- with a shuttle lever. When engaging the parking brake, the
gaged automatically in order to provide braking function pressure exhausts from the cylinder operate the parking
at the front wheels. The pedals can be connected together brake and a strong spring engages the tractor brakes. At
and used as running brakes or separated and used indi- the same time the control unit disengages the trans-
vidually as steering brakes. The brakes can be adjusted mission. With this system the tractor brakes are always on
by means of adjusting nuts which are fitted on the rear when the engine is not running.
axle.
T121c---T131c
The parking brake is mechanically operated and it acts on
the foot brakes.

www.maskinisten.net
C 5.2. Boosted system
T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h
T1ch C3
T161c---T171c and T151h---T191h T151eh---T191h

The oil bath boosted multi---disc brakes are located on the The parking brake is electro---hydraulic and is controlled
rear axle between the differential and final drives. The bra- with the shuttle lever. When engaging the parking brake
kes operate hydraulically from the brake pedals boosted (parking brake and 4WD indicator lamps light on instru-
by the low pressure hydraulic. There is no separate brake ment panel), the pressure exhausts from the cylinder ope-
fluid in the brake system. The system uses transmission/ rating the parking brake and a strong spring engages the
hydraulics oil. The system is equipped with a pressure tractor brakes. At the same time the control unit disenga-
accumulator, which makes it possible to brake after the ges the transmission. With this system the tractor brakes
engine has stopped. When both brake pedals are depres- are always on when the engine is not running.
sed the front wheel drive is engaged automatically (4WD
indicator lamp lights on instrument panel) in order to pro- All models
vide braking function at the front wheels. The pedals can
be connected together and used as running brakes or A hydraulic--- and air pressure valve is available as extra
separated and used individually as steering brakes. The equipment for the trailer brake operation.
brakes can be adjusted by means of adjusting nuts, which
are fitted on the rear axle.
T161c---T171c
The parking brake is mechanically operated and it acts on
the foot brakes.

www.maskinisten.net
If the oil pressure in the steering system should fail for any
C 6. Steering system reason, steering is still possible by manual power, and the
steering valve will act as a pump.
The tractor hydraulic system has a priority valve which
ensures that there is always sufficient oil for the steering
system.
M C8
The tractor has a hydrostatic steering system so that

steering movement is transmitted from the steering wheel
by oil under pressure to the front axle. This makes
steering particularly easy.

www.maskinisten.net
C 7. Hydraulic system
T1ch C10
The tractors hydraulic system has both a low pressure Pre---programmed functions:
circuit and a high pressure circuit. Both circuits have their --- draft control/position control combining ratio plus
own pump. The capacity of the low pressure circuit sensitivity on the regulator, the sensitivity adjustment is
pump is 30 l/min at 2200 r/min. The high pressure pump automatic.
capacity is 73 l/min at free flow pressure which enables --- lowering speed (independent of load)
effective use of the auxiliary hydraulics. --- transport height
The high pressure circuit controls: --- drive balance control system, connecting of the driving
speed can not be adjusted on Autocontrol B models
--- steering system (prioritized)
--- slip control as an extra equipment on Autocontrol D
--- working hydraulics
(ACD) models, Th models
--- auxiliary hydraulics
--- trailer brake valve (extra equipment) Max. lifting capacity of the hydraulic lift is as follows:
--- Ø 100 mm lift cylinder 7000 kg, extra mounting holes
The low pressure circuit controls:
7900 kg
--- quick---shift gear
--- powered front axle The front linkage is available as extra equipment. Lifting
--- PTO capacity of the front linkage is 3600 kg.
--- differential lock
--- gearbox lubrication
--- boosted brake system
Tractors have, as standard, an electro---hydraulic
Autocontrol B (=ACB) linkage (also as alternative
equipment Autocontrol D (ACD) linkage). The linkage is
controlled through the electrical potentiometers and
switches.

www.maskinisten.net
C 7.1. Valves for auxiliary hydraulics
T1ch C11
All the quick---action couplings are Push---Pull type.

The tractor has as standard at the rear:
---two valves, controlled by separate levers
Both of these valves are adjustable for either single---ac-
ting or double---acting functions. One of these valves can
be locked mechanically in ”position” while the other valve
has a ”floating position”.
As extra equipment at the rear:
--- two valves
--- an oil flow distribution valve
--- a trailer brake valve
As extra equipment in the front:
--- two electric controlled adjustable valves for front loader
use
--- a quick---action coupling

www.maskinisten.net
D. Instruments and controls

Operating instructions for the extra and alternative
equipment are in section K, of this book, after each extra
equipment.
D 1. Illustrations
NOTE: The places of the switches can vary depending on
the equipment.
D 1.1. Pedals
5
2 4
T1LS D8
For more details see page 35. 3 Latch for brake pedals
1 Clutch pedal, (HiShift--- clutch, see page 27) 4 Accelerator pedal
2 Brake pedals 5 Lock for steering wheel inclination
---23--- D. Instruments and controls

www.maskinisten.net
D 1.2. Instrument panel
D 1.2.1. General
All instrument panels
Th
3
Th
5
4
9
8
7 10
3 6
11
1 2
T1ch D1
For more details see page 36. 6 Control for (on the Tc models always on the left side of
On the Th models the shuttle--- and parking brake lever the steering wheel):
(3) and the combination lever (6) can also be fitted on the --- main/dipped headlights
opposite side of the steering wheel. --- direction indicators
1 Steering wheel --- horn
2 Lever for adjusting steering wheel height --- windscreen wiper
3 Shuttle--- and parking brake lever, Th models, --- windscreen washer
Tc models the shuttle lever see page 27 and parking --- headlight flasher
brake lever see page 32 7 Light switch
4 Pre---programming push button of Powershift, not on Tc 8 Hazard warning flasher switch
models 9 Main circuit switch, extra equipment
5 Display panel for power shuttle, Powershift etc., not on 10 Upper headlights, extra equipment
Tc models 11 Ignition switch
D. Instruments and controls ---24---

www.maskinisten.net
D 1.2.1.1. Agroline (standard) (12)
12.4
12.2
12.1 12.4
12
12.5
12.3
12.6
12.6
12.8
12.7
T1cd D2
For more details see page 53

--- Transmission temperature
12.1 Fuel gauge
12.2 Tachometer
--- Position of lower links (%, 0---100 Ac)
12.3 Coolant thermometer
12.4 Indicator lights for direction indicator
Functions on the bottom line:
12.5 Indicator light for main beam
12.6 Indicator lights on instrument panel --- Maintenance schedule
12.7 LCD---display unit in Agroline---instrument panel
Continuously shows a display that cannot be chosen 12.8 Change over switch for LCD---display in
with a switch (two functions on the bottom line): Agroline---instrument panel
---Operating hours
---Driving speed km/h / miles/h
Displays chosen with change over switch (12.8)

Functions on the top line:
--- Driving trip m, km / miles
--- Rear PTO rotating speed r/min
--- Front PTO rotating speed, extra equipment
r/min
--- Clock

www.maskinisten.net
D 1.2.1.2. Proline (extra equipment) (13)
13.5
13.2 13.3 13
13.1
13.5
13.6
134
13.7 13.7
13.9
13.10
13.8
M D1
For more details see page 59

--- Engine running speed
13.1 Fuel gauge
13.2 Thermometer gauge --- Immediate fuel consumption (ha, acre)
13.3 Tachometer
13.4 Speedometer --- Average fuel consumption (ha, acre)
13.5 Indicator lights for direction indicator
13.6 Indicator light for main beam --- Immediate fuel consumption
13.7 Indicator lights on instrument panel --- Average fuel consumption
13.8 LCD---display unit in Proline---instrument panel (liquid
crystal display) --- Fuel consumption
Fixed displays (two functions on the bottom line):
--- Lower link position (%, 0---100)
---Operating hours (hhhh.h)
--- Lifting link position of front linkage
---Clock (hh:mm) (%, 0---100)
Displays chosen with a change over switch (13.9) --- Sigma Power (%, 0---100)
Functions on the top/centre line: --- Gearbox temperature (C/F)
--- Working time (h:mm)
--- Travel distance (m, km / miles)
--- Cruise control km/h / mph
--- Square area (ha)
--- Driving speed (km/h / mph)
--- Wheel slip (%, 0---100) --- Maintenance schedule
--- Rear PTO speed (r/min) 13.9 Change over switch for LCD---display in Proline---in-
strument panel
--- Front PTO speed, extra equipment (r/min) 13.10 Setting switch for LCD---display in
Proline---instrument panel

www.maskinisten.net
D 1.3. Controls on RH side
D 1.3.1. Driving
16
15
13 13.2 6
7 11
5
12
10 13.1
13.3
8
14
4 9
2
5
4 1
5
3
T1ch D55
For more details see page 69. 12 Powershift rocker switch for reverse drive tractor, extra
1 Speed gear lever equipment, not on Tc models
2 Range gear lever 13 Cruise control (Cruise panel) extra equipment, for
3 Shuttle lever, Tc models, Th models see page 24 more details see page 76.
4 Push buttons for Powershift operation 13.1 Cruise control off---switch
5 Switch for HiShift, extra equipment on models 13.2 Cruise control setting switch; the constant driving
T121c---T131c speed/engine revs
6 Switch for 4WD 13.3 Cruise control setting switch
7 Switch for differential lock (3---positions) 14 Engine speed range selector switch (ECO), only on
8 Switch for Powershift---automatics, not on Tc models the model T151eh
9 Switch for automatic traction control, not on Tc models 15 Autocomfort---cabin suspension system, extra equip-
10 Hand throttle ment, for more details see page 206
11 Engine STOP (red indicator light, does not flash), 16 Auto---Guide switch, extra equipment for the models
extra equipment, not on Tc models T151eh---T191h

www.maskinisten.net
D 1.3.2. Linkage/ Power take---off
1.5 1.7
1.1 1.4 1.6
1.9
1.8 1.10 1.11

4.1 3.2
2.1 1.13
3.3
3.1
1.3
1.2
1.12
T1ch D4
Rear linkage 1, for more details see page 78 Front linkage (extra equipment) 2, for more details
see page 216.
1.1 Diagnose light (shows also a possible fault)
1.2 Position control knob, hydraulic lift 2.1 Control lever, auxiliary hydraulics block 3
1.3 Lift/stop/lower switch, hydraulic lift
1.4 Lift/lower indicator lights Rear power take---off 3, for more details see page 80
1.5 Lowering speed selector, hydraulic lift
1.6 Transport height selector, hydraulic lift 3.1 PTO control lever
1.7 Draft control selector, hydraulic lift 3.2 PTO switch (3---positions, if the tractor is not equipped
1.8 Draft control indicator light, on Autocontrol D (ACD) with front PTO, there is the operation switch 4.1), PTO
linkage, extra equipment for Th---models push buttons on the mudguard as extra equipment,
1.9 Drive balance control, on Autocontrol D (ACD) linkage Th---models
as extra equipment slip control system, Th---models 3.3 Rear PTO automatic stop
1.10 Drive balance control light
Front PTO (extra equipment) 4, for more details see
1.11 Slip control light, on Autocontrol D (ACD) linkage as
extra equipment, Th---models page 189.
1.12 Passing switch for position control knob 4.1 Front PTO operation switch
1.13 Inner switch for connecting implement
The towing devices are extra equipment, for more details
(corresponding push---buttons are located on both
see page 207.
mudguards)

www.maskinisten.net
D 1.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics
4 2 3
1
5
6
T1ch D5
For more details see page 83 4 Flow control valve, extra equipment, for more details
1 Control levers for valve blocks 1 and 2 see page 221
2 Control lever for valve block 3, extra equipment 5 Softdrive (loader damping) switch, extra equipment, for
if the tractor is equipped with front linkage, for more more details see page 218
details see page 216 6 Equipment locking (front loader use), extra equipment,
3 Control lever for valve block 4, extra equipment, for for more details see page 218
example hydraulic levelling, towing hook’s extension
etc..

www.maskinisten.net
D 1.3.4. Side pillar controls
5 4
6 3
7 2
8 1
10 10
11
T1ch D56
For more details see page 83 6 Switch for front working lights
1 Rear window wiper + washer, extra equipment 7 Switch for extra front working lights, extra equipment
2 Light switch for trailer hitch, extra equipment 8 Floor heater fan (2--- speeds), extra equipment
3 Switch for rear working lights, automatic position for 9 Implement signal connection, extra equipment
reversing as extra equipment 10 Mounting brackets (extra equipment)
4 Switch for rotating warning light, extra equipment 11 Switch for rear fog light, extra equipment (standard in
5 Control Stop switch, extra equipment some marketing areas)

www.maskinisten.net
D 1.3.5. Other controls
2
7 5
1
T1ch D58
For more details see page 85 6 Indicator light for implement signal connection, extra
1 Trailer hitch release control, extra equipment equipment
2 Switch for trailer hitch hydraulic unlatching/locking, 7 Place for implement remote control (cutter etc.)
extra equipment, cab with suspension, Th models 8 Storage compartment
3 Lighter (power output)
4 2 pin power socket, the lower is an extra equipment
5 3 pin power socket

www.maskinisten.net
Rear window opening device

D 1.4. Rear side controls
Reverse drive control, extra equipment, see page 194.
N D30
For more details see page 86.
D 1.5. Controls on LH side
2
1
N D15
For more details see page 86. 2 Storage compartments

1 Parking brake, Tc models, Th models see page 24.

www.maskinisten.net
D 1.6. Front roof console
1 4
2
2
3 3a
T1 D1
For more details see page 87. 4 Recirculation control

1 Cab light 5 Mirror heating, extra equipment
2 Ventilation nozzles 6 Mirror adjustment, extra equipment
3 Sun visor down, 3a up
D 1.7. Right hand side roof console
3 1 4 2
N D21

1 Roof heater fan (4--- speeds)
2 Heating and ventilation control
3 Radio (extra equipment)
4 Air conditioning control knob (extra equipment)
Air conditioning (extra equipment), manual see page 199.
Air conditioning (extra equipment), automatic see page
201.

www.maskinisten.net
D 1.8. Driver’s seat
4 4
2
3 3A
N D18
For more details see page 89. 6 Seat back inclination

1 Lock for turning seat 7 Height adjustment of the arm rest
2 Adjustment forward/rearward 8 Switch for seat heating
3 Suspension 9 Storage compartment for books
3A. Weight decal Air suspension---driver’s seat (extra equipment) see
4 Height adjustment, by lifting the seat page 197.
5 Seat belt anchor point
D 1.9. Other controls
N D19
Mirror adjustment.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2. Instruments and controls, more detail
D 2.1. Pedals
T161c---T171c, T151eh---T191h
D 2.1.1. Clutch pedal (1)
T1LS D7
DANGER: The brake action is less if the

gearbox oil pressure warning light comes
on and the stop ---indicator light begins to
1 5 flash. The tractor must be stopped and the
2
4 fault fixed before continuing.
T1LS D9
Always depress the clutch pedal when you change gear. D 2.1.3. Locking latch for brake
Let the clutch up gradually. When using the clutch pedal
the automatic operation does not control the multi---disc pedals (3)
clutch operation, the engagement is controlled with the
pedal. With the latch the brake pedals can be latched together.
IMPORTANT: Never rest your foot on the clutch pedal

while driving. Do not allow the clutch to slip more than D 2.1.4. Accelerator pedal (4)
necessary when starting.
The use of the accelerator pedal enables an increase in
When using the clutch to inch the tractor,and with the
the engine speed to be achieved if the hand throttle is at
pedal sometimes not fully depressed, the coupling
less than the full throttle setting.
point of the clutch may change and the clutch engages
sooner. CAUTION: When driving on the road only
the accelerator pedal should be used, and
HiShift---clutch, operating and function, for more details
the hand throttle knob should be in the
see page 55.
minimum position.
D 2.1.2. Brake pedals (2) D 2.1.5. Lock for steering wheel

WARNING: The brake pedals should always inclination (5)
be latched together (3) when driving on the
road. The steering wheel can be moved to 10 different positions
whilst pressing the locking pedal.
When driving in the field or any other working sites the
brake pedals can be used individually as steering brakes.
The front wheel drive always engages when braking
with both brake pedals.
Differential lock always disengages when braking with one
or both brake pedals.
CAUTION: If functional problems occur in
the braking system, the tractor must be
stopped and the fault rectified before
continuing.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.2. Instrument panel

D 2.2.1. Steering wheel (1) D 2.2.3. Shuttle--- and parking brake
lever (3)
Th models
Tc models the shuttle lever see page 70 and parking bra-
ke lever see page 86.
1
2
N D25
IMPORTANT: Do not keep the front wheels in the full lock

position for longer than absolutely necessary; otherwise
the oil temperature in the steering system will rise rapidly
and the pump may be damaged. 3
If the oil supply from the hydraulic pump should fail for
any reason, the tractor can still be steered manually with
the steering wheel. The steering valve will then act as a N D26
pump. Steering is heavy to use and it works slowly.
At full---lock it is possible to force the steering wheel The shuttle--- and parking brake lever can be located on
further. the other side of the steering wheel.
CAUTION: If a malfunction occurs in the
steering system the tractor should be Power shuttle
stopped and the malfunction corrected
before restarting. Front position (F): forward driving direction
Centre position (N): neutral
Rear position (R): reverse driving direction
D 2.2.2. Steering wheel height When changing the driving direction you do not need to
adjustment (2) use the clutch pedal. However, traditional use of the clutch
pedal is still possible when changing direction.
By pushing the lever downwards the steering wheel can
If the clucth pedal is used when changing driving
be moved up or down. Lock the steering wheel by pulling
direction, be sure, that the pedal is fully depressed
the lever up again.
down, before moving the shuttle lever.
CAUTION: Do not adjust steering wheel
position while driving. Safety precautions
--- For safety precautions always pull the collar round
the lever outwards before moving the shuttle lever
away from the parking brake position or back to the
parking brake position.
--- The tractor will not start if the shuttle lever is not in
the parking brake position.
CAUTION: If you must leave the tractor
running with the power shuttle in the neutral
position, switch the gear to neutral as well.

www.maskinisten.net
---On Th models there is a driver detector, which

prevents the shuttle engagement, if the driver is not D 2.2.4. Pre---programming
in the seat. If the shuttle is still engaged the arrow of switch of Powershift (4)
the selected direction flashes on the display panel.
The selected direction is engaged but not driving Not on Tc models.
until the driver sits on the seat and moves the
shuttle lever first to the parking brake position and
then engages the desired direction. A
--- Operation when the speed is under 5km/h:
If the driver leaves the seat for more than two
seconds and the clutch pedal is not pressed for
more than 10% , the shuttle disengages and the 3
direction arrow flashes. The shuttle is engaged but
not driving until the driver sits on the seat, stops the A
tractor and moves the lever to the parking brake
position (P) and then to the desired direction.
--- Operation when the speed is over 5km/h:
When leaving the seat the shuttle is engaged
Check regularly that the driver detector operates as
described above. Testing can be done this way, at low 4
speed while avoiding dangerous situations.
68d 6,1
The desired Powershift gear engagement can be

pre---programmed in the tractor in connection with the
power shuttle as follows:
--- depress the clutch pedal (keep it depressed all the time
while programming)
--- choose the desired driving direction (3)
--- choose the desired Powershift--- gear (A)
--- push the programming button (4) for at least two
seconds. The display shows the pre---programmed
driving direction and Powershift--- gear.
--- when required, program the other driving direction.
Different directions can have different programs.
68d 5 To cancel the pre---programming put the power shuttle
lever (3) in the neutral position then press button (4) for at
least two seconds. The pre---programming disengages if
Parking brake one of the Powershift--- automatic positions is engaged
(switch (8) on page 73).
Parking brake is applied when the power shuttle is in the
centre position by pulling the collar round the lever up and Even if the power is switched off the pre---programming
moving the lever to the down position (P). remains.
This releases the spring which engages the tractor brakes
electro---hydraulically.
WARNING: ALWAYS apply the parking
brake when parking the tractor. The parking
brake applies automatically when stopping
the engine.
When coupling the parking brake on, 4WD is engaged
and all wheels brake.
CAUTION: Do not have the parking brake on
when driving, all wheels will be locked. For
safety reasons the parking brake
engagement speed is limited to 2---6 km/h (3
km/h adjusted in the factory).
The parking brake is released by pulling the collar on the
lever upwards at the same time moving the lever to the
neutral (centre) position.

www.maskinisten.net
5. Both the driving direction forward (F) and the

D 2.2.5. Display (5) Powershift--- gear are shown, when Powershift I, II or III
are preprogrammed in the forward shuttle, the display
Not on Tc models. subsequently shows F I, F II or F III.
6. Both the driving direction backward (R) and the
1 Powershift--- gear are shown, whenPowershift I, II or III
are pre---programmed in the backward shuttle, the
2 display subsequently shows R I, R II or R III.
3
Powershift---sector (II)
4 7. When Automatic Traction Control is activated, the
6 Automatic Traction Control symbol will blink (the
5 parking brake--- and power shuttle lever is in parking
brake --- or in neutral position). The symbol is displayed
7 8 continuously, when the parking brake --- and power
shuttle lever have been cycled through the parking
9 brake and the desired direction has been re---selected.
8. The number of the engaged Powershift--- gear is shown
(1, 2 or 3). When the gear number is engaging it
13 flashes as long as automatic is engaged.
10 11 9. AUTO 1 is shown when automatic Powershift--- gear
changing program 1 is chosen. Subsequently AUTO 2
12 is shown, when automatic Powershift--- gear changing
13a program 2 is chosen. These displays are empty when
11a 12a manual operation is selected.
T D20
Diagnosis sector (III)
There is a separate display unit on the right front pillar in 10. The symbol for the power take---off is shown only if
the tractor, which operates as a display for power shuttle the power take---off is rotating (no front power
and Powershift and also as a fault diagnosis display. If the take---off).
tractor is equipped with the reverse drive controls as 11. In normal situations when the power is on and the
alternative equipment, the corresponding display is also tractor is stationary, the display shows the
on the other rear side pillar. The panel also displays the thermometer and on the bottom line the outside
outdoor temperature and power take---off rotation temperature to the nearest degree (11. a). The
indicator. The display unit has a backlight for working in outside temperature sensor is placed in the front part
the dark and for warming the display screen in cold of the tractor. The engine temperature can falsely
conditions. raise the temperature, especially when the tractor is
On the side panel there is a computer connector for stationary.
checking and adjusting the system (only for authorized 12. If the tractor is moving, instead of the thermometer
workshop use). the tractor symbol and arrow forward are shown and
below it the speed (12. a). The speed display shows
The display unit is divided into three sectors: up to 15 km/h to one decimal place.
--- Power shuttle sector (I) 13. If the system detects an error situation in its own
--- Powershift---sector (II) operation, the picture of the book flashes, the service
--- Diagnosis sector (III) code appears (13. a) on the lower line. In this
instance please contact an authorized workshop.
Power shuttle sector (I)
1. A tractor picture is continuously shown when the power
is on.
2. The driving direction arrow forward is shown when
forward driving direction is engaged. The arrow flashes,
if the shuttle has been operated at a speed over 10
km/h. The arrow flashes also, when the Automatic
Traction Control is activated (Automatic Traction
Control has been switched to ready status).
3. The driving direction arrow backward is shown when
reverse driving direction is engaged. The arrow flashes,
if the shuttle has been operated at a speed of over 10
km/h. The arrow flashes also, when the Automatic
Traction Control is activated (Automatic Traction
Control has been switched to ready status).
4. When the parking brake is on or in the neutral position,
the neutral (N) symbol is shown.
Only one of these signals (N---letter, front arrow, back
arrow) is shown at a time and one of them must always be
shown.

www.maskinisten.net
1. Service function codes --- the service function code (2) shows in the diagnosis
sector below
In a possible error situation the display shows the
following symbols:
2
T D21
--- book symbol (1) is flashing
1.1. The service function codes used by speed cannot be seen in the lower display sector.
Hitech---system IMPORTANT: If the engine does not run over 1500 rpm,
there is a serious fault (air in fuel). Move the tractor to a
The table below shows the different error function levels safe place to avoid serious damages.
and how to drive the tractor away from the working area.
NOTE: If the display shows one of the table codes,
If a service code or codes has been found the symbols of immediately contact your authorized Valtra workshop even
the power take---off, the temperature and the driving though the error may not prevent tractor driving.
Service
function Error meaning / measures
codes
A
A128 * Error in function of the clutch--- or the accelerator pedal electrical circuits, which may change the
tractor functions: the clutch pedal function, the Powershift--- functions or the shuttle functions. The
tractor can normally be driven away from the working area (without loading). Depress the clutch pedal
when engaging the driving direction. When disengaging the transmission use the HiShift--- switches or
the shuttle lever.
A192, Fuel sensor information is incorrect. Driving can be continued normally. Incorrect display of the fuel
A293 gauge.
A215 Error in function of the engine fuel system. The engine output will be limited and the maximum running
speed is 1500 rpm.
A236 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine works but malfunctions may occur (f.eg. lack of
output, smoking). Driving can be continued temporarily, but the malfunction must be repaired as soon
as possible.
A311 *, Gearbox oil temperature information is incorrect. Working and driving can be continued temporarily by
A312 * depressing the clutch pedal when engaging the driving direction. The shuttle automatics do not
function.
A313 * Injection pump position information is incorrect. Working and driving can be continued temporarily by
depressing the clutch pedal when engaging the driving direction. Powershift--- automatics do not
function.
A314 * Faults in function of the clutch pedal for the forward drive controls. Continuing to work may damage
the transmission. Tractor can in normally be driven away from working area (without loading). Depress
the clutch pedal when engaging the driving direction. When disengaging transmission use the HiShift---
switches or shuttle lever.

www.maskinisten.net
Service
codes
A326 * Tractor battery voltage is too low or too high, which may damage the electronics or prevent tractor
driving. If the voltage is too low the oil pressure may reduce and damage the multi---disc clutches for
power shuttle and power shift. Check the battery condition and charging generator performance. In
general driving can be continued, but do not run the tractor for long before the reason for the error
function is identified.
A327 The operating voltage coming to the engine control unit is too low which may prevent engine running.
Check fuses F55 and F56. Check the battery and charging generator condition even if the engine
works.
A330, The operating voltage for the engine injection pump is too low or high. The engine will not start or it
A331 stops. Check fuses F55 and F56. Check the battery and charging generator condition (and charging
voltage) even if the engine works.
A332, The temperature sensor for engine injection air is faulty. The engine works but its output and exhaust
A333 gas emissions change. Driving can be continued temporarily.
A334 The engine injection air temperature is too high. The engine output will be reduced. Check the
cleanness of all tractor radiator grilles (in front). Driving can be continued, but the reason for heating
must be found out as soon as possible.
A335 There is too much water in the water trap for fuel system. Drain water from the water trap in lower part
of prefilter. Drain water also from main filter. See instructions in Operator’s manual in section “Periodic
maintenance”. If water has to be drained frequently from filters, the reason for great water content in
fuel must be found.
A340, Error in the coolant temperature sensor. The engine output will be limited. Driving can be continued
A341 temporarily, but the possible engine overheating may cause engine damage. The fault must be
repaired as soon as possible.
A343 Faults in the function of the front control accelerator pedal. The engine runs only at low idling speed.
Lift up the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch for a moment to the off position. Start the
engine again (do not touch the accelerator pedal). You can try driving by lifting the engine revs with the
cruise control. If cruise control is not fitted, try driving with the hand throttle or accelerator pedal so,
that you do not push the pedal totally to the bottom.
A345 Error in the engine controlling system. For safety reasons the engine runs only at idling speed.
A348 Error in the front wheels position sensor. Driving can be continued normally. The differential lock
automatic does not function.
A350 Faults in the functions of the hand throttle. The engine runs only at idling speed. Turn the hand throttle
to the minimum position and turn the ignition switch for a moment to the off position. Start the engine
again. Try driving with accelerator pedal or cruise control.
A351 * Faults in the function of the clutch pedal for the reverse drive controls. Continuing to work may
damage the transmission. Driving can be continued by turning the seat forwards and starting the
tractor again.
A354, Error in the engine oil pressure sensor. The engine output will be limited. NOTE: The engine oil
A355, pressure may be low. To avoid serious engine damage avoid using the engine, just move the tractor to
A356 a safe place.
A357, Error in the engine boost pressure sensor. The engine output will be limited. Driving can be continued
A358 temporarily, but the malfunction must be found out as soon as possible.
A365 * Faults in the function of the accelerator pedal for the reverse drive controls. Driving can be continued
by turning the seat forwards and re---starting the tractor.
A390 * Tractor battery voltage is too low or too high, which may damage the electronics or prevent tractor
driving. Check the battery condition and alternator performance. In general driving can be continued,
but do not run the tractor for long before the reason for the error function is identified.
C
C131 Error in the tractor electrical system. The engine normally works but there can be errors in some
functions. The engine information can not be seen in the instrument panel (running speed,
temperature, indicator lights). Driving can be continued temporarily, because the engine protection
system is operating.
C132 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine is running with the speed of 1400 rpm so the tractor
can be driven away from the working area. The malfunction must be repaired as soon as possible.
C233 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine stops. Switch power off for at least 5 seconds and
try re---starting again.
C240---C249 Error in the tractor electrical system. Some functions of the tractor do not work or the tractor does not
move. The fault must be found as soon as possible.

www.maskinisten.net
Service
codes
C293 Faults in the function of the cruise control. The control does not function. The tractor can be driven
normally. The fault has to be rectified soon.
C295, C296, Error in the tractors controlling system. Limitation of functions of the tractor.
C297
C330 Error in the engine controlling system or injection pump. The engine moves into “home driving mode”
and the engine runs continuously with the speed of 1400 rpm and with the reduced max output. The
tractor can be driven home or to the workshop. If the engine does not run, switch power off for a while
and try re---starting again. If the engine will not start contact an authorized Valtra workshop.
C901---C929 These service codes do not appear during driving, but they can appear during service and
maintenance. Driving can be continued normally.
C930 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful. Driving can be continued but the display for
slip percentage, automatic 4WD and differential lock automatic do not operate correct. Ask an
authorized Valtra workshop to check the calibration of front axle steering angles.
C931 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful; the front wheels are not in a straight enough
position. Repeat the calibration and drive straight forward.
C932, Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, the 4WD is engaged or there is an error.
C933 Disengage the 4WD and repeat the calibration. Drive until the 4WD indicator light in the instrument
panel goes out and after that press the pre---programming switch of the Power Shift.
C934, Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, the differential lock is engaged or there is an
C935 error. Disengage the differential lock and repeat the calibration.
C936 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, the values are not saved in the memory. Switch
power off for a moment, re---start again and repeat the calibration.
C937 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, time reserved for calibration ran out. Repeat
the calibration and do the calibration steps faster.
C938---C941 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful there may be an error somewhere in the
transmission sensor. Repeat the calibration. If it is not successful, driving can be continued, but the
display for slip percentage, automatic 4WD and differential lock automatic do not operate correctly.
Contact an authorized Valtra workshop.
C942 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful. Switch power off for a moment, re---start again
and repeat the calibration.
C943 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, the driving speed is too low. Check the
calibration instructions from the Operator’s manual. Repeat the calibration, use the driving speed
mentioned in the instructions, about 6 km/h (3,7 miles/h).
C944 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, the driving speed varies too much during the
calibration. Repeat the calibration. Keep the driving speed as stable as possible during the calibration.
Check the ground where you calibrate. The ground must not be uneven, too wet or slippery. Also the
high vegetation under the tractor may disturb the calibration.
C945 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful there may be an error somewhere in the trans-
mission sensor. Repeat the calibration. If it is not successful, driving can be continued, but the display
for slip percentage, automatic 4WD and differential lock automatic do not operate correctly. Contact an
authorized Valtra workshop.
C950---C999 These service codes do not appear during driving, but they can appear during service and
maintenance. Driving can be continued normally.
d
d116 Faults in the Powershift--- push buttons. Working and driving can be continued but the Powershift---
gears will not change.
d117 * Faults in the shuttle lever functions. The transmission is engaged in protection mode. Driving is
prevented for safety reasons until repaired.
d118 Faults in the limit switches of the PTO speed selection lever. The PTO is engaged in the protection
mode and it stops. After switching the power off and on try re---starting again. Working with tractor can
carry on normally.
d123 * Faults in functions of the shuttle lever for the forward drive controls. The transmission is engaged in
protection mode. Driving is prevented for safety reasons until repaired. This will avoid possible damage
to the transmission.
d127 * Error in the parking brake valve circuit function, this may prevent tractor driving. Driving can be tried by
depressing the clutch pedal when engaging the driving direction.

www.maskinisten.net
Service
codes
d129 Errors in the function of the Powershift--- preprogramming buttons (front--- /rear--- ). The Powershift---
preprogramming cannot be used, otherwise working and driving can be continued.
d130 Errors in the function of the PTO starting switches (in the cab / on the mudguard). The PTO is engaged
in protection mode and it is stopped. Otherwise working with tractor can carry on normally.
d133 * Fault in the function of the clutch pedals (front--- / rear--- ), which may prevent tractor driving. Try driving
without touching the clutch pedal. Starting to drive can also be tried in the following way: switch the
power off, turn the seat around, start the engine, engage the new driving direction (without touching
the clutch pedal).
d152, Errors in the functions of the shuttle lever of the reverse drive controls. The PTO is engaged in
d153 protection mode, so tractor driving with reverse drive controls is prevented for safety reasons until
repaired. Driving using the forward drive controls is possible in the following way: switch power off,
turn the seat to the forward position, start the engine, engage the driving direction.
d188 Error in the rocker switch of the 4WD. Driving can be continued. 4WD will engage.
d189 Error in the rocker switch of the differential lock. Driving can be continued, but the differential lock will
disengage.
d215 Faults in the front clutch pedal function. The transmission is engaged in protection mode, so tractor
driving using the forward drive controls is prevented for the safety reasons until repaired. If the tractor
is equipped with reverse drive controls driving with reverse drive controls is possible in the following
way: switch the power off, turn the seat to the rearward position, start the engine, engage the driving
direction.
d254 Faults in the rear clutch pedal function. Transmission is engaged in protection mode, so tractor driving
using the reverse drive controls is prevented for safety reasons until repaired. Driving with forward
drive controls is possible in the following way: switch the power off, turn the seat into the forward
position, start the engine, engage the driving direction.
E
E124 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine stops or it does not start. Switch power off for at
least 5 seconds and then switch power on. If the same code appears again the injection pump may be
faulty.
E211 The operating voltage for the engine injection pump is too low. The engine stops and does not start or
runs unstable. Check fuses F55 and F56. Check the battery and charging generator condition.
E212 Error in the engine controlling system or injection pump. The engine stops immediately. Switch power
off for at least 5 seconds and then try re---starting the engine. If the engine will not start contact an
authorized Valtra workshop.
E213 Error in the engine controlling system, which makes it difficult to stop the engine normally. Switch
power off for at least 5 seconds, re---start the engine, stop the engine and then switch power on. If the
same code appears the error must be rectified quickly.
E214 Error in the engine controlling system or injection pump. The engine stops immediately. Switch power
off for at least 5 seconds and then try re---starting the engine. If the error recurs contact an authorized
Valtra workshop.
E217, Error in the engine injection pump. The engine output will be limited. Switch power off for at least 5
E218, seconds and then re---start the engine. If the same code appears again the injection pump may be
E219 faulty.
E220, Error in the engine controlling system. The engine does not start or it stops. Switch power off for at
E221 least 5 seconds and then switch power on. If the same code appears again the injection pump may be
faulty.
E222 Error in the engine injection pump. The engine output will be limited. Switch power off for at least 5
seconds and then re---start the engine. If the same code appears again the injection pump may be
faulty.
E227, E228, Error in the tractor or engine electrical system. The engine output will be limited. Driving can be
E229, E230, continued temporarily.
E231
E233 Error in the tractor electrical system. The engine will not start.
E234 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine does not start. Contact an authorized Valtra work-
shop.
E235, Error in the engine controlling system. Driving can be continued temporarily, if the tractor moves. Con-
E236 tact an authorized Valtra workshop.

www.maskinisten.net
Service
codes
E244, E245, Error in the tractor electrical system. The traction engages to protect the transmission, the tractor does
E246, E247, not move even though the engine is running.
E248, E249
E250, E251 Error in the transmission controlling system. The transmission may be engaged to neutral or some of
the tractor functions do not operate at all. When the tractor is stationary, disconnect the current from
the ignition lock for a few second, and reconnect. If the same service code appears again, immediately
contact the Valtra service agent.
E252, Error in the transmission controlling system. Driving can be continued, but in some functions there
E253 could be differences comparing earlier functions (e.g. Sigma Power). When the tractor is stationary,
disconnect the current from the ignition lock for a few second, and reconnect. If the same service code
appears again, contact the Valtra service agent.
E260 Error in the engine controlling unit. The engine will not start. Switch power off for at least 5 seconds
and then switch power on. If the same code appears again the engine controlling unit may be faulty.
E261 Error in the engine controlling unit. The engine stops immediately and can not be re---started. Switch
power off for at least 5 seconds and then switch power on. If the same code appears again the engine
controlling unit may be faulty.
E270 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine is normally running but it gives only a part of the
E271 maximum output. Disconnect the current from the tractor for a moment, and start the engine again.
The fault must be rectified soon.
E272 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine is normally running but it gives only a part of the
maximum output. The fault must be rectified soon.
E310 Temperature of the engine controlling unit is too high. The engine may run normally but the
malfunction must be found out quickly. If the engine stops let it get cool and try re---starting again.
E315, Error in the tractor electrical system. The engine should work at least with the accelerator pedal or with
E316 hand throttle but there may be faults in other functions.
E325 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine output will be limited. Switch power off for at least 5
seconds and then re---start the engine. If the same code appears again the injection pump may be
faulty.
E326 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine works but may have some running troubles. Switch
power off for at least 5 seconds and then re---start the engine. If the same code appears again the
injection pump may be faulty.
E368, Error in the engine controlling system. Driving can be continued temporarily, but there can be troubles
E369 in the engine function. The malfunction must be repaired as soon as possible. Driving can be
continued but be prepared for possible malfunctions during driving.
F
F283 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine output will be limited. Driving can be continued
temporarily, but the malfunction must be rectified as soon as possible.
F284 Error in the engine controlling system. Driving can be continued, but the engine running speed and
also the driving speed have been limited to the lower level.
F320 *, Transmission speed sensors may have faults. Working and driving can be continued temporarily by
F321 *, depressing the clutch pedal when engaging driving direction. The PS and shuttle automatics do not
F324 * function.
F322 Error in the transmission controlling system. Driving can not be continued.
F342 The engine rotation speed information is incorrect. The engine output will be limited and the max
running speed is 1800 rpm. Driving can be continued temporarily, but the malfunction must be rectified
as soon as possible.
F366 The front axle speed information is incorrect. Driving can be continued, but the 4WD automatic does
not function.
F367 The rear wheel speed information is incorrect. Driving can be continued, but the automatic of 4WD and
differential lock does not function.
F371, F372 Error in the engine output control. The engine does not give the maximum power.
F373 The front power take---off speed information is incorrect. Driving can be continued normally. The front
power take---off does not function.
F374 Error in the controlling of 4WD. The 4WD can not be used. Driving can be continued.
F375 Error in the controlling of differential lock. The differential lock does not function. Driving can be
continued.

www.maskinisten.net
Service
codes
F382 Error in the radar speed information. Driving can be continued, but automatic of the 4WD and
differential lock does not function.
L
L250 Error in the engine controlling system or injection pump. The malfunction must be repaired as soon as
possible to avoid the possible engine damage. If the engine works well driving can be continued
temporarily. But if the engine runs with the speed of 1400 rpm driving can be continued only to move
the tractor to a safe area for rectifying the error.
L254 Error in the tractor electric or fuel system. The engine will not start or it stops. The too low rotation
speed when starting the engine may be the reason to the error. Check the battery and starter motor
condition. The error can be from air in fuel.
L256 Error in the engine injection pump. The engine output will be limited. There can be air in fuel or the
injection pump can be faulty. The malfunction must be repaired as soon as possible.
The fuel pressure (after the filters) is too low. Check that there is fluid in the fuel tank. Check the fuses.
L302 The feed pump of fuel system may be faulty. The fuel filters may be blocked or frozen. The engine can
be run temporarily to move the tractor to a safe area to avoid the injection pump damage.
L334 The tractor has been driven too fast, or there is an error function in the sensors. High speed driving
may damage the transmission and is a safety risk in traffic. Check that the tyre parameter has been
reset correct (according to the tyre size). Driving can be continued.
L335 Engine rotation speed has been too high or there is an error function in the sensors. The engine can
have too high revs when driving downhill with too high speed or with too low gear. This can damage
the tractor (f.eg. engine, transmission, hydraulic pump). Driving can be continued.
L336 Engine rotation speed has been too high. The engine stops immediately. Start the engine again, after
that driving can be continued normally. The engine can have too high revs when driving downhill with
too high speed or with too low gear. This can damage the tractor (f.eg. engine, transmission, hydraulic
pump).
L337 Oil pressure of the engine is too low. Check the oil level. NOTE: Avoid using the engine to avoid the
possible serious engine damage just short transferring driving can be done with the tractor. Take
immediately contact an authorized Valtra workshop.
L338 Oil pressure of the engine is too low or there is no pressure at all. Engine stops immediately. Check the
oil level. The engine must not be tried to start.
L345 The coolant temperature is too high. The engine output will be limited. Check the coolant level and the
cleanliness of the radiator. Driving can be continued temporarily, but the reason for heating has to be
rectified.
L346 The coolant temperature is very high. Engine stops after 30 seconds. Check the coolant level and the
cleanliness of the radiator. Let the engine cool off a moment and start the engine. Let the engine run
without load until the temperature reduces. Driving can be continued temporarily, but the reason for
heating has to be rectified as soon as possible.
L351 The engine boost pressure is too low. The engine runs but the malfunction has to be checked out as
soon as possible to avoid the possible engine damage. Check the cleanliness of air filter, (see the war-
ning light for blocked filter on instrument panel).
L353 The fuel pressure (after the filters) is too low. Check that there is fluid in the fuel tank. Check fuse F54.
The feed pump of fuel system may be faulty. The fuel filters may be blocked or frozen. The engine can
be run temporarily to move the tractor to a safe area to avoid the injection pump damage.
L355 The temperature of the fuel injection pump is too high. The engine output will be limited. The
malfunction has to be rectified as soon as possible to avoid the possible damage.
L359 Air in the fuel system. The maximum running speed (1500 rpm) and the engine output is limited. Before
repairing the air leakage, the tractor can only be driven the minimum distance necessary, in order that
the injection pump does not damage.
L360 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine does not give the maximum output, but the driving
can be continued temporarily. Contact an authorized Valtra workshop.
L419 The PTO shaft rotation speed may be too low. Disc clutch may slip. The PTO is engaged in protection
mode and it stops. After switching the power off and on starting can be tried again. Check first that the
implement is not jammed/seized. Otherwise working with the tractor can be done normally.
L422 * Power transmission clutches may slip. The transmission is engaged in protection mode, so the tractor
cannot be driven until repaired. Check fuse F22.
L449 The disc clutch of the 4WD may slip. The 4WD disengages. Driving can be continued.

www.maskinisten.net
Service
codes
P
P101 * Faults in Powershift--- valves. The Powershift is engaged in protection mode. Working and driving can
P103 * be continued temporarily by depressing clutch pedal when engaging the driving direction. Only one
P105 * Powershift--- speed operates.
P107 * Faults in the shuttle valves. The power shuttle is engaged in protection mode. Working and driving can
P109 * be continued temporarily (only in one driving direction) by depressing the clutch pedal when engaging
the driving direction.
P125 Error in the PTO valve circuit function. The PTO is engaged in protection mode and it stops. After
switching the power off and on starting can be tried again. Otherwise working with tractor can be done
normally.
P131 Error in the engine starting circuit function. This may prevent the engine starting. If the code comes
into view when the engine is running, working and driving can be continued in general, but next time
starting may be prevented. Move the tractor to a safe area.
P132 Error in the 4WD control function, which may prevent 4WD engagement when engaging the parking
brake. NOTE: when choosing the parking place. In general 4WD operates in other functions.
P233 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine will not start or it stops. The injection pump can be
faulty.
P234 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine output will be limited. There can be troubles in the
engine function. The malfunction must be repaired as soon as possible.
* If the display shows simultaneously two or more service 2.1. Changing selection of driving start--- and
codes marked with a star, then tractor driving is shuttle---automatic ON/OFF
prevented until repaired, for safety reasons.
In addition the tractor has a function which delays the The driving start--- and shuttle---automatic (on page 72) is
activation of the parking brake when stopping the engine. on as factory default/installed.
The function activates: Remove any possible pre---programming of the Powershift

---gear (before changing the settings values, note down
--- if the engine revs are under 400 r/min over one second, the values if needed).
but remains running
--- if the driving speed is over 5 km/h 1. Stop the engine and turn the ignition switch off.
In this case the tractor does not move and no service
codes are shown in the display.
To continue the driving the power/ignition has to be
switched off (the engine stopped) and started again.
2. Resetting parameters
Driving start --- and shuttle ---automatic on/off, changing

of tyre size, temperature unit (C / F), speed unit (km/h / 2
miles/h)
If the size of the tyres on the tractor are changed, then the
tyre parameters have to be changed according to the
following instructions. 1
In the same way driving start--- and shuttle---automatic
on/off, changing of temperature C/F or changing of speed
indication (km/h / miles/h) can also be selected according T D22
to the following instructions.
2. Push the pre---programming knob of the Powershift (1),
push the clutch pedal down and turn the ignition on at
the same time.

www.maskinisten.net
Setting mode
menu
Setting code (on picture point 5)
(on picture
point 4)
3 0.5 ... 20 = active state time for driv-
ing start--- and shuttle---automatic
10
0 = Driving start--- and shuttle---auto-
matic Off
Setting driving speed parameters
20
(tyre)
0...5 = rear PTO engaging speed, 0
74
lowest, 5 fastest
100 Outdoor temp. unit selection: ˚C or ˚F.
Driving speed unit selection: km/h or
110
miles/h
NOTE: In the setting mode menu (4) stepping up/down

can be achieved with the Powershift--- push buttons (2) up
T D23 and down (symbol is flashing) and the selection is
confirmed with the Powershift pre---programming button
3. The symbol of one main mode (3) F II, will then flash (1) (symbol is invisible and index numbers are
(2 HZ), in the upper power shuttle sector. Other continuously displayed in the right hand side of lower
symbols are invisible during this process. diagnostics sector). After this the setting/calibrating
4. Confirm the selection by depressing the Powershift procedure can be carried out. Moving to the next point is
pre---programming button (1). done by pushing the Powershift pre---programming button
(1), after which the symbols start to flash again and a new
point can be stepped through by using the Powershift---
push buttons (2) in the setting mode menu. The
confirmation is then carried out again with the
pre---programming button (1) etc.
3 NOTE: Escape from the setting mode by switching off the
ignition switch..
T D24
5. After this the main mode symbol F III (3) is displayed

continuously and at the same time the first setting
mode symbol 10 (4) started to flash (2 Hz) in the left 4
hand side of the lower diagnostics sector.
6. The display is now in the setting mode and various
settings can be done.
T D25
NOTE: When the symbol FIII (3) was confirmed, the
number 10 started to flash in the LH side of the lower 7. Select the setting mode symbol 10 (flashing) (setting of
display block. Number 10 (4) is the starting point in the driving start--- and shuttle---automatic) in the setting
setting mode menu. In the following table the setting mode menu (4) by stepping up using the hare/up
mode menus (4) are explained. Powershift--- push button (2) (in the speed gear lever
knob) (if the selection goes past/beyond use the
tortoise/down Powershift--- button to return to the
desired value), and confirm the selection by pushing
the Powershift pre---programming button (1).

www.maskinisten.net
2.2. Resetting driving speed / tyre parameters

By changing this parameter value the driving speed
display can be adjusted so that it shows the correct value
according to the tractor tyres and transmission type. This
procedure is carried out in the factory for all new tractors.
If tyres of different dimensions are fitted to the tractor after
delivery, the parameters must be reset according to these
instructions.
5
2
M D32
8. The setting mode symbol 10 disappears from the

1
display and the present parameter value (5) is visible in
the RH side segment:
0.5...20 = active state time for driving start --- and T D22
shuttle ---automatic as seconds (controlled system 0,5 s)
0 = Driving start --- and shuttle ---automatic Off
1. Activate the setting mode menu according to the
The factory setting is 4.0 s driving start--- and setting instructions of driving start--- and
shuttle---automatic is on. shuttle---automatic points 1---7 starting on page 45.
9. Select the desired 4WD active state time or 0 =
disengaged with Powershift--- push buttons (2) (in the
speed gear lever knob).
10. When the desired parameter value (5) is in the
display, it is confirmed by pushing the Powershift
pre---programming button (1) until the set parameter
value (5) disappears from display and the setting
mode symbol 10 starts to flash.
NOTE: Escaping from the setting mode is done by
switching off the ignition.
T D27
2. Select the setting mode symbol 20 (flashing) (setting of

tyre parameters) in the setting mode menu (4) by
stepping up using the hare/up Powershift--- push
button (2) (in the speed gear lever knob) (if the
selection goes past/beyond use the tortoise/down
button to return to the desired value), and confirm the
selection by pushing the Powershift pre---programming
button (1).

www.maskinisten.net
2.3. Rear PTO engaging speed

The rear PTO engaging speed can be adjusted. The
factory setting for the tractor is the lowest engaging
speed, which it is recommended not to change.
If the index value is changed (= engaging speed), make
sure that the PTO shaft is suitable to withstand the faster
starting.
5
2
T D28
3. The setting mode symbol 20 disappears from the 1

the RH side segment.
4. The parameter value (5) can be changed by using the
T D22
Powershift--- push buttons (2) in the speed gear lever
knob.
1. Activate the setting mode menu according to the
NOTE: The parameters according to the tyres and setting instructions of driving start--- and
transmission types are the same as for calibrating the shuttle---automatic points 1---7 starting on page 45.
Agroline/Proline---instrument on LCD---display (the
instrument has to be calibrated also when changing the
tyres, see page 57). In the Proline instrument panel it is
enough when the parameters are set for the transmission
according to this instruction, see table on Specifications
on page 183.
5. When the desired parameter value (5) is in the display,
it is confirmed by pushing the Powershift
value (5) disappears from display and the setting mode
symbol 20 starts to flash.
6. You can check the set parameter value (5) by repeating
the points 2---5. Now the correct parameter value has
been set.
M D33
2. Select the setting mode symbol 74 (flashing) (setting of

the rear PTO engaging speed) in the setting mode
menu (4) by stepping up using the hare/up
Powershift--- push button (2) (in the speed gear lever
knob), and confirm the selection by pushing the
Powershift pre---programming button (1).

www.maskinisten.net
2.4. Changing temperature unit of outdoor

temperature display
The outdoor temperature unit can be changed between
˚F or ˚C.
1
M D34
3. The setting mode symbol 74 disappears from the T D22

the RH side segment. 1. Activate the setting mode menu according to the
4. The parameter value (5) can be changed by using the setting instructions of driving start--- and
Powershift--- push buttons (2) in the speed gear lever shuttle---automatic points 1---7 starting on page 45.
knob.
The parameter value can be selected from 0 ... 5
(adjustment in steps of 0,2 s)
0 = lowest engaging speed, the factory setting =
recommended
...
5 = fastest engaging speed
5. When the desired parameter value (5) is in the display,
it is confirmed by pushing the Powershift
value (5) disappears from display and the setting mode
symbol 74 starts to flash.
6. You can check the set parameter value (5) by repeating
the points 2---5. Now the correct parameter value has
been set.
4
T D29
2. Step using the Powershift--- push buttons (2) (in the

speed gear lever knob) in the setting mode menu (4)
and select the setting mode symbol 100, which is
flashing (choosing temperature unit), and confirm the
button (1).

www.maskinisten.net
2.5. Changing driving speed unit

The driving speed unit can be either km/h or miles/h.
5
1
1=Celsius
2=Fahrenheit
T D30 T D22
3. The setting mode symbol 100 disappears from the 1. Activate the setting mode menu according to the
display and the present parameter value (5) is visible in setting instructions of driving start--- and
the RH side segment: shuttle---automatic points 1---7 starting on page 45.
1=˚C.
2=˚F.
The factory setting is according to the marketing area.

4. Select the desired temperature unit by pushing the
Powershift--- push buttons (2) (in the speed gear lever
knob) and confirm the selection by pushing the
Powershift pre---programming button (1). After this the
outdoor temperature is shown either in Celsius or
Fahrenheit units.
NOTE: Using the formula below the Celsius---units can be
converted into Fahrenheit---units.
tF = 9 x tC + 32
5 4
T D31
2. Step using the Powershift--- push buttons (2) (in the

speed gear lever knob) in the setting mode menu (4)
and select the setting mode symbol 110, which is
flashing (choosing driving speed unit) and confirm the
button (1).

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.2.6. Headlight dipper, direction

indicators etc. (6)
On Tc models always on the left side of the steer wheel.
5
6
1= km/h
2=miles/h
T D32
3. The setting mode symbol 110 disappears from the

display and the present driving speed unit value (5) is 68d 7,4
visible in the RH side segment:
1=km/h. Headlight dipper:

2=miles/h. Main beam/Dipped beam will change when pulling in
turn the lever towards the driver.
The factory setting is according to the marketing area. Direction indicators
4. Select the desired driving speed unit by pushing the Lever in front position: LH indicators on.
Powershift--- push buttons (2) (in the speed gear lever Lever in rear position: RH indicators on.
knob) and confirm the selection by pushing the
Powershift pre---programming button (1). After this the Horn
driving speed is shown either in km/h or miles/h. Push the button at the end of the lever.
NOTE: Escaping from the setting mode is done by Windscreen wiper
switching off the ignition. Operates when turning the control lever. The wiper has
NOTE: With the formula below the km/h---units can be drizzle position and 2 speeds.
converted into miles/h---units. Windscreen washer
Operates when pushing the control lever inwards.
1 km/h = 0,6214 miles/h
Headlight flasher
NOTE: If the selected driving speed unit is miles/h, Operates when moving the lever towards the driver when
symbol km/h is not shown at all in the display. the headlights on dipped beam are switched on.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.2.7. Light switch (7) D 2.2.10. Upper headlights (extra

equipment) (10)
10
N D27
T D35
The rocker switch has three positions.When the switch is
pushed to the 1st position the parking lights are switched
When this switch is pressed the upper headlights are
on. When the switch is pushed to the 2nd position the
switched on. When the upper headlights are on the lower
headlights are switched on.
headlights in the front are off and vice versa.
NOTE: If the lights are left on after turning the current off
the buzzer begins to sound.
When the current is off, the parking lights and the D 2.2.11. Starter switch (11)
headlights can be switched on without buzzer sounding.
This function is useful when leaving the tractor standing
with parking lights on.
D 2.2.8. Switch for hazard warning

flashers (8)
When this switch is pressed all four direction indicators
flash. Pressing the switch again stops the flashers.
D 2.2.9. Main circuit switch (9) (not

standard) 11
The main circuit switch is an extra equipment, see “Extra

and alternative equipment” on page 188.
N D 225
Starter switch positions:

Th models
Stop, engine

www.maskinisten.net
Power on
When the ignition switch is turned from the stop
D 2.2.12. Agroline---instrument
panel (12)
position to position , in cold conditions, while
the engine is cold, the automatic glowing is turned The driver receives information from the meters, LCD dis-
on and the glow indicator light in the instrument play unit, LED warning lights, switches and buzzer.
panel comes on.
(normal position for running the engine, which also
allows for the electrical equipment to be used when D 2.2.12.1. Fuel gauge and indicator
the engine is not running) light (12.1)
Starting position
If the automatic glowing is on, the engine can be
started when the glowing light in the instrument 12.4 12.2 12.4
panel is gone out. 12.1 12.3
If automatic glowing is not used, the switch can be
turned directly to the starting position.
Th models:
WARNING: Do not turn the starter key to
STOP position when driving. When the
power is off, the parking brake applies and 12.1a
ALL WHEELS LOCK. 12.5
WARNING: If the engine stops while tractor
is moving (i.e. out of fuel) do not depress
the clutch pedal. When the tractor is moving 12.6
and the transmission engaged the engine is 68d 42
running and there is pressure in a system
If the engine stops:
The fuel level indicator light (12.1a) comes on when about
T121c ---T131c and T121h---T31h; 15 l fuel is left (without extra tank). Filling the tank is
--- the pressure is zero and ALL WHEELS recommended immediately when the light has come on.
LOCK.
T161c ---T171c and T151eh---T191h;
--- with the help of pressure accumulator it D 2.2.12.2. Tachometer (12.2)
is possible to have controlled braking
before the pressure drops to zero and ALL The tachometer (rev. counter) shows the engine speed in
WHEELS LOCK. hundreds of revolutions per minute.
The STOP position of the starter switch can D 2.2.12.3. Coolant thermometer (12.3)
be used as an EMERGENCY STOP. The
tractor and several movements of the
The zone between blue (cold) and red (hot) is the normal
implements can be stopped if any fault
operating temperature. Stop the engine if the needle
occurs, by turning the starter key to the
moves into the red zone. The Stoplight is flashing, if the
STOP position (the engine stops, all the
needle moves into the red zone.
wheels lock, the transmission disengages
and the movement of the linkage stops).
D 2.2.12.4. Indicator lights for direction
indicator (12.4)
When using the direction indicator, the indicator light for
the chosen direction flashes. If the light flashes quickly,
one of the bulbs on the tractor has failed.
D 2.2.12.5. Indicator light for main

beam (12.5)
This indicator light comes on, when the main beam is on.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.2.12.6. Indicator lights on instrument panel (12.6)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
50---12,2
1 Direction indicator warning light for second trailer 15 Tc models

(green). If one of the bulbs on the combination has Parking brake (red) is on
failed, this light will not come on.) Th models
2 Direction indicator warning light for first trailer (green). If Parking brake (red) is on when the shuttle lever is in
one of the bulbs on the combination has failed, this the parking brake position. If the indicator light is on
light will not come on.) and the STOP light is flashing, the parking brake
3 Not in use cable is broken or incorrectly adjusted --- see adjust-
4 Engine air cleaner warning light for blocked filter ing instructions on page 149.
(yellow), filter must be serviced 16 Low fuel level (yellow), comes on when about 50 l fuel
5 Engine oil pressure (red) is too low (the light is on is left.
continuously) IMPORTANT: Do not let the fuel run out, the pump may
Tc models be damaged without lubricating.
Additionally the flashing of the indicator light indicates
the engine malfunction. Then the light flashes at inter- Additionally the cyclical flashing of the indicator light indi-
vals of about 4 seconds (on 0.5 s., pause 3.5 s., on 0.5 cates the following things (on the Th models also the
s.,...). service code comes on):
--- The fuel feed pressure is low
Immediately contact an authorized Valtra workshop.
IMPORTANT: If the engine does not run over 1500 (on 0,3 s, pause 0,3 s, on 0,3 s, pause 1 s, on 0,3 s,
rpm, there is a serious fault (air in fuel). Move the trac- pause 0,3 s, on 0,3 s, pause 1 s, ...)
tor to a safe place to avoid serious damages. --- Water in fuel
6 Not in use .
7 STOP indicator light (red) --- flashes to indicate serious (on 0,5 s, pause 0,5 s, on 0,5 s, pause 0,5 s, ...)
fault, i.e. engine oil pressure too low (5), gearbox oil Water draining instructions are given in the “Periodic
pressure too low (8), gearbox oil temperature too high maintenance” section, point 9 on page 127.
(9), parking brake cable broken or incorrectly adjusted 17 Battery charging (red) is on when charging does not
(15) or engine temperature too high (gauge). operate.
IMPORTANT: The tractor and the engine must be IMPORTANT: The charging failure must be fixed at
stopped immediately. Must only be continued in an once. When the voltage is reduced, the electric valves
emergency, e.g. the tractor can be moved to the road- may reduce the oil pressure for the multi---disc clut-
side. ches and cause clutch slippage which may damage
8 Gearbox oil pressure (red) is too low the clutch discs.
9 Gearbox oil temperature (red) is too high. 18 Powershift gear I (green) is engaged,
--- the warning light is on and the stop---indicator light Tc models
flashes. Temperature can be shown on the LCD display, 19 Powershift gear II (green) is engaged,
instructions on page 56. Tc models
10 Hydraulic pressure and auxiliary return oil filters re- 20 Powershift gear III (green) is engaged,
striction indicator light (red) --- comes on along, when Tc models
engine is running and filter(s) requires service --- see 21 Differential lock (yellow) is engaged
instructions on page 132. 22 Rear power take---off (yellow)
NOTE: Light may come on when tractor is started --- is on when PTO shaft is rotating
when it is very cold --- see cold start instructions on --- flashes when the shaft does not rotate, but the
page 91. selection lever is engaged
11 Front wheel drive (yellow) is engaged When the starter switch is turned on, all indicator lights in
12 Front power take---off (yellow) is on use will come on momentarily and the following indicator
13 Cold start glow (yellow) is on when the starter switch lights will remain on until engine is started and systems
is in the position and the engine is cold are operating normally:
--- see starting instructions on page 91. --- engine oil pressure (5)
14 Not in use --- stop light is (flashing) (7)
--- gearbox oil pressure (8)
--- front wheel drive (11)
--- parking brake (15)
--- battery charging (17)

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.2.12.7.LCD---display unit in Agroline 2.Displays chosen with change over switch,

instrument panel (12.7) switch (12.8) (The top line has five basic functions
(the sixth for extra equipment), the bottom line one
function):
2.1. Functions on the top line
T D39
12.8
The display has two lines.
1.Continuously shows a display that cannot

be chosen with a switch (two functions on the 50---12,39
bottom line):
By pressing the symbol side of the change over switch for
LCD---display unit (12.8) the display changes.
1.1. Operating hours
2.1.1. Driving trip m, km/miles
50---12,22
50---12,25
The display shows the operating hours to tenths of deci-

mal accuracy. The operating hours are shown on the bot- The driving trip display shows the trip up to 1 km with an
tom line, when the power is on and the tractor is not mo- accuracy of one meter. The display shows symbol m. After
ving. one kilometre the symbol in display changes to km and
the driving trip shows up to 100 km, to two decimals
1.2. Driving speed km/h / miles/h places. After 100 km only one decimal place is shown.
The maximum display is 999.9 km.
If the driving trip unit (km / miles) needs to be changed,
please contact an authorized workshop.
2.1.2. Rear PTO rotating speed
50---12,23
When the driving speed is under 3 km/h, the symbol L is

shown in the display. The display shows up to 15 km/h to
one decimal place.
The driving speed unit (km/h / miles/h) can be changed
50---12,26
by an authorized workshop.
When switching the power on the operating hours are When the rear power take---off is engaged the symbol is
shown first on the bottom line. When the tractor starts to on and the PTO rotating speed shows beside it on the top
move the bottom line display changes to show the driving line.
speed.

www.maskinisten.net
2.1.3. Front PTO rotating speed (extra equipment) 2.2. Functions on the bottom line
2.2.1. Maintenance schedule
50---12,27
50---12,31
When the front power take---off is engaged, as extra
equipment, the symbol is on and the PTO rotating speed
shows beside it on the top line. When the tool symbol and periodic maintenance hour
number are illuminated in the display, the appropriate ser-
vice work has to be carried out by an authorized work-
2.1.4. Clock shop. If this work is not carried out, the tool symbol and
periodic maintenance hour number are shown for 10 sec-
onds whenever the ignition is switched on. When the ser-
vice has carried out this warning will be deleted by simul-
taneously pressing the opposite side to the symbol of the
change over switch (12.8) and switching the ignition on.
The tool symbol will illuminate again when the next service
interval has been reached.
50---12,28 When the power is switched on, the last display is shown
in the display unit.
2.3. Resetting driving trip to zero

2.1.5. Transmission temperature
12.8
50---12,29
50---12,40
When the temperature is under 40°C the display shows
---LO--- and when over 40°C it shows the temperature. If
the temperature rises over 90°C, clean the radiator and --- Choose the driving trip on the display by pressing the
check the gearbox oil level. symbol side of the change over switch for LCD---display
unit (12.8).
--- Then press and hold down the opposite side to the
2.1.6. Position of lower links %, 0---100 AC
symbol of the change over switch (12.8) until the dis-
play is zero.
The maximum display is 999.9 km.
50---12,30
The display shows symbol AC and the position of the

lower links as a percentage scale 0 --- 100. 0 = the lower
links are in the lowest position and 100 = the lower links
are in the top position. When the lower links are in the
middle position, the display shows the number 50.

www.maskinisten.net
3. Setting mode --- To change the hours press the symbol side of the
change over switch (12.8).
The parameter values of Agroline---instrumentpanel are --- Set the hours by pressing the opposite side to the sym-
changed in the setting mode. bol of the change over switch (12.8).
If the setting mode is not altered for over 10 seconds, the The new time is set and the display goes into “normal”
display changes into the normal mode. mode after about 10 seconds without making any
changes or by pressing the symbol side of the change
over switch (12.8) for over 3 seconds.
12.8
3.3. Changing the Agroline tyre parameters for
different tyres
In addition to the instrumentation also the transmission
has to be calibrated, see instructions on page 47.
If the tyres are changed to a different rolling diameter, the
T D201 instrument must be calibrated on the following way:
--- With the power switched on and the clock function se- 12.8
lected, press and hold the symbol side of change over
switch for LCD---display unit (12.8) for over 3 seconds,
until the display is in the setting mode (in 12 or 24
hours display).
Go to the other settings by pressing the symbol side of
the change over switch (12.8).
3.1. Clock for 12 or 24 hours display, setting 50---12,42
--- Activate the tyres parameter in the setting mode (in-

12.8 struction 3.) The letter m will start to flash.
--- Select the right code number by pressing the opposite
side to the symbol of the change over switch (12.8). By
keeping the opposite side to the symbol of the of the
change over switch pressed down the numbers change
continuously.
Changing the parameters is complete when the display
goes into “normal” mode after about 10 seconds or by
T D202 pressing the symbol side of the change over switch (12.8)
for over 3 seconds.
--- Go to the setting mode of the clock display (12/24) (see
instruction point 3.). NOTE: The code number value can vary between
--- Set the desired hour display by pressing the opposite 100---400. When pressing the switch rear edge, the code
side to the symbol of the change over switch (12.8). value changes from a smaller value to greater one. The
code numbers and corresponding tyres are listed in the
The setting of the clock display is complete when the table on the page 183.
display changes into “normal” mode after about 10
seconds or by pressing the symbol side of the change
3.4. Setting the backlight brightness level
over switch (12.8) for over 3 seconds.
3.2. Resetting time 12.8
12.8
T D321
--- Activate the backlight brightness level (bL) in the setting

50---12,41
mode (instruction 3.). The backlights of the instrument
panel will flash few times.
--- Activate the clock in the setting mode (instruction 3.), --- Select the right level by pressing the opposite side to
(the minutes start to flash). the symbol of the change over switch (12.8), adjusting
--- Set the minutes by pressing the opposite side to the area 1---7.
symbol of the change over switch (12.8). By keeping
the opposite side to the symbol of the of the change The backlight brightness level is set and the display goes
over switch pressed down the numbers change continu- into “normal” mode after about 10 seconds without
ously. making any changes or by pressing the symbol side of
the change over switch (12.8) for over 3 seconds.

www.maskinisten.net
3.5. Settings made by service 3.5.5. AC0, linkage lower position, voltage
NOTE: The user is not aloud to change the following

settings. The incorrect values may cause faulty displays.
3.5.1. Generator pulse number
T D205
3.5.6. Rear PTO speed display on/off

T D209
All models; 406
3.5.2. Front PTO pulse number
T D206
All models, On
3.5.7. Front PTO speed display on/off

T1ch D26
All models; 47
3.5.3. Choice the units km/miles
T D207
3.5.8. Sigma display on/off
T D203
3.5.4. AC100, linkage upper position, voltage
T D208
Model T191h, On
Other models, OFF
T D204

www.maskinisten.net
Change over switch for

D 2.2.12.8. D 2.2.13.2. Coolant thermometer (13.2)
LCD---display unit in Agroline
The zone between blue (cold) and red (hot) is the normal
instrument panel (12.8) operating temperature. Stop the engine if the needle
moves into the red zone. The STOP light is flashing, if the
needle moves into the red zone (see page 60).
D 2.2.13.3. Tachometer (13.3)

12.8
The tachometer (rev. counter) shows the engine speed in
hundreds of revolutions per minute.
D 2.2.13.4. Speedometer (13.4)

The speedometer displays the speed in kilometres per
hour (mph).
D 2.2.13.5. Indicator lights for direction

indicator (13.5)
When using the direction indicator, the indicator light for
50---12,38
the chosen direction flashes. If the light flashes quickly,
one of the bulbs on the tractor has failed.
The operation of change over switch for LCD---display unit
is explained under “LCD---display unit” starting on page
55. D 2.2.13.6. Indicator light for main beam
(13.6)
D 2.2.13. Proline---instrument panel (13) This indicator light comes on, when the main beam is on.
Proline---instrument panel is available as alternative---/extra

equipment.
The driver receives information from the gauges, a
graphical display, LED warning lights, switches and a
buzzer.
D 2.2.13.1. Fuel gauge and indicator

light (13.1)
13.2 13.5 13.3 13.5

13.1 13.4
13.1a
13.6
M D7
The fuel level indicator light (13.1a) comes on when about

15 l fuel is left (without extra tank). Filling the tank is
recommended immediately when the light has come on.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.2.13.7. Indicator lights on instrument panel (13.7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
T D110
1 Direction indicator warning light for second trailer

14 The ---indicator light (on model T191h) is
((green). If one of the bulbs on the combination has
failed, this light will not come on.) illuminated when the tractor is operating in the high
2 Direction indicator warning light for first trailer ((green). power range when using the PTO (the light is
If one of the bulbs on the combination has failed, this continuously on, yellow). Additionally in some error
light will not come on.) situations the indicator light flashes, in this instance
3 Not in use please contact an authorized workshop.
4 Engine air cleaner warning light for blocked filter 15 Parking brake (red) is on when the shuttle lever is in
(yellow), filter must be serviced the parking brake position. If the indicator light is on
--- warning light is on when the engine is running and and the STOP light is flashing, the parking brake
the buzzer is sounding (once) cable is broken or incorrectly adjustedsee adjusting
5 Engine oil pressure (red) is too low instructions on page 157.
---warning light is on when the engine is running and 16 Low fuel level (yellow), comes on when about 15 l fuel
the buzzer is sounding continuously and the is left and the buzzer is sounding (once). If the tractor
stop---indicator light flashes is fitted with the extra tank the level will be about 30 l.
6 Lit together with warnings (yellow) 17 Battery charging (red)
7 STOP indicator light (red) --- flashes to indicate serious ---the indicator light is on, when battery charging is
fault, i.e. engine oil pressure too low (5), gearbox oil not operating and the buzzer is sounding (once)
pressure too low (8), gearbox oil temperature too high IMPORTANT: The charging failure must be fixed at
(9), parking brake cable broken or incorrectly adjusted once. When the voltage is reduced, the electric valves
(15) or engine temperature too high (gauge). may reduce the oil pressure for the multi---disc
IMPORTANT: The tractor and the engine must be clutches and cause clutch slippage which may
stopped immediately. Must only be continued in an damage the clutch discs.
emergency, e.g. the tractor can be moved to the 18 Rear linkage (yellow) in transport position =
roadside. lift/stop/lower switch is in the lift position
8 Gearbox oil pressure (red) is too low 19 Cruise---control (yellow) is on (constant driving speed
--- warning light is on, the buzzer is sounding (once) / constant engine revs chosen)
and the stop---indicator light flashes 20 Not in use
9 Gearbox oil temperature (red) is too high 21 Differential lock (yellow) is engaged
--- warning light is on, the buzzer is sounding (once) 22 Rear power take---off (yellow).The indicator light
and the stop---indicator light flashes. Temperature will flashes, when the rear power take---off has been
be shown on the LCD display, instructions on activated ready to operate. Light is on continuously,
page 56. when the rear power take---off is engaged.
10 Hydraulic pressure and auxiliary return oil filters
restriction indicator light (red) --- comes on along, When the starter switch is turned on, all indicator lights in
when engine is running and filter(s) requires service --- use will come on momentarily and the following indicator
se instructions on page 132.) lights will remain on until engine is started and systems
NOTE: light may come on when tractor is started are operating normally:
when it is very cold --- se cold start instructions on --- engine oil pressure (5)
page 91. --- stop light (is flashing) (7)
11 Four---wheel drive (yellow) is engaged --- gearbox oil pressure (8)
12 Front power take---off (yellow) is on, extra equipment. --- front wheel drive (11)
Light is on continuously, when front power take---off is --- parking brake (15)
on. --- battery charging (17)
13 Cold start glow (yellow) is on when the starter switch
is in the position and the engine is gold
--- see starting instructions on page 91.

www.maskinisten.net
LCD---display unit (liquid

D 2.2.13.8. 2.1. Functions on the top line
crystal display) in Proline instrument

panel (13.8)
13.9
M D8
By pressing the symbol side of the change over switch for

T D111 LCD---display unit (13.9) the display changes.
The display has three lines. 2.1.1. Working time
1. Fixed displays (two functions on the bottom

line):
1.1. Operating hours
T D115
Working time is, for example, the time that has been
devoted to ploughing a certain area.
Working time is stored in the memory when the power is
T D112 switched off from the meter.
The operator can reset the counter. See more details on
Running hours are displayed with an accuracy of plus or page 64.
minus one decimal point when the power is on.
2.1.2. Cruise control
1.2. Clock
M D25
T D113
This display mode indicates the status of the cruise

The clock is displayed on the bottom row, either in 12 or control in connection with the cruise text as follows:
24 hour display. For more details on changing the hour RPM = constant engine running speed
display, see page 66. KMH = constant driving speed
Setting the correct time, see page 66. The numerical value displays the value of programmed
constant engine revs/driving speed.
2.Displays chosen with change over
When the constant engine running speed or driving speed
switch (13.9) is engaged the corresponding text shows with white on
dark background (constant driving speed in picture) and
When the power is switched on, the display that was also the cruise indicator light comes on in the instrument
selected last is put on the screen.
panel.
The cruise control instructions, for more details see
page 76.

www.maskinisten.net
2.1.3. Driving speed km/h, mph 2.1.6. Front PTO speed (extra equipment)
T D117
T D120
The driving speed is displayed as follows:

--- When driving speed is under 3 km/h (2 miles/h), the The PTO rotation speed shows beside the symbol (at the
symbol L is displayed on the screen. accuracy of 10 rpm).
--- Driving speeds of 0---10 km/h (0---10 miles/h) are
displayed with an accuracy of plus or minus one 2.1.7. Engine running speed
decimal point.
--- Driving speeds of 10---15 km/h (10---15 miles/h) are
displayed with an accuracy of plus or minus one
decimal point in steps of 0.2 units.
--- Driving speeds of over 15 km/h (15 miles/h) are
displayed without decimals.
You can change the speed unit (km/h / miles/h) by
changing the unit of length, instructions in section 4.8. on T D121
page 67.
This display mode shows the engine RPMs in 10 of

2.1.4. Wheel slip (0---100) revolutions per minute (the gauge with a needle displays
the RPMs in hundreds of RPMs).
2.1.8. Immediate fuel consumption (l/ha,

gal/acre)
T D118
This display mode shows the percentage wheel slip (the

tractor must be equipped with slip control). The wheel slip
percentage is attained by comparing the speed
T D174
information from the radar (ground speed) to the rotation
speed of the wheels.
The radar starts to operate at a speed 0.3 km/h (0.2 This display mode shows the immediate fuel consumption
miles/h). Before that the display shows only a zero. on the area worked.
The unit of area (ha, acre) can be altered by changing the
2.1.5. Rear PTO speed unit of length, see instructions in section 4.8. on page 67.
Litre, Gallon UK or Gallon US can be selected for the unit
of volume, see instructions in section 4.9. on page 67.
2.1.9. Average fuel consumption (l/ha, gal/acre)
T D119
The PTO rotation speed shows beside the symbol (at the
accuracy of 10 rpm).
T D175
This display mode shows the average fuel consumption

on the area worked.

www.maskinisten.net
unit of length. See instructions in section 4.8. on page 67.

2.1.13. Position of lower links %, 0---100
The operator can reset the fuel consumption information,
see instructions in section 2.3. on page 64.
2.1.10. Immediate fuel consumption (l/h, gal/h)
M D26
The display shows symbol AC/R and the position of the

lower links as a percentage scale 0 --- 100. 0 = the lower
links are in the lowest position and 100 = the lower links
are in the top position. When the lower links are in the
middle position, the display shows the number 50.
T D176
2.1.14. Lifting link position of front linkage %,
This display mode shows the immediate fuel consumption

0---100
in an hour.
2.1.11. Average fuel consumption

M D27
This function is not used even if the display is activated.

The display shows symbol AC/F and the position of the
lifting links as a percentage scale 0 --- 100. 0 = the lifting
links are in the lowest position and 100 = the lifting links
T D177
are in the top position. When the lifting links are in the
middle position, the display shows the number 50. The
This display mode shows the average fuel consumption in front linkage is extra equipment.
an hour.
Litre, Gallon UK or Gallon US can be selected for the unit 2.1.15. Sigma Power %, 0---100
2.1.12. Fuel consumption (l, gal)
T D123
The Sigma Power display is only on the model T191h.

The Sigma Power display shows as percentage how
much of the maximum power is transferred through the
T D178 power take---off.
This display mode shows the total fuel consumption. 2.1.16. Gearbox temperature
T D124
Temperature is displayed as follows:

www.maskinisten.net
--- When the temperature is below +40_C (104_F), lo is

displayed. 2.1.19. Maintenance schedule
--- When the temperature is above +40_C (104_F), the
actual temperature is displayed.
--- When the temperature is above +119_C (246_F), high
is displayed.
If the temperature is continuously over +90_C (194_F),
clean the radiator and check the oil level.
T D127
2.1.17. Travel distance m, km, yard, miles
When the tool symbol and periodic maintenance hour

number are illuminated in the display, the appropriate
service work has to be carried out by an authorized
workshop. If this work is not carried out, the tool symbol
and periodic maintenance hour number are shown for 10
seconds whenever the ignition is switched on. When the
T D125
service has carried out this warning will be deleted by
simultaneously pressing the opposite side to the symbol
of the display setting switch (13.10) and switching the
The travel distance is displayed as follows: ignition on. The tool symbol will illuminate again when the
--- Up to 1 km (1 mile) with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 next service interval has been reached.
metre (yard). The display will show the m (yard)
symbol. 2.2. Functions on the middle line
--- After one kilometre (mile) the display symbol changes
into km (miles) and displays the distance in kilometres
(miles) with an accuracy of plus or minus two decimals
points up to a distance of 100 km (100 miles).
--- After 100 km (100 miles) the distance is shown with an
accuracy of plus or minus one decimal point. 13.9
--- The maximum distance displayed is 999.9 km (999.9
miles). 13.10
You can change the unit of distance (km, miles) by
changing the unit of length, see instructions in section 4.8.
on page 67.
M D9
The operator can reset the distance reading, see
instructions in section 2.3. on page 64.
Move the display change over switch (13.9) function to the
middle line by pressing its opposite side to the symbol.
2.1.18. Surface area ha, acre Move back to the top line functions by pressing the
opposite side to the symbol of the switch again.
The middle line has the same functions as the top line.
Different functions can be selected to be displayed on the
top and middle lines at the same time.
2.3. Resetting the travel distance, fuel

T D126 consumption, working time, and worked area
readings
This display shows the area worked. The area reading
increases only when the implement is used to work the
soil (the linkage is not in transport position).
13.9
The worked area is stored in memory when power is
switched off from the meter.
unit of length, see instructions in section 4.8. on page 67. 13.10
The operator can reset the area reading, see instructions
in section 2.3. on page 64.
M D10
--- Select the display to show the working time, travel

distance, fuel consumption or the area by pressing the
symbol side of the display change over switch (13.9)
(travel distance featured in the picture)

www.maskinisten.net
--- Then press and hold the opposite side to the symbol of 4.2. Setting the backlight level of the display unit,
the display setting switch (13.10) until the display is 1---7
reset.
The working time, the area, fuel consumption and travel
distance are always reset at the same time.
13.9
3. Proline instrument panel LCD display
(liquid crystal display) setting switch (13.10)
13.10
T D339
Activate the setting of the backlight level in the setting

mode (see instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 65).
4.2.1. Changing a parameter value

13.10
Increasing a parameter value
--- Press the symbol side of the display change over
switch (13.9), the parameter value will increase one step
at a time
M D11 --- or
--- Press and hold down the symbol side of the display
change over switch (13.9), the parameter value will
To enlarge any middle line display to a height of two rows
increase continuously.
the opposite side to the symbol of the switch (13.10).
The top line display then vanishes. Press the opposite Decreasing a parameter value
side to the symbol of the switch a second time to return --- Press the opposite side to the symbol of the display
the display to normal. change over switch (13.9), the parameter value will
decrease one step at a time
4. Changing the parameters of the Proline --- or
instrument panel LCD display (liquid crystal --- Press and hold down the opposite side to the symbol of
display) the display change over switch (13.9), the parameter
value will decrease continuously.
Select the next changed parameter by pressing the
4.1. Setting mode opposite side to the symbol of the setting switch (13.10)
or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down the
4.1.1. Activating the setting mode symbol side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
4.3. Width of the implement cm, inch
13.9
13.10
T D338 13.10
--- Activate the setting mode of the display by pressing and

holding down the symbol side of the display setting
M D13
switch (13.10) for over 3 seconds.
The display will show the first parameter that can be
Activate the implement width in the setting mode (see
changed, the backlight level of the display unit.
instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 65).
--- The rest of the parameters can be displayed by
pressing the opposite side to the symbol of the setting Use the display change over switch (13.9) to change the
switch (13.10). parameter value (see instructions in section 4.2.1. on
page 65).
4.1.2. Exiting the setting mode
--- Exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down the
symbol side of the display setting switch (13.10) for
over 3 seconds.

www.maskinisten.net
4.4. Setting the clock displays.

--- Press either edge of the display change over
Changing the hour display switch (13.9) to change the display to either 12---hour
or 24---hour display.
opposite side to the symbol of the setting switch (13.10)
13.9 or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down the
symbol side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
The display shows next the parameter Speed Ratio ppm.
This parameter is not in use and it does not affect this mo-
del.
13.10
4.6. Direction indicator buzzer
M D14
Activate the clock in the setting mode (see instructions in 13.9

section 4.1.1. on page 65).
When the hour display is blinking, it can be changed.
Use the display change over switch (13.9) to change the
parameter value (see instructions in section 4.2.1. on 13.10
page 65).
Changing the minute display
13.9 M D17
Activate the direction indicator buzzer in the setting mode

(see instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 65).
13.10 --- Press either edge of the display change over
switch (13.9) to change the display to either on or off.
When the function is on (no cross), the buzzer is activated
M D15
together with the direction indicator or the hazard warning.
Select the next parameter to be changed by pressing the
Press the symbol side of the setting switch (13.10), the opposite side to the symbol of the setting switch (13.10)
minutes start blinking. or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down the
Change minutes in the same way as hours above.
Select the next parameter to be changed by pressing the 4.7. Unit of temperature C, F
the opposite side to the symbol of the setting
switch (13.10) or exit the setting mode by pressing and
holding down the symbol side of the switch for over 3
seconds. 13.9
4.5. Clock mode 12/24
13.10
13.9
M D18
Activate the unit of temperature in the setting mode (see

13.10
switch (13.9) to change the display to C or F.
M D16
opposite side to the symbol side of the setting
Activate the clock in the setting mode (see instructions in switch (13.10) or exit the setting mode by pressing and
section 4.1.1. on page 65). holding down the symbol side of the switch for over 3
Choice can be made between 12---hour and 24---hour seconds.

www.maskinisten.net
4.8. Unit of length m, yard ---Press either edge of the display change over
switch (13.9) to change the display to either Litre,
Gallon UK or Gallon US mode.
opposite side to the symbol side of the setting switch
(13.10) or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding
down the symbol side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
13.9 4.10. Front PTO speed display
13.10
M D19 13.9
Activate the unit of length in the setting mode (see 13.10

switch (13.9) to change the display to either Metric or
Imperial mode.
When the unit of length is changed between Metric /
M D30
Imperial, the following units also change according to the
table below:
Activate the front PTO speed display in the setting mode
Unit Metric Imperial (see instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 65).
---Press either edge of the display change over switch
Speed km/h mph
(13.9) to activate the front PTO speed display on or off.
Distance km, m miles, yard The purpose of this function is to activate the front PTO
Surface area ha acre speed display with this switch if the tractor is retrofit with
the front PTO.
Implement width cm inch If the tractor equipped with the front PTO has a cross in
this display the front PTO speed will not be displayed (see
Select the next changed parameter by pressing the instructions in section 2.1.6. on page 62).
(13.10) or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding Select the next changed parameter by pressing the oppo-
down the symbol side of the switch for over 3 seconds. site side to the symbol of the setting switch (13.10) or exit
the setting mode by pressing and holding down the sym-
4.9. Unit of volume l, gal (UK, US) bol side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
13.9
13.10
M D20
Activate the unit of volume in the setting mode (see


www.maskinisten.net
4.11. Display for lifting link position of the front 5. Other functions of Proline---instrument panel
linkage
13.9 13.10
T D216
13.10
This warning gives information about the pressure drop of
the fuel before running faults appear.
The display is closed by pressing the opposite side to the
symbol side of the setting switch (13.10).
M D31
D 2.2.13.9. Change over switch for

This function is not used even if the display is activated. LCD---display (liquid crystal display)
Activate the display for lifting link position of front linkage unit in Proline instrument panel (13.9)
in the setting mode (see instructions in section 4.1.1. on
page 65).
---Press either edge of the display change over switch
(13.9) to activate the display for lifting link position of
front linkage on or off.
The purpose of this function is to activate the display for 13.9
the lifting link position of front linkage with this switch if the
tractor is retrofit with the front linkage.
If the tractor equipped with the front linkage has a cross in
this display the display for lifting link position of front
linkage will not be displayed (see instructions in section
2.1.14. on page 63).
(13.10) or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding
down the symbol side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
4.12. Adjusting display contrast

M D22
13.9 The operation of change over switch for LCD---display unit

is explained under “LCD---display unit” starting on
page 55.
13.10
M D21
Activate the display contrast in the setting mode (see

--- Press the opposite side to the symbol of the display
change over switch (13.9) to make the display dimmer
(parameter value is decreased, min. 80) or the symbol
side to make the display brighter (parameter value is
increased, max. 120).
opposite side to the symbol of the setting switch (13.10)
or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down the

www.maskinisten.net
Proline instrument panel is explained under “LCD---display

Proline instrument panel LCD
D 2.2.13.10.
unit” starting on page 65.
display (liquid crystal display) setting
switch (13.10)
13.10
M D23
The operation of setting switch for LCD---display unit i
D 2.3. Controls on RH side

D 2.3.1. Driving D 2.3.1.2. Range lever (2)
The range lever selects three different ranges.
D 2.3.1.1. Speed gear lever (1) Front position on right (in the driving direction),
alternative equipment: crawling speed range LL
Rear position on left (in the driving direction): low range
M
4 Front position on left (in the driving direction): high
range H
Low (M) and High (H) ranges are synchronized. When
changing ranges the clutch pedal must not be depressed
2 because of the HiShift--- switch (standard on Th models)
(5) in the lever. The engagement will be gently controlled
due the HiShift--- automatic selection (only on Th models).
Traditional use of clutch pedal in all situations is still
possible.
T1ch D8
This lever (1) selects four synchronized speed gears, the

centre position is neutral. The speed gears can be used in
all three speed ranges (lever 2, speed ranges LL
(alternativ equipment), M and H) and also in the forward
and reverse gears.
When changing gear, the clutch pedal must not be
depressed because of the HiShift switch (standard on Th
models) (5) in the lever. Due to the HiShift automatic
selection (only on Th models) the engaging is smooth.
Traditional use of clutch pedal is still possible.

www.maskinisten.net
the speed gear lever and the range lever knob. Pressing
D 2.3.1.3. Shuttle lever (3) the hare button increases the speed range by one step
at a time, pressing the turtle button reduces the speed
by one step at a time.
2 5
Th models
The number (A) on the display unit shows which speed
range is engaged. When the gear number is engaging it
5 flashes as long as the automatic is engaged.
When turning the ignition switch on the Powershift will
1 always be in the lowest range, if the power has been
switched off for over 10 seconds. The automatic selection
remembers the previous Powershift preprogramming in
power shuttle.
4 Gears of the Powershift:

--- Powershift gear 1: direct ratio, the display (only on Th
5 models) shows 1.
--- Powershift gear 2: high range, the display (only on Th
models) shows 2.
--- Powershift gear 3: high range, the display (only on Th
3
models) shows 3.
T1ch D9 The quick---shift gear can be changed while the tractor is
moving and without depressing the clutch pedal and
because of the automatic selection the engagement is
Tc models smooth.
Th models see on page 36.
D 2.3.1.5. HiShift (5)
Front position: forward driving direction
Centre position: neutral
As extra equipment on models T121c---T131c.
Rear position: reverse driving direction
Gear change between forwards and reverse is
synchronized.
5
When changing driving direction, the tractor must be
stopped and clutch pedal depressed.
When using the gear levers, for more details in starting
and running instructions, see page 94.
D 2.3.1.4. Push buttons for Powershift (4) 5
T1ch D10
HiShift switches are meant for assisting and making it

A easier to drive the tractor. The driving clutch is operated
by the fingertip control. The contact button of the switch is
placed both in the main and range gear levers and on Tc
models in all gear levers, so there is no need to use the
foot clutch pedal while shifting. Traditional use of clutch
pedal is still possible, and also recommended in some
situations like attaching the implements.
T D55 1. HiShift switch for the Th models

Display unit on the right front pillar, not on Tc models. When using the HiShift--- switch (5), first press the switch
and hold it and then move the lever to the desired posi-
Powershift (PS) = The 3 step gear change. tion. Then the switch can be released and the engage-
The push buttons for the Powershift are placed both on ment will be automatically controlled.

www.maskinisten.net
When using the HiShift--- switches (5) the clutch pedal range gear lever and forward/reverse gear lever, by
does not move. The shifting of the clutch control by the pressing this contact button the clutch pedal is
foot pedal is available in any situation. Note that the en- depressed. When the push button is released, the clutch
gagement of the power transmission is not automatic, but pedal rises according to the preset adjustment. When the
the movement of the foot clutch pedal controls the en- speed is below 3 km/h or when using the shuttle lever
gagement. push button, the clutch is engaged slower (the pedal rises
slower) than when the speed is greater than 3 km/h.
2. HiShift switch for the Tc models When using the HiShift, first press the contact button and
then move the lever to the desired position. The contact
2.1. Operating and function of the HiShift button can then be released and the clutch will be
engaged.
If the clutch pedal has been pressed down by the contact
2 5 button and the clutch is to be engaged by foot operation,
wait for a few seconds after releasing the contact button
before starting to engage the clutch by the foot.
When operating the clutch for the first time in a cold
5 climate, it is good practise to use the contact buttons for
the first few operations of the clutch.
1 The clutch pedal has a safety hinge which eliminates an
accidental damage to the foot.
3
T1ch D9
There is a contact button (5) on the speed gear lever,
2.2. HiShift clutch adjustment
Clutch Speed >

Clutch 1 pedal up 3 km/h
pedal
position
6
Clutch
slides and is Speed <
connecting 5
2 3 km/h
4 Knee point
3 Clutch pedal
down
Time
The attached picture shows the function of the HiShift --- The clutch pedal is down, the desired changing
clutch and the influence of the adjustment. The curve movement is completed (3)
shows the clutch pedal position according to time. --- The push button is released, the clutch pedal rises
--- The clutch pedal is up (1) quickly to the point when the clutch begins to engage
--- The HiShift contact button is pressed down, the clutch (knee point), this point has been preset in the factory (4)
pedal lowers quickly (2) --- If the speed is below 3 km/h or the forward/reverse lever
button has been used, then the pedal rises slower
(lower curve) (5)

www.maskinisten.net
--- If the speed is more than 3 km/h then the clutch pedal
rises quicker (the upper curve) (6)
D 2.3.1.6. Switch for 4WD (6)
When necessary the clutch pedal rising speed after the
Knee Point (the clutch engagement point) can be adjusted
in the following way: 6
T1ch D50
The switch has three positions.

2 Symbol side pressed down: 4WD on (light on the
1 instrumentpanel)
The switch in the centre position = Automatic position,
when the differential lock is engaged, the 4WD is also
A engaged. When the differential lock is disengaged, the
4WD is disengaged, but not if braking with both brake
pedals at the same time.
Opposite side to the symbol pressed down: 2WD on
T1ch D25
Front wheel drive can be engaged and disengaged while
driving without using the clutch pedal.
Speed under 3 km/h, lower curve, adjusting Four wheel drive should be engaged only when braking
screw (1) with both brake pedals.
--- By rotating the adjusting knob (1) in the closed direction
(clockwise) (the lock nut has to be slackened A), the 1. Driving start--- and shuttle---automatic:
clutch rises slower (the curve is gentler) and vice versa.
The factory adjustment is 1 1/4 turns open. Not on Tc models.
NOTE: The clutch pedal rising speed can not be adjusted Driving start--- and shuttle---automatic engages the 4WD
too slow, in order that the clutch does not slip and wear automatically when starting to drive and/or shuttling. The
unnecessarily. The minimum value is Open 1 turn, 4WD is also engaged when using the HiShift--- switch and
because of clutch slip. Always adjust Knob 1 first. if the driving speed is under 10 km/h. The automatic
function also engages the 4WD regardless of the position
Speed over 3 km/h the upper curve, adjusting
of 4WD switch. The automatic function disengages the
screw (2) 4WD after starting to drive or shuttling after the adjusted
--- By rotating the adjusting knob (2) in the closed direction delay.
(clockwise) (the lock nut has to be slackened A), the
clutch rises slower (the curve is gentler) and vice versa. With this function it is possible to get the maximum
The factory adjustment is 2 turns. traction. This reduces wheel slip by the rear wheels when
working on slippery surfaces.
Using the HiShift--- switches, for more details in startin-
gand running instructions, see page 71. The function is activated on as the factory setting (4.0 s).
The 4WD disengaging time can be adjusted 0.5 ---20 s or
disengaged totally with the display settings, see the point
“Changing selection of driving start--- and
shuttle---automatic ON/OFF” on page 45.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.3.1.7. Differential lock switch (7) D 2.3.1.8. Switch for

Powershift---automatics (8)
Not on Tc models.
T1ch D51
8
The differential lock for the rear axle operates electro T1ch D52
hydraulically (also available as alternative equipment for
the front axle). The switch for the differential lock has 3
positions. When the lock is engaged the indicator light on The switch has three positions.
the instrument panel is illuminated. The symbol side pressed down = automatic position 2
With the symbol side pressed down the lock is always of Powershift, driver can programme the speed of the
engaged except when one or both brake pedals are engine revolutions where the Powershift--- gears change
pressed (the lock re---engages when one or both pedals (display shows AUTO 2).
are released). The switch in the centre position = automatic position 1
In the centre position (automatic position) the lock is of Powershift, automatically changes Powershift--- gears
always engaged except when: according to the load and the speed of engine revolutions
(display shows AUTO 1)
--- one or both brake pedals are pressed (the lock
re---engages when one or both pedals are released) The opposite side to the symbol pressed down =
--- the linkage lift/stop/lower switch is in the lifting position manual control of Powershift.
(the lock re---engages when lift/stop/lower switch is
switched to the centre or lower position). Setting changing speed of revolutions for
With the opposite side to the symbol pressed down the Auto 2 Powershift:
lock is disengaged.
--- press the symbol side of the switch for automatic
The differential lock can be switched on and off while Powershift (8) display shows AUTO 2.
driving.
Use the differential lock only when even drive on both
wheels is required. The lock should be disengaged when D
driving on the road.
68d 32,1
--- press the Powershift pre---programming button (A) for

one second, neither driving directions may be chosen.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.3.1.9. Switch for automatic traction

control (9)
Not on Tc models.
T D61
9
T1ch D53
--- after activation both, the current limit RPMs for
shifting down (B) (rpm) and the Powershift ---stage
number 1 (C) will blink . When the automatic traction control is used the traction is
--- use the Powershift--- push buttons (D) (with hare button engaged either on or off with help of the accelerator--- or
upwards and with turtle button downwards) to step to brake pedal depending on the engine revs or driving
the desired downwards changing speed of revolutions. speed. The switch has two positions.
Speed of revolutions changes every 50 rpm.
The speed of revolutions can be changed between
1.Switching on the stand ---by mode of the
900---2300 rpm.
--- when the downwards changing engine revolutions is automatic
reached push the pre---programming button (A). Then
the RPMs for shifting up (B) and the The automatic traction control is engaged in the
Powershift ---stage number 3 (E) start blinking. stand---by mode (but not in function), when the following
--- in the same way as before, step with the Powershift--- conditions are fulfilled at the same time:
push buttons (D) every 50 rpm to set the desired --- the symbol side of the switch (9) is pressed down, (the
upwards changing speed of revolutions. symbol (1) starts to blink)
The speed of the revolutions can be changed between --- tractor is stationary
1000---2400 rpm. --- the engine rotation speed is lower than 1000 rpm
However the upwards changing speed of revolutions
must be at least 100 rpm more than the downwards
changing speed.
E.g. if downwards changing limiting speed of revolution 2 2
is set into 1500 rpm, the upwards changing speed of
revolution can only be stepped between 1600---2400
rpm.
--- when the upwards changing speed of revolution is
reached, push pre---programming button (A). Then the 1
controller saves the set speeds of revolutions and
reverts to normal operation.
The arrow of the chosen direction will blink if an attempt is
made to engage the driving direction when setting the
limit of the engine revolutions. This means the direction
cannot be engaged until the setting has been finished and
the level has first moved to the parking brake position.
After engaging the parking brake position the controller T D63
reverts to normal operation.

The limit speeds of the engine revolutions still remain in When the function is in the stand---by mode, the symbol
the memory after the power is switched off. (1) lights continuously (the power shuttle --- and parking
brake lever has been cycled through the parking brake
position and the direction has been re---selected).
When the automatic positions are on:
After starting the engine always switch the function on
--- the tractor itself ensures that the right Powershift--- gear again by pressing down the opposite side to the symbol
is engaged. of the switch and the stand---by mode will be activated
--- in addition there is a separate Speed matching again.
automatic selector when changing the main gears,
which engages the right Powershift--- gear.
Using the Powershift---automatics, for more details in
starting and running instructions, see page 96.

www.maskinisten.net
1.1. Traction releasing D 2.3.1.10. Hand throttle (10)

When the automatic traction control is switched to the
stand---by mode, the traction control engages in the
following situations:
10
--- the engine revs are under 1000 r/min
and
--- the accelerator pedal is almost up
or
--- the brake pedal is depressed
and
--- the driving speed is under 12 km/h
Traction releasing always happens regardless of the
position of the clutch pedal.
T1ch D30
NOTE: When the automatic traction control is on the
arrow of the selected driving direction blinks (2) in the
display. The symbol blinks for the driver to realize the The rotating knob (10) (potentiometer) operates as control
tractor starting, when the accelerator pedal is pressed for the hand throttle lever. Rotate the knob
down. counter---clockwise to increase the engine speed.
When the automatic traction control is on, the driving When the hand throttle is used, it functions like the
direction can be changed. In this case the arrow of the accelerator pedal and controlling the engine revs by the
selected driving direction flashes, but the selected one giving the larger value.
direction does not activate.
When the traction control is engaged, the switch for D 2.3.1.11. STOP---indicator light, extra
automatic traction control (9) can be switched off. equipment (11)
However the selected direction does not engage and the
direction arrow remains flashing until the shuttle---and Not on Tc models.
parking brake lever has been moved to the parking brake
position and the direction has been engaged again.
1.2. Traction engagement 11
The traction engages when the following conditions are

fulfilled at the same time:
--- the driving direction is selected
--- the brake pedal is not depressed
--- the engine revs are over 1100 r/min
--- the accelerator pedal is depressed sufficiently.
When the traction is engaged, the arrow of selected
direction stops flashing and lights continuously.
The driving speed has no influence on the traction
engagement. T1ch D15
If the clutch pedal is depressed when the traction

engagement starts, the traction engages in accordance The STOP indicator light in the rear instrument panel is
with the clutch pedal position. needed when driving with reverse drive controls.
If the light comes on, the tractor and the engine must
2. Switching off the stand ---by mode be stopped immediately. When this light is on only use
the machine in an emergency, e.g. to move the tractor
Press the opposite side to the symbol of the switch (9) to the roadside (for more details see point 7 on page 54).
down.
However the selected direction does not engage (if the
traction is activated, it disengages) and the direction arrow
remains flashing until the shuttle--- and parking brake lever
has been moved shortly to the parking brake position and
the direction has been engaged again.

www.maskinisten.net
When the cruise control is on, the indicator light is

Powershift rocker switch for
D 2.3.1.12.
illuminated in this switch (in Proline instrument also in the
reverse drive tractor, extra equipment (12) instrument panel).
Not on Tc models. Cruise control setting switch (+/---) (13.3)

--- With this switch (3 positions, spring returned to the
middle position) the cruise control can be
increased/decreased.
Hand throttle knob (10)

--- With this knob the revs can be temporarily increased
12 when the cruise control function is on.
1. Cruise control setting/selection kmh/rpm
1.1. Programming the cruise control ( / ):

--- Set the driving speed or the PTO speed to the desired
value with the accelerator pedal or hand throttle.
T1ch D54 --- Press the or side of the cruise control setting
switch (13.2) for more than three seconds (in the
When using the tractor in reverse drive this switch allows models with Proline instrument panel the cruise
easy use of the Powershift. The switch has 3 positions, the indicator light flashes in the instrument panel indicating
extreme positions are spring returned. The speed range that the setting value can be stored in the memory. After
increases by pressing the symbol side of the switch and releasing the switch the value restores and the indicator
decreases by pressing the opposite side. light is on continuously).
1.2. Activating a programmed constant speed:

D 2.3.1.13. Cruisecontrol
--- If a programmed constant speed is not on, press the
(Cruice---panel) (13)
or side of the cruise control setting switch
Extra equipment (13.2) for a while. The last setting stored then comes
into effect.
13.2
13 1.3. Constant driving speed ( ) is turned off
10 when one of the following is pressed:
--- Clutch pedal
--- Brake pedal
13.1 --- Cruise control OFF--- switch (the cruise control function
turns off)
13.3 --- HiShift---switch, returning to the used value after
releasing the switch.
1.4. Constant RPMs ( ) are turned off when

T1ch D16 one of the following is pressed:
--- Cruise control OFF--- switch (the cruise control function
The operator can choose either constant driving speed turns off).
adjustment or constant engine revs adjustment. When the cruise control function has been turned off, the
The cruise control does not operate simultaneously with tractor speed/revs will return to the speed set by the hand
the automatic traction control. throttle if the greater speed/revs value than with
accelerator pedal has been set with it. (NOTE: Control the
position of the hand throttle knob (10) before disengaging
Cruise control OFF---switch (13.1)
the cruise control).
--- With this switch (reversible push button) the cruise
control function will be disengaged 2. Decreasing the Cruise control setting (---)
Cruise control setting switch ( / ) (13.2) 2.1. When a programmed Cruise control is on:
--- With this switch (3 positions, spring returned to the --- .Press the switch (13.3) --- side to lower the speed or
middle position) will be set/select either engine RPMs, depending on which setting has been
selected with the switch (13.2).
---the constant driving speed
--- When stopping pressing, the new setting stays on and
---or
is stored in the memory.
---the constant engine revs

www.maskinisten.net
3. Increasing the Cruise control setting (+) D 2.3.1.15. AutoComfort---Cabin

suspension system (15)
3.1. When a programmed Cruise control is on:
--- Press the switch (13.3) + side to lower the speed or
engine RPMs, depending on which setting has been
selected with the switch (13.2).
--- When stopping pressing, the new setting stays on and
is stored in the memory.
D 2.3.1.14. Engine
speed range
selector (ECO)(14)
T151eh 15
T1ch D57
Extra equipment, for more details see page 206.
D 2.3.1.16. Switch for the Auto---Gui-

de (16)
Extra equipment for the models T151eh---T191h.
14
T1ch D17
16
The switch has two positions.
The symbol side pressed down: Low engine range
(ECO, maximum 1800 r/min) selected.
When the ECO mode is engaged the engine revs are limi-
ted to 1800r/min. This gives lower fuel consumption, redu-
ced emissions and lower noise level. Further when using T1ch D59
the highest gear the maximum speed is 40km/h.
When using the 1000 r/min power take---off output the Auto---Guide is based on GPS satellite navigation techno-
maximum revs are 900 r/min. logy and is capable of automatically steering the tractor.
Its use is only allowed on the field or on other off---road
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down: The
areas.
standard engine range (maximum 2200 r/min) selected.
When using the highest gear the maximum speed is 50 The switch has three positions.
km/h (on marketing areas where the maximum speed is The symbol side pressed down: Steering valve, Top-
40 km/h the tractors are equipped with the electric speed Dock (instrument on the roof), display or connectors (if
limiter EcoSpeed). with Auto---Guide readiness) are on.
The centre position: TopDock (instrument on the roof),
user interface or connectors (if with Auto---Guide readi-
ness) are on.
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down: All the
instruments are switched off.
WARNING: Auto---Guide switch has to be in
OFF --- or centre position when driving on
the road.
Separate quick guides and operator manuals with more

details are provided for the Auto---Guide steering system.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.3.2. Linkage /PTO 3. Lift/stop/lower switch (1.3)

The lift/stop/lower switch has 3 positions:
--- The symbol side pressed down lowers the linkage =
D 2.3.2.1. Rear linkage (1) Autocontrol II position.
--- Centre position stops the arms.
Using the hydraulic lift see ”Operating Instructions” --- The opposide side to the symbol pressed down lifts
section on page 107. the linkage = transport position
Tractors have as alternative equipment either Autocontrol By switching the lift/stop/lower switch to the lift position,
B (=ACB) linkage or Autocontrol D (=ACD) linkage, the operator can use this switch to lift the implement into
Th---models. the transport position; by switching it to the lower position
the implement is then lowered to the right depth (as
1. Diagnose light (1.1) selected with the position control knob 1.2).
Linkage movement can be stopped by placing the
lift/stop/lower switch in the centre position.
1.1
4. Lift/lower indicator lights (1.4)
1.4
T D275
When the tractor power switch is on, the light illuminates

for a moment, goes out again and illuminates again.
When the diagnostic light is on, it shows that the linkage 1.4 T D276
has not been activated.
The linkage is activated by pressing down both edges of
The lift indicator (red = upper) is lit when the lower links
the lift/stop/lower switch (1.3), then the light goes out and
are lifting, the lower indicator (green = lower) when they
the linkage switches can be used. By pressing down only
are lowering. Neither indicator is lit when the links are
one edge of the switch (= lift or lower), the linkage
stationary.
operates at half speed. The activation must be done when
the main power has been switched off, and when the inner
switch for connecting an implement or the push button 5. Lowering speed selector(1.5)
control has been used.
The flashing of the diagnostic light informs of the system
failure. In this case contact your dealer. 1.5 1.6 1.7
2. Position control knob (1.2)
1.8
T D250
1.3
The lowering speed is increased when this knob is turned

clockwise, and nine different positions are available. A
1.2 slow lowering speed should be selected with heavy
implements. The lowering speed is independent of the
load.
T1ch D18
6. Transport height selector (1.6)
The linkage is lifted when this knob is turned clockwise The transport height (i. e. the upper position of the lower
and lowered when it is turned counter---clockwise. The links) is increased when this knob is turned clockwise.
knob allows continuous control of the position of the lower Nine different positions are available. This knob limits the
links. It sets the position of the lower links when the lifting height when either the position control knob (1.2) or
lift/stop/lower switch (1.3) is in the lower position. the lift/stop/lower switch (1.3) is used. The height limit is a
useful feature when there is a danger that the implement
could hit the cab, etc.

www.maskinisten.net
CAUTION: This knob does not limit lifting the draft control area. The slip control system lifts the
height when the inner switch for connecting linkage a little when the wheels exceed the slip limit and
implement in the cab or the push buttons on lowers the implement back to the depth which has been
the mudguards are used. set, when the wheel slip is again under the slip limit.
By turning the knob to the common position of the
7. Draft control selector (1.7) balance control and the slip control, the balance control is
on when the lift/stop/lower switch is in the lifting position
This knob should be turned to the P position when the and the slip control is on, when the lift/stop/lower switch is
position control is being used (base position). This in the lower position.
ensures that the linkage will remain in the selected By continuing to turn the switch clockwise to the slip limit
position without draft control. When draft control is used position, only the slip limit is on.
(e.g. when ploughing) the knob should be turned to one
of the six (1---6) sensitivity levels. The slip control system can not be adjusted.
On Autocontrol D (ACD) models indicator light (1.8) on The slip control system calibration is made automatically
the panel is shown when in draft control area. when transmission speed--- and ground speed signals
correspond to each other (e.g. tyres wearing out).
8. Draft control indicator light (1.8) In addition the implement sensors can be connected to
on Autocontrol D (ACD) linkage the Autocontrol D--- system.
This is lit when the draft control selector (1.7) is in one of Radar
the draft control positions 1---6.
9. Drive balance control switch (1.9)

as extra equipment slip control on Autocontrol D linkage
1.9
N D133
1.10 1.11
T D251
The tractors equipped with the slip control have a radar
(under the cab on the right side), because when all the
wheels slip the real speed can only be measured from the
Drive balance control switch
ground speed with the radar.
The drive balance control switch has two positions. Other DANGER: DO NOT go under a tractor
positions are extra equipments on the Autocontrol D equipped with a radar (slip control models)
linkage. The drive balance control system is used when until the ignition switch is turned off. ---
transporting heavy implements on the linkage for Danger to eyes.
balancing the tractor while driving. Driving the tractor is
more even and stable. The system operates only in the The radar has an influence on the slip control only, by
transport position in other words when the lift/stop/lower transfering the grip from the linkage to the wheels.
switch is in the lift position.
The function will be activated when turning the switch to
10. Drive balance control light (1.10)
the drive control position. In that case the linkage has
When the drive balance control is ready, the light is on.
enough movement (lowers and lifts), if needed. For these
movements, lift the linkage high enough.
11. Slip control light (1.11), extra equipment on
Slip control, extra equipment on Autocontrol D--- model Autocontrol D--- model
Together with the Autocontrol D’s linkage the tractor can When the slip control is ready, the light is on. If the tractor
be equipped with the slip control with the radar. stationary for about 30 seconds the light goes out and the
slip control has to be started again.
The slip control system is used with towing equipment on

www.maskinisten.net
12. Passing switch for position control knob switch/buttons have been used the position control
system must be activated by operation of the
(1.12)
lift/stop/lower switch (1.3).
CAUTION: The transport height selector
(1.6) does not limit the lifting height when
these switch/push buttons are being used.
The lower link position sensor does not limit the lifting
height when the switch/push buttons are used; instead the
arms are moved to their extreme positions when the
switch/buttons are pushed.
1.3
D 2.3.2.2. Front linkage (2)

1.2
Extra equipment
1.12
Front linkage, for more details see page 216.
T1ch D19
D 2.3.2.3. Rear power take---off (3)
Lowering position 1. PTO control lever (3.1)

By pushing the switch, the lower links lower below the
position, which has been set by the position control knob
(1.2), when the lift/stop/lower switch (1.3) is in the
lowering = Autocontrol position. After releasing the switch 3.1
the lower links go back to the value, which has been set
by the position control knob (1.2). When using the
lowering position of the switch the lowering speed set by
the lowering speed selector is used.
Raising position B
By pushing the switch, the lower links lifts above the

position, which has been set by the transport height
selector knob (1.6), when the lift/stop/lower switch (1.3) is
in the lifting position. After releasing the switch the lower N D136
links go back to the value, which has been set by the
transport height selector knob. The raising function can be The required PTO speed is independent of the driving
used e.g. when connecting the hydraulic trailer hitch with clutch and is first selected mechanically with the lever. The
hydraulic unlatching. tractor has some of the following PTO speed alternatives:
13. Inner switch for connecting 540/1000

implement (1.13) --- lever in left position; PTO 540 engaged
--- lever in centre position; PTO disengaged
--- lever in right position; PTO 1000 engaged
1000/540E
1.13
--- lever in left position; PTO 1000 engaged
--- lever in right position; PTO 540E engaged
540/540E
--- lever in left position; PTO 540 engaged
--- lever in right position; PTO 540E engaged
540/750
1.3 --- lever in left position; PTO 540 engaged
T1ch D20 --- lever in right position; PTO 750 engaged
The indicator light flashes on the instrument panel. The
The lower links are raised and lowered by the switch in RH inner position is for the ground speed PTO (as
the cab and by push button on the rear mudguards. alternative equipment).
These are useful, for instance, when implements are being The PTO shaft is easy to change.IMPORTANT: Before
attached. The lower links lift or lower as long as the engaging the PTO make sure that the correct PTO shaft is
corresponding switch/button is pressed. After these fitted (changing instructions are given in the ”Operating

www.maskinisten.net
Instructions” section on page 102). push---button is pressed continuously for at least 3

seconds (starting begins after 0.5 seconds). If the
The PTO can be temporarily disengaged by pushing the
pressing is interrupted during 3 seconds, the power
lever (3.1) outwards (to the direction of arrow B) (but not
take---off stops.
when using the ground speed PTO). This disengagement
is useful e.g. when you must stop the PTO fast
(emergency stop). The PTO should be started with switch Stopping:
(3.2).
Temporary stopping
2. PTO switch (3.2) --- Press the symbol side of the switch (3.2) down and
release = the starting/off position.
--- You must not leave the cab other than going to use the
rear starting push---buttons (extra equipment).
Longer time stopping

--- Press the opposite side to the symbol of the switch
(3.2) down = the off position and move the PTO
selector lever (3.1) to the centre position.
Stopping with the rear push---buttons (extra

3.2 equipment)
The PTO can also be stopped by pressing once the rear
starting push---button (A) (extra equipment). After this
T1ch D32 the push---button operates as starting button, when it is
pressed for more than 3 seconds.
The power take off switch has 3 positions: Using switch (3.2) the PTO is engaged electro---
--- The symbol side pressed down (spring return) is the hydraulically, the indicator lamp on the instrument
starting position or off position. panel illuminates. Disengagement occurs electro---
--- The switch in the centre is the on position or standby hydraulically. The indicator light on the instrument panel
position. flashes and shows that the lever (3.1) is engaged.
--- The opposite side off the symbol pressed down is the Using switch (3.2) disengagement is only temporarily.
off position.
WARNING: When you do not need PTO,
The desired rotating area has to be selected through always keep the opposite side to the
the PTO selector lever (3.1) before starting. symbol of the switch (3.2) pressed down =
on off position.
Starting:
WARNING: The actual disengagement and
Press the symbol side of the switch (3.2) down and engagement of the PTO must be done by
release = the starting/off position. PTO control lever (3.1). E.g. when leaving
the cab, the lever has to be moved to the
Starting with the rear push---buttons centre position, except when using the push
buttons on the mudguards (extra
Extra equipment equipment).
Th models
N D138
C
The power take---off can also be started by using the rear

starting push---buttons (A) on the rear mudguards (extra T D80
equipment). The switch (3.2) has to be pressed to the

centre position before you leave the tractor. The power When the PTO is rotating the symbol (C) for power
take---off starts, when one or the other rear starting take---off is shown in the display. The smooth engagement

www.maskinisten.net
is controlled by the electronic control unit. --- when the linkage is raised into the transport position
--- and
The emergency stop --- the three seconds delay time has passed
NOTE: Start the PTO after automatic stop.
On the rear wall outside the cab is an emergency stop
socket (A) with a contact plug and wire which connects
the electrical circuit. By removing the plug the PTO stops.
The emergency stop outside the tractor can be connected
to operate in two different ways:
Method 1. Connect a rope from the operating position on
the implement to the stop plug.
3.2
A
T1ch D32
The PTO does not re---engage though the linkage is low-

ered. The PTO has to be started with the rocker
switch (3.2) start position (symbol side depressed).
2 D 2.3.2.4. Front PTO (4)

Extra equipment
Front power take---off, for more details see page 189.
N D139
Method 2. Connect a longer loop of cable to the plug and

have an emergency switch fitted in the loop close to the
operator.
After an emergency stop or after stopping the tractor
engine the PTO will only start by pressing the switch (3.2)
in the starting position, similarly if the ignition is switched
off.
For more details about the power take---off, see
”Operating Instructions” on page 102.
3. Rear PTO automatic stop (3.3)
3.3
T1ch D33
The switch has two positions.

Symbol side pressed down (On): AUTO---position (PTO
automatic stop).
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down (Off):
automatic stop of PTO is Off.
PTO disengages

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulic D 2.3.3.6. Switch for Softdrive (loader

damper) (6)
NOTE: The valve control devices (the levers and operating
switches) and quick---action couplings are marked in the
same way with colour codes.
D 2.3.3.1. Control lever for valve

block 1 (1)
6 7 T1ch D31
Extra equipment
D 2.3.3.7. Equipment locking, front loader

1 2 3 4
T1ch D21
use (7)
Extra equipment
Front lever (in the driving direction): 1/2 ---action valve, For more details see page 218.
which can be locked mechanically in the out---position.
D 2.3.4. Side pillar control panel
block 2 (2)
5 4
1/2---action valve, which also has a floating---position.
For instructions on how to use the valves, see the ”Oper-
ating Instructions” section on page 109.
6 3

block 3 (3) 7 2
Extra equipment 8 1
If the tractor is equipped with front linkage, for more de-
tails see page 216.
11

block 4 (4)
Extra equipment
For example hydraulic leveling, towing hook’s extension 10
etc. 10 9
N D277
D 2.3.3.5. Flow control valve (5)
Extra equipment D 2.3.4.1. Rear window wiper +
For more details see page 221. washer (1)
Extra equipment
The switch has 3 positions:
The symbol side pressed down, spring return: The rear
window washer is on.
The switch in the centre position: The rear window
wiper is on.

www.maskinisten.net
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down (OFF):

Park function.
D 2.3.4.8. Floor fan (8)
Extra equipment
D 2.3.4.2. Light switch for trailer hitch (2) 2---speeds. The fan blows air into the lower part of the
cab.
Extra equipment
The trailer switch light is situated in the PTO cover to light
the trailer hitch. D 2.3.4.9. Implement signal connec-
tion (9)
D 2.3.4.3. Switch for rear working
Extra equipment.
lights (3) For the implement signal connection, see more details in
the extra equipment section K on page 188.
The parking lights must be switched on before the rear
working lights function. Working lights can be adjusted if
needed. D 2.3.4.10. Mounting brackets (10)
As standard the switch for rear working lights has 2 posi- Extra equipment.
tions:
The symbol side pressed down (Manu): The on posi-
tion manually, the lights are always switched on.
D 2.3.4.11. Switch for rear fog light (11)
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down (Off): Extra equipment.
Lights off Standard in some marketing areas.
As extra equipment the switch has a third position =
centre position.
The centre position (Auto): The automatic position
The rear working lights switch on when the reverse drive
is engaged. The lights switch off when the reverse drive is
disengaged.
D 2.3.4.4. Switch for rotating warning

light (4)
Extra equipment
D 2.3.4.5. Control Stop switch (5)

Extra equipment
The control stop can be used when the tractor is driving
an implement (e.g. compressor, pump etc.) and there is
no control from the tractor.
The operating instructions are under “Extra and alternative
equipment” on page 187.
D 2.3.4.6. Switch for front working

lights (6)
Extra equipment
The parking lights must be switched on before the front
working lights function. Working lights can be adjusted if
needed.
D 2.3.4.7. Switch for extra front working

lights (7)
Extra equipment
The parking lights must be switched on before the front
working lights will illuminate. The working lights can be
adjusted sideways if needed.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.3.5. Other controls
2
7 5
1
T1ch D58
D 2.3.5.1. Trailer hitch release control (1) D 2.3.5.5. 3---pin power socket (5)
Extra equipment.
The towing hook can be released by pulling the control
after the lower links have been raised to their uppermost
position by using inner switch for connecting implement
(1.13) (see ”Operating Instructions” on page 207).
D 2.3.5.2. Switch for trailer hitch hydraulic

unlatching/locking (2)
Extra equipment, cab with suspension.
Th models.
The towing hook can be released and attached again with
this switch when the hydraulic lift is raised to its upper- a 6
most position (operating instructions in the extra equip-
ment section K on page 208).
b T1ch D24
D 2.3.5.3. Lighter (3)
It can also be used for electric power output. The 3---pin power socket (type is ISO/TR 12369) is placed
on the under side of the cab rear cross member. Direct
current can be taken out of it ((a) 5A through the ignition
D 2.3.5.4. 2---pin power socket (4) switch, (b) 25A direct from battery) for different regulating
elements, implements etc. (the male connection part
Extra equipment number is 33615500).
D 2.3.5.6. Indicator light for implement

signal connection (6)
Extra equipment.
When the indicator light illuminates continuously, the

www.maskinisten.net
implement signal system is in order. If the indicator light

flashes, stop the engine and turn off the current and start
the engine again. If the light flashes again make contact
wirh an authorized workshop. The Implement signal
connection, more details see extra equipment on
page 188.
D 2.3.5.7. Place for implement remote

control (7)
(cutter etc.) 2 1
D 2.3.5.8. Storage compartment (8)
D 2.4. Controls on rear side N D17
Pull the lever up to apply the parking brake. The brake is

released by pushing the button at the end of the lever and
D 2.4.1. Rear window opening device pushing the lever down. An indicator lamp comes on
when the parking brake is applied.
WARNING: Always apply the parking brake
when parking the tractor. On tractors with
3---step Powershift the gear doesn’t keep
the tractor stationary. If the tractor has a
trailer attached downhill from it, you must
also prevent the trailer wheels from rotating.
When applying the parking brake the 4WD engages and
all wheels will be braking.
The Tc model tractors have an alarm buzzer which so-
unds continuously if the engine is stopped and the par-
king brake has not been applied.
If the tractor is started and the parking brake is not fully off
the buzzer begins to ring intermittently.
N D30
D 2.5.2. Storage compartments (2)
By turning the handle on the lower part of the rear window
and moving the window rearwards the window can be In the lowest compartment you can fasten the bottle with
locked in the open position a little. By repeating this, the the belt.
window can be opened completely.
Reverse drive control, see page 194.
D 2.5. Controls on LH side
D 2.5.1. Parking brake (1)
Tc models
Th models see page 36.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.6. Roof console on the front side
1 4
2
2
3 3a
T1 D1
hand side):
D 2.6.1. Cab light switch (1)
--- The cab will heat up faster
--- The heating capacity will be higher
The cab light switch has 3 positions. The switch positions
--- Higher cooling capacity, if air conditioning is fitted.
are:
If the grille is closed:
--- left position = light off
--- centre position = door position --- The windows will demist faster
--- right position = light on --- The pressure in the cab will be higher (reduces dust
quantity).
Additionally the right side panel is lighted with the led---
light on the roof, when the parking or headlights are on.
D 2.6.5. Mirror heating (5)
A step light is available as extra equipment. The step light
has the following functions with the switch in the middle
Extra equipment.
position:
The switch has two positions:
--- When opening the door both the step and cab light
illuminate. After closing the door, the step and interior The opposite side to the symbol pressed down(OFF):
light will go out after 5---10 seconds. If the door is left Mirror heating is off.
open, both the cab and step light will stay on 5---10 The symbol side pressed down: Mirror heating is on.
minutes.
D 2.6.2. Ventilation nozzles (2) D 2.6.6. Mirror adjustment (6)
In the upper part of the cab there are six nozzles which
can be turned to the desired direction. The window
surfaces can be cleared of ice or condensation by turning
the nozzles towards the glass. 6
D 2.6.3. Sun visor (3)

By pulling the sun visor it can be lowered and by pulling
the string (3a) the sun visor can be raised.
D 2.6.4. Recirculation control (4) T1LS D45
On the front part of the roof console there is an adjustable Extra equipment.
suction grille for air recirculation. When opening this grille When the knob has been turned to left, the left mirror can-
the outside air channel is partially closed. be adjusted and if the knob is turned to right, the right
mirror can be adjusted. The adjustment of the mirrors can
If the grille is open (fully open when the knob is on the left be done by pressing to the direction of the arrows.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.7. Roof console on the right side
3 1 4 2
N D21
D 2.7.1. Roof fan (1) D 2.7.3. Radio (3)

4---speeds. This fan blows air through the ventilation Extra equipment.
nozzles in the roof console.
D 2.7.4. Air conditioning control
D 2.7.2. Temperature control (2) knob (4)
Turn control clockwise for higher temperatures.
Air conditioning (extra equipment), manual, see on
page 199.
Air conditioning (extra equipment), automatic, see on
page 201.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.8. Driver’s seat
9 8
9
1
7
2
6
4
3 3A
5
N D20
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the seat (you can hear a click). By repeating the lifting the seat will
while driving, increased risk of an accident. be in top position. Lift the seat to the top position and
allow it to drop to the bottom position, then lift it up to the
desired position.
The seat can be adjusted as follows:
D 2.8.5. Seat belt anchor point (5)
D 2.8.1. Locking lever for turning of the The anchor points for the seat belt are located on the seat.
seat (1)
Release the lock by pulling the control upwards. The seat D 2.8.6. Seat back inclination (6)
can now be turned 180˚ to the left. The seat can also have
set positions; locked at 10˚ (e.g. can be used when Pull this lever up then set the back rest to the desired
ploughing). position.
D 2.8.2. Forward/rearward adjusting (2) D 2.8.7. Arm rest adjustment (7)

Lift up the lever and push the seat forwards or rearwards. Adjust the arm rest by removing the cover and changing
the arm rest position in the mounting slot.
D 2.8.3. Control for suspension (3)

D 2.8.8. Switch for seat heating (8)
By turning the control lever can the suspension
adjustment be done. Turn the control clockwise to make Seat heating switch is placed on the left side of the seat
the suspension harder. The decal (3A) shows settings for back.
different driver weights.
D 2.8.9. Storage compartment (9)
D 2.8.4. Vertical adjusting (4)
Behind the seat back is a place for books (A4).
The seat can be lifted from the basic position to two
higher positions. Lift the seat slowly to the centre position Air suspension ---driver’s seat see page 197.

www.maskinisten.net
D 2.9. Other controls
N D19
The mirror is adjusted inwards/outwards by opening the

lock.

www.maskinisten.net
E. Starting and running

Make sure you understand all the instruments and the working.
functions of the controls before you start driving your new
tractor. Also read the Safety Precautions at the beginning Environmental use of tractor
of the manual.
Use low revs (less than 1800 r/min). Working the tractor at
Check all instruments immediately after the engine has
low revs reduces the emissions, fuel consumption, engine
started. Keep an eye on the instruments while driving.
use and noise. The Eco---Function helps the Eco---module
IMPORTANT: tractors to be even more environmentally friendly.
Always carry out daily maintenance of the tractor before
E 1. Points to note during the first 50 hours running

Drive smoothly and vary the loading in order to run the --- Avoid driving in the same gear and at the same engine
tractor in correctly. This will give the tractor a longer speed for long periods at a time.
service life and make it more economical. NOTE: Check that all bolts and nuts are properly
--- Do not race the engine and do not run it at maximum tightened (wheels, exhaust system etc.).
speed.
--- Do not pull a heavy load at a low engine speed, i.e.
don’t make the engine labour.
E 2. Starting the engine

WARNING: function.
Never run the tractor in an enclosed 4. Reduce the engine speed as soon as the tractor has
building. started. Never ”race” a cold engine.
5. If the engine fails to start in 10 seconds, stop starting
WARNING: and try again following instructions at point 3. (the pre
Never start the engine unless you are heating of induction air does not function during
seated in the tractor. starting the engine). When the engine starts to fire,
keep the starter motor engaged until the engine has
started.
E 2.1. Normal start/cold start When turning the ignition switch to the on position, the
indicator lights for the parking brake and 4WD must be
illuminated. These will illuminate for approximately 0.6
The engine starting process is carried out so that the seconds after the switch has been turned. This delay is for
emissions are reduced when starting. security in order for the system to carry out starting
The running of the engine when cold, is adjusted by the checks.
temperature (smooth engine running, good engine IMPORTANT: If the engine does not start the first time,
starting, minor smoking...). wait until it is completely stopped before trying again.
1. Th models:
Ensure that the shuttle/parking brake lever is in the
parking brake position. E 2.1.1. Cold start, special instructions
Tc models:
Depress the clutch pedal and move the gear lever to NOTE: Turn off all unnecessary equipment that uses
the neutral position. electrical power, because their circuits remain closed in
2. Turn the hand throttle knob to the low idling position. the glow and start positions.
3. Turn the ignition switch to start the position If the starter motor does not start to engage immediately
when the key is turned to the START position, stop the
--- --- If the glow indicator light on the dashboard does not starting attempt and try again after a short while.
light up (= engine is warm enough), turn the ignition
switch to the start position. IMPORTANT: Starting the tractor when it is very cold the
---If the glow indicator light on the dashboard lights up, indicator lamp for blocked hydraulic filters may be
wait until it extinguishes and then turn the ignition switch illuminated. Then the oil goes through the by---pass valve
to the start position. unfiltered. Do not race the engine and avoid using the
---Release the ignition switch after the engine starts. Use linkage until the oil has warmed up so that the indicator
the accelerator pedal to control the engine running lamp is not lit any longer.
speed. First warm up the engine and hydraulics for a little while at
After the cold engine is started the glow indicator light low engine revs. You can speed up the warming of the
may light up again when it is cold (temperature under hydraulic system by turning the steering wheel (not to the
+15˚C). The white smoking and adjusting the engine limit positions). Do not use the auxiliary hydraulic valves
running when cold are reduced with this afterglow when the oil is cold.
---91--- E. Starting and running

www.maskinisten.net
If you have to start the engine without the aid of the

electric heating of induction air when it is very cold, keep E 2.3. Starting with an auxiliary
the starter motor engaged (for a maximum of 30 seconds battery (jump starting)
at a time) until the engine has started.
Starting the tractor when it is very cold is easier if the When starting with the aid of auxiliary batteries the
battery is kept in a warm place when not working. following points should be noted:
Never race a cold engine. Run the engine with a light load --- Check that the auxiliary batteries have the same voltage
until it has reached its normal operating temperature. as the standard batteries.
--- Open the battery plugs to avoid risk of explosion.
IMPORTANT: Always use the engine heater (standard ---WARNING: A fully charged battery
equipment), when the temperature is below 0°C, when connected directly to a dead battery can
possible. cause a current surge which can cause the
This ensures the start in cold conditions and reduces the batteries to explode. The correct procedure
wear on the engine. 2---3 hours warm up before starting is is as follows:
enough. When the engine heater is connected to the plug --- Connect the (+) terminal of the auxiliary battery to the
socket you can hear a hissing sound which means that (+) terminal on the tractor battery. Then connect the
the warm up is on. other jump lead from the (---) terminal of the auxiliary
battery to the e.g. attaching bolt of the battery ground
NOTE: If tractor driving is for a short---distance, make sure
cable.
that the battery is charged enough to ensure starting.
--- When the engine has started, first disconnect the jump
lead between the ground and the (---) terminal of the
auxiliary battery. Then remove the jump lead between
E 2.2. Starting gas the (+) terminals.
Start the engine using the ignition switch. Always follow
CAUTION: The use of STARTING the correct procedure. Never try to start the engine by
AEROSOLS is absolutely forbidden (due to short-circuiting leads.
the automatic glowing). DANGER OF
EXPLOSION. Having started the engine, declutch, select the correct
gear, release the parking brake and select the desired
driving direction. Steadily increase the engine speed, and
release the clutch pedal slowly.
E. Starting and running ---92---

www.maskinisten.net
E 3. Driving start
--- In cold conditions warm the engine to normal operating
temperature before loading it hard. Remember that E 3.1. Accelerator pedal
there is more wear on the engine when it is running cold
than at normal operating temperature.
Th models 1
When the power shuttle is in the neutral position (or the
parking brake is applied) the multi---discs are disengaged
and shifting between main--- and/or group gears is
possible without using the clutch pedal or push button.
Th 3 2
T1ch E6
Use of the accelerator pedal makes it possible to exceed

the engine speed set by the hand throttle (1). When the
accelerator pedal is released, the engine speed returns to
that set by the hand throttle. If you are using the
accelerator pedal, the hand throttle must be placed in the
closed position.
1
Tc 2
3
1
T1ch E4
When starting to drive:

--- The shuttle lever (1) must be in the neutral position.
Keep the tractor stationary by depressing the foot brake
pedal.
--- Choose the desired range with the group lever (2)
on Tc models press simultaneously the clutch pedal or
the HiShift contact button (extra equipment).
--- Choose the desired range with the gear lever (3)
on Tc models press simultaneously the clutch pedal or
the HiShift contact button (extra equipment).
--- Move the shuttle lever (1) to the desired driving direction
and release the foot brake pedal, on Tc models the
clutch pedal or the HiShift contact button will be
released (extra equipment).
In cold conditions (colder than ---5˚C) it is recommended
to run the tractor engine for a little while to warm the
power transmission oil.

www.maskinisten.net
E 4. Driving
Keep an eye on the warning lamps and gauges. lever). On Th models the engagement is automatic.
WARNING: On Th models don’t turn the WARNING: When coupling implements or
starter key to the STOP position when other operations where precise movements
driving. When the ignition is off, the parking are needed the foot pedal must always be
brake applies and all wheels lock. used.
WARNING: WARNING: When using the HiShift --- switch
1. Do not keep your foot on the clutch always be ready to operate the clutch pedal
pedal, or maintain it at a mid---way position. if needed.
2. Do not descend slopes with the tractor in
gear and the clutch disengaged.
DANGER: If the tractor engine is left
3. When turning on headlands with heavy,
running be sure not to leave anybody in the
mounted implements, reduce the engine
cab as the push buttons can be easily
speed to 1300 revs/min.
operated. The parking brake must always be
4. If the engine is not running the steering is
applied.
not power ---assisted.
5. On Tc models do not engage the reverse
until you have stopped the tractor.
--- Select the ratio which gives the optimum fuel
E 4.2. Power shuttle
consumption without overloading the engine and the
transmission. Bear in mind at the same time that soil
Th models
conditions can vary within a matter of a few yards in the
same field. Select a ratio which allows the engine to
operate comfortably at about 75 % of its maximum
power.
The highest speed ranges for the single gear ratio are in
the speed range table (on page 165).
1
When engaging the creeper range (LL) the tractor must 3 3
be stationary.
IMPORTANT: The crawling speed range (LL) can not be
used for bigger drafting force than which is reached with
Low range (M).
If the engine stops when driving due overload etc., the
current must be switched off before a new start. 2
E 4.1. HiShift--- switch

As extra equipment on models T121c---T131c.
T E4
The power shuttle can be also be operated while the

1 tractor is moving. There is no need to use the clutch pedal
(traditional use of clutch pedal is still possible when
desired).
The engagement of the shuttle is automatic. It stops the
tractor smoothly. The Power shuttle can also be operated
at high speed, but does not automatically start braking
1 until the speed is under 10 km/h. If the shuttle is going to
be changed when the tractor speed is over 10 km/h, the
chosen direction arrow flashes and the shuttle is in
neutral. When the vehicle speed goes below 10 km/h, the
shuttle engages and the chosen direction arrow shows. If
the shuttle lever is returned to the original direction when
the speed is over 10 km/h, the traction engages
immediately.
It is recommend that power shuttle is operated
T1ch E1 however in lower speed, then there is less stress in
the power transmission.
When driving the shifting can be done normally by using

the HiShift--- switch (1) both in the main gear lever and in
the range gear lever (on Tc models also in the shuttle

www.maskinisten.net
Tc models
E 4.4. Powershift
Do not change the shuttle lever driving direction, before
the tractor is totally stopped.
E 4.2.1. Programming of Powershift

1
Th models 1
1
When needed the desired Powershift gear can be 1
pre---programmed to engage automatically (button 2) at
the same time as the power shuttle (pre---programming
(3) is also shown in the display panel). E.g. in loader 2
working when changing the direction to forward the
Powershift 1 can be engaged and when changing the
direction to backward the Powershift 3 can be engaged. In
the pre---programming situation while driving the
Powershift gears can be changed manually, as normal. If
pre---programming is not done, the chosen Powershift is
engaged while changing direction.
Automatic traction control

68e 11
E 4.3.
Because of the Powershift---gearing on the tractors there

Th models are 36 forward and 36 reverse gears. The Powershift
push buttons (1) are on the main gear lever and on the
range lever knobs, on Tc model only on the main gear
lever knob. Powershift--- gear changings can be done
without depressing the clutch pedal.
Each speed range can be increased by pressing the hare
button and decreased by pressing the turtle button.
Th models
The same automatic selection controls the Powershift
gear changings as the power shuttle. This makes the
Powershift gear engagement very smooth.
1
The display panel displays the engaged Powershift gear
(2). The Powershift gear can be changed quickly e.g. from
the lowest to the highest by a double click. The automatic
T1ch E7 selector shifts smoothly through the intermediate steps
and flashes the number of the speed range, for which the
The automatic traction control (1) is useful e.g. in road Powershift is selected, the number continues to be
driving when stopping at crossings. It is not necessary to displayed after the speed range is finally engaged.
disengage the traction with the speed gear, range gear or The models T131h---T191h are equipped with the gears
shuttle lever or with the clutch pedal/HiShift--- switch. To H2, H3 and H4 with all Powershift gears higher power
start moving again simply press the accelerator pedal. area. It gives more efficiency when driving on the road.
Similarly in many working conditions, when the traction
control is engaged, e.g. hydraulic implements can be Tc models
used at low revs and then engage the traction by simply
depressing the accelerator pedal. The indicator lights on the instrument panel show which
range is on. The lights also show possible contact faults
on wires to the Powershift solenoids so that when
engaging the quick---shift its indicator light begins to flash
(when needed take contact your dealer). The tractor can
still be driven (e.g. away from the field), if one of the
speeds of the Powershift works without jerking.

www.maskinisten.net
currently set RPMs/driving speed, the change will also be

E 4.4.1. Powershift---automatics stored in the memory.
Th models The tractor will maintain the set constant RPMs/driving

speed, if the engine can keep the RPMs constant.
When you quick---shift during driving, the set constant
driving speed remains if it is in the normal RPM range of
the engine, and the engine can maintain the RPMs in
question.
When using the brake/clutch pedal, the HiShift---switch,
the OFF---switch (3) or the shuttle lever in connection with
3 2 the constant driving speed or using the OFF---switch in
connection with the constant driving speed/RPMs, the
function will be disconnected. (NOTE: Check the position
1 of the hand throttle knob (4) before switching off the
cruise control).
If the tractor has been shut down and re---started, the
constant speed must be set again.
T1ch E2
When using the hand throttle and Cruise Control
together, e.g. when working on the field.
When needed the automatic Powershift--- gear shifting --- When working on the field the Cruise Control is On
program (1) can be switched on either automatically in --- The lower driving speed is needed when coming to the
accordance with load and engine revs functioning headland. Then the Cruise Control will be disengaged
(AUTO 1) or in accordance with engine revs changing and the previous setting of the hand throttle activated.
(AUTO 2) (the chosen program is also shown in the
display panel). The program always changes to the
optimum Powershift---gear. In Auto 2 position the driver
can program the engine revs as to where the Powershift---
E 4.6. Brakes
gears will be changed.
WARNING: When driving at speed or on the
In addition when the automatic PS is switched on with the road, the two brake pedals must be locked
main gears, the separate Speed matching automatically together by means of the latch.
operates trying to even out speed differences which are
too high by engaging the right Powershift--- gear. When
changing a higher main gear the Powershift--- gear To achieve brake function at the front wheels, the 4WD
engages a lower one and vice versa. always engages when both brake pedals are pressed.
When using automatic operation, the display will flash

showing the number of the next chosen speed range (3)
before the automatic speed range changes. After the
speed range has been engaged, the number stops
blinking and remains steadily lit on the display.
E 4.5. Cruise control

Extra equipment
4 2
T E16
On Th models the STOP position of the

starter switch can be used as an
T1ch E3
EMERGENCY STOP. The tractor and several
movements of the implements can be
Use the selection switch (1) (also programming with this stopped if any fault occurs, by turning the
switch) to set either a constant programmed/programed starter key to the STOP position (the engine
driving speed (kmh) or constant RPMs (rpm) by stops, all the wheels lock, the transmission
disengages and the movement of the
pressing the relevant side of the switch. linkage stops).
Use the setting switch (2) to increase or decrease the

www.maskinisten.net
HiShift---switch and if the driving speed is under 10 kph.

E 4.7. Differential lock The automatic 4WD can be disengaged when desired.
E 4.8.1. Driving on the road

Leave the front wheel drive disengaged while driving on
the road, if front wheel drive is not required. Tractors are
not allowed to use 4WD at speeds of over 15 kph, if
conditions are good on the roads.
E 4.9. Engine speed range selector

(ECO)
T151eh
T1ch E8
The rear axle differential lock switch is on the right hand

side panel.
The switch has 3 positions. The functions are described
on page 73.
The differential lock can be engaged and disengaged
while driving without using the clutch pedal.
If a wheel starts to slip, engage the differential lock. For
optimum performance, engage the differential lock when
starting a run.
Do not engage the differential lock if there is much wheels
slip, but reduce the revolutions before the lock
engagement.
T1ch E10
With alternative equipment the front axle differential lock
can be electro hydraulically operated at the same time as On the model T151eh it is possible to choose between
the rear axle. economical low engine range and standard engine range
with the engine speed range selector, see instructions on
page 77.
E 4.8. Front wheel drive
T1ch E9
When the symbol side of the switch is pressed down the

4WD is engaged (and a light comes on in the instrument
panel). When the switch is in the automatic centre
position, the 4WD engages when the differential lock
engages. When the differential lock is disengaged the
4WD is also disengaged. The 4WD can be engaged and
disengaged while driving without using the clutch pedal.
Four wheel drive is also engaged when braking with both
pedals.
On the Th models when the automatic 4WD is engaged
the 4WD engages automatically when starting to drive and
shuttling. The 4WD is also engaged when using the

www.maskinisten.net
E 5. Stopping
Lower the implement (and in cold weather lower links Th models
without implements) and apply the parking brake and
stop the engine. On the Tc models the alarm buzzer WARNING: On the Th models do not have
sounds, if the parking brake is not on. the parking brake on when driving, all
wheels will be locked. The parking brake
engagement speed is limited to 2---6 km/h
Th (3 km/h adjusted in the factory).
When the engine is not running, the handbrake is
automatically on independently of the handbrake lever
position. When the handbrake is on, the 4WD is on, all
wheels are braking.
WARNING: If the parking brake cable
breaks or the adjustment is wrong, the
STOP light begins to flash. The fault has to
be repaired/adjusted before continuing
driving (see further instructions on
page 149).
Tc All models
IMPORTANT: Before stopping the engine, reduce the
engine speed to idling, for about one minute, to allow time
for the engine temperature to stabilise. Turn the starter key
to the ”stop” position.
The engine stopping sequence is carried out so that the
emissions are reduced when starting the engine.
T1ch E5
Fill up the fuel tank when finishing work for the day in
WARNING: When parking the tractor order to prevent condensation.
ALWAYS apply the parking brake. The
parking brake applies automatically on Th
models when stopping the engine. The
engine does not brake on Tc model.
E 6. Action to be taken during use

E 6.1. Permitted driving inclinations E 6.3. Off---road driving
for a tractor on a slope
During off ---road driving, the lowest steps can be locked
in the up---turned position or removed.
(In continuous driving considering engine lubrication):
Up and down slope, with either front
or rear end up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38˚ E 6.4. Door limiting
Sideways to slope to right
or left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38˚ When mounting twin wheels, check that the door does not
make contact with the wheels. If needed change the gas
Combined slope angles; left or right/up spring to another hole.
or down slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35˚/33˚
WARNING: Angles for safe driving should
be smaller than stated to avoid the tractor
tipping over.
E 6.2. Using chains

On 4WD models chains may only be fitted to the front
wheels if the rear wheels are fitted with chains. Make sure
that the chains are correctly tensioned to avoid damaging
the mudguards.

www.maskinisten.net
E 6.5.
2280 mm
2550 mm
Rear mudguards adjustment
N E4
The mudguards can be adjusted to two widths by moving

the extensions to other holes. Also, intermediate positions
are possible by drilling holes in the extensions.
NOTE: The mudguard edges must at least be level with
the tyre edges in the traffic tractors (50 km/h, Finland)
(after trasnsport the mudquards have to be moved if
necessary to the outermost position). On the 40 km/h
models the mudguards edges can be narrower than the
tyres.
The maximum width permitted is 2550 mm (if the larger
width is not national allowed).
E 6.6. Front mudguards

After transportation the front mudguards have to be
checked/adjusted for max turning axle, and moved to the
right width so that the mudguards do not touch the tractor
chassis.
The min. distance of the mudguard frame from the tyres:
--- sideways 40 mm
--- vertically 60 mm
E 6.7. Towing the tractor

If possible towing should be avoided when the engine is
not running, because the pressure lubrication of the
gearbox does not operate. If towing can not be avoided,
on models Th the parking brake must be adjusted to off
(see “Adjusting parking brake” on page 149, the tractor is
equipped with the tools, after this only the brake pedals
are working), the range lever must be in neutral (the
rightmost lever) and the gear lever in gear 4. The shuttle
lever must also be engaged on on Tc models. Towing
speed must not exceed 20 kph.
E 6.8. Ballast weights

IMPORTANT: When using salt liquid as ballast weight in
the wheels, the factory does not take the responsibility for
the damages caused by salt.

www.maskinisten.net
F. Operating instructions
Operating instructions for the extra and alternative
equipment are in section K, after each extra equipment.
12
11
8
13
9 10
9
9 9
5 5
1
1
2 2
6
4 7 4
3 3
T1ch F9
1. Lifting links 8. Top link

2. Levelling gear 9. Quick---action couplings, auxiliary hydraulics
3. Lowering links 10. Auxiliary hydraulic system return coupling
4. Check links 11. Emergency stop plug for PTO
5. Trailer hitch lifting links (extra equipment, with the trailer 12. Trailer socket
hitch) 13. Inlet for remote control cables
6. Power take---off shaft (safety cup)
7. Towing hook (extra equipment, many alternatives see
page 207)
F. Operating instructions ---100---

www.maskinisten.net
F 1. Power take---off (PTO)

Operation of the PTO is described on page 80.
Before attaching implements to the tractor PTO unit, make
sure the implement is designed for 540 RPM PTO or
1000 RPM PTO.
Implements for 540 r/min (at 1874 ERPM)

--- Normally 6---spline shaft (as standard), diameter 13/8”
(35 mm).
--- As alternative equipment it is possible to get at nominal
speed of 540E rpm a power take off, which gives an
economical 540 rpm at 1539 ERPM.
When using the 540E range note, that when increasing
engine revs the PTO shaft can rotate up to 800 r/min.
--- The ISO---norm does not limit the power of 540 r/min
6---spline with a diameter 13/8” (35 mm) PTO. In practice
for power over 50 kW it is better to use a 1000 r/min
output to ensure durability of the PTO shafts.
Implements for 1000 r/min (at 2000 ERPM)

--- Normally 21---spline shaft (extra equipment), diameter T F2
13/8” (35 mm).

WARNING: Stop the engine and disengage
Heavy use the PTO before attaching any implement to
--- For heavy use power take---off shafts of 13/4” (45 mm) the tractor.
dia. are recommended. Check that the implement’s working area is
--- If necessary, a torque limiting clutch with maximum clear before engaging the PTO.
torque of 1000 Nm should be used. WARNING: When a PTO driven implement is
--- When engaging the PTO wait, until the clutch of PTO being used no personnel are allowed near
shaft is totally engaged (for 5 seconds) before loading the PTO shaft. Service work on the PTO
it, especially when the oil is cold. shaft should be carried out only with the
PTO disengaged, the engine stopped and
Working instructions the key removed from the ignition switch.
--- On the tractor both PTO nominal speeds can be used WARNING: After the PTO is disengaged the
regardless of the type of shaft fitted to the tractor. implement continues to rotate for some time
--- Always engage the PTO at a low engine speed in order (regardless of braking).
to protect the clutch and PTO mechanism. Do not approach the implement until it has
--- After starting in freezing weather let the tractor run for a stopped completely.
few minutes before engaging the PTO.
--- The power take---off is equipped with a brake, which IMPORTANT: When the PTO shaft is connected between
prevents the PTO shaft from rotating when the multi-disc the tractor and the implement the implement must be
clutch is disengaged. attached to the tractor. Otherwise the implement can start
to rotate with the PTO shaft.
If the tractor engine stops e.g. for overloading when using
PTO, the ignition switch must be turned off before
re---starting to prevent an unintentional engagement of the
PTO.
---101--- F. Operating instructions

www.maskinisten.net
F 1.2. Power take---off shafts

--- 6---splines (standard ISO 500), shaft diameter 1 3/8” (35
mm), standard
--- 21---splines (standard ISO 500), shaft diameter 1 3/8”
(35 mm), extra equipment
--- 20---splines (standard ISO 500), shaft diameter 1 3/4”
(45 mm), extra equipment
--- 6---splines (standard ASAE) (Valtra 1203), shaft diameter
1 3/4” (45 mm), extra equipment
--- 8---splines (standard GOST 3480---58), shaft diameter 38
mm, extra equipment
A
A6084---55
WARNING: The safety cover (A) over the

PTO shaft end should always be attached
when the PTO is not in use.
Observe all safety precautions in any operation

involving implements driven by the PTO.
F 1.1. Sigma Power B

The tractor T191h is Sigma Power model. Its principle A6084---56
function is, that the tractor power take---off has been
constructed to transfer larger output and torque than the
tractor driving transmission. The engine has three different Change the PTO shaft by removing the inner circlip (B)
power and torque areas , which two are controlled and spacer ring. Pull the shaft out and fit the new shaft
automatically through an electronic controller. fully home (check that the shaft seal is undamaged). Fit
the spacer ring and circlip (B). Never run tractor without
The largest power and torque areas are on as follows: the PTO shaft. Check that the circlip is correctly
1. Transport boost power area, when the main gear is H2 positioned. Change the circlip if damaged.
or higher and PS boost area, when quick---shift is 2 or
3. The trans boost and PS boost power areas are
equal.
2. Sigma power area , the largest output/torque area,
F 1.3. Proportional ground speed
when the power transferred through the PTO
power---take---off is large enough. The symbol
(B) is illuminated in the instrument panel.

1
N F8
B A The proportional ground speed PTO is an alternative

eguipment, must also have the creeper gear. The ground
T F26 speed PTO is engaged by moving the control lever (1) to
the inner position and to the right. The ground speed PTO
When the power take off is on, the display (A) shows (on must not be engaged when the tractor is moving.
top/centre line) as a percentage, how much of the power
is transferred through the power take ---off.

www.maskinisten.net
IMPORTANT: When driving with proportional ground

speed PTO, the crawling speed range (LL) can not be
used.
Before putting a trailer with a powered axle into service,
make sure that the drive is compatible with the PTO of
the tractor. The speed of the trailer should be 0---3 % lower
than that of the tractor.
2
Checking the transmission
F 1.4.
ratio of a PTO driven trailer for
T1ch F11
use with proportional ground
When the ground speed PTO is engaged the PTO switch
speed PTO
(2) does not function and the warning light on the
1. Select a flat, hard---surfaced area or road.
instrument panel does not illuminate. For heavy
2. Check tyres for correct pressure
proportional use (or in heavy PTO use) it is recommended
3. Remove PTO transmission shaft
that the 1 3/4” (45 mm) shaft is used.
4. Fasten wire or tape indicators to the power take---off
The 4WD can be used independently of the ground speed shaft on the tractor and to the trailer drive shaft: the
PTO. indicators should be aligned.
5. The tractor (together with the trailer) is pulled slowly
WARNING: When using the proportional forwards: two people should count how many
ground speed PTO the speed of the PTO revolutions the tractor and trailer shaft make. Counting
shaft varies according to the ground speed stops at 100 revolutions of the tractor shaft; the figures
of the tractor. When the tractor is reversed for the tractor and trailer shafts are then compared.
the PTO shaft also rotates in the reverse 6. If the number of trailer drive shaft revolutions is higher
direction. than 100 (the revolutions of the tractor shaft), the trailer
The proportional ground speed PTO is primarily used in is slower than the tractor, and vice versa.
the low range (M) area. The proportional ground speed 7. The trailer should be 0---3 per cent slower, i.e., the
PTO is designed for the highest torque values of the low trailer shaft should have revolved 100---103 times. If the
range (M) area. In the high range H area the transmission number of revolutions is greater than this, the trailer’s
shaft rotates faster, and consequently the ground speed braking effect is too great; if it is smaller than 100, the
PTO should be disconnected. In addition the trailer should trailer will tend to push, which can endanger the tractor
be equipped with a means of disconnecting the drive from steering.
the trailer.
F 2. Trailer
Total weight of the trailer = load + empty trailer weight
F 2.1. Trailer socket
The kind of trailer can be connected to the tractor
depends among other things on whether the trailer has
brakes, how much of the trailer weight is on the hitch, the
slackening of the tractor brakes and whether the trailer
has one or more axles.
For further information, contact the dealer.
When loading the hitch be sure that at least 20 % of the
tractor weight is on the front wheels.
Do not exceed the max allowed wheel--- or hitch loading.
Tyre loadings are given in the ”Technical specifications”
section (on page 159) and the trailer hitch loadings in the
“Extra and alternative equipment” section (on page 207).
A6084---57,5
WARNING: If the trailer hitch is worn ---out or
otherwise damaged so, that it is possible
that the drawbar eye can be detached from 1. Brake light (red)
the trailer hitch. The hook must be replaced. 2. Direction indicator left (yellow)
3. Ground (---) (white)
4. Direction indicator right (green)
5. Parking light right (brown)
6. Parking light left (black)
7. Continuous current, max. 15 A. The possibility to switch
off the current supply is only available in the tractors
with a main switch or a rear fog light.

www.maskinisten.net
F 3. Three---point linkage
F 3.1. Lifting links
68f 10
T1ch F10
The length of the lifting links can be adjusted by lifting the
All models are supplied with Category 3 hook end lower levelling screws up and turning them in the required
links (= Ball hitch ). direction. After adjustment the levelling screws must be
lowered back down to the locked position.
WARNING: Ensure that the hooks latch
correctly. IMPORTANT: If the tractor has automatic lifting links (extra
equipment) and you adjust the right side lifting link shor-
ter, check at the maximum lifting hight, that the check link
does not contact the return oil filter.
To enable unlatching of the hook type ends from the cab,
cables can be fitted via the guides on the three---point
linkage unit.
The top link has three different attaching holes on the
tractor, and thus it is possible to get different lifting
geometries for different implements. When the top link is
in the lowest hole the implement inclines forwards and the
upper hole gives almost horizontal lifting movement.
When using the hydraulic top link, ensure that it operates
normally when you are attaching an implement. Do not
use the hydraulic top link in the lowest hole in the
mounting bracket, as this may damage the bracket. (It is
possible to get a foul condition in the bracket).
1
N F6
The lifting links can be attached to the lower links at one

of four holes (telescopic lower links have three holes).
Different holes give different lifting ranges and lifting
power for the lower links.In addition, the carrier pin (1) can
be fitted to the lower links at two different positions; one
gives a fixed position and the other allows slight vertical
movement of the lower links.

www.maskinisten.net
F 3.2. Check links F 3.3. Quick couplings for lower

links
1 2
B
3
D
4A 4B
68f 23
T F123
1. Pull the lever to release the implement.
2. The lock can be left open by pulling the lever
Check links are used to limit the lateral movement of the
backward (e.g. for de---mounting an implement).
lower links.
3. Release the lock by pulling the lever forward.
By changing position of the check link attaching pin (A), 4A,B The ball joints are locked automatically while
different lateral positions for the lower links can be connecting implements. In the locking position the
obtained. If the pins are fitted in the long holes, the lower locking device (C) is shown and the operating lever (D)
links have a floating position in the lateral direction. is in the lower position.
The check links with wide tyres and narrow track widths IMPORTANT: Clean, if necessary the quick couplings and
are equipped with limiter sleeves (B), so that the lower ball joints for the lower links before attaching the
links will not come into contact with the tyres. If necessary, implement. DANGER OF THE IMPLEMENT RELEASING!
the limiter sleeves can be detached.
The quick couplings can be controlled in the cab using
As extra equipment automatick check links, see page 215. the wire.

www.maskinisten.net
F 3.3.1.Release wire setting of quick F 3.3.2. Quick couple ball joints for
couplings for lower links lower links
2 Cat 3
2
1
Cat 3/2 Cat 3/2

3 3
4 4
68f 44
In the picture are the different ball joints for attaching an

implement. The part number is found on each ball joint.
68f 43
The left side ball joint is equipped with a guide cone to
make attaching an implement easier.
Fasten the wire (1) to the socket bracket (2) on the cab
rear wall. Pass the wire through the controller (3) and
fasten it to the quick coupling lock (4).

www.maskinisten.net
F 4. Using the hydraulic lift
3 5 6 4 10
7 11
12
2
1
9
T1ch F1
The lower links are raised when the position control knob
Lift/stop/lower switch
F 4.1. (1) is turned clockwise and lowered when it is turned
(Autocontrol switch) counter-clockwise. When the knob is set to an
intermediate position the lower links take up and maintain
The lift/stop/lower switch (2) has 3 positions. When the the corresponding position.
symbol side is pressed down the lower links are lowered The LCD---display of the Agroline instrument panel shows
to the height which is set by the position control knob the position of the lower links as percentage (0---100),
(1). When the opposite side to the symbol side is when the AC---display is selected on the top line using the
pressed down the lower links raise to the height set by the change over switch, see page 53.
transport height selector (6). The lower links stop
moving when the switch is set in the centre position. NOTE: The implement can be lifted up by switching the
lift/stop/lower switch (2) to the lift position (= transport
position, the upper position chosen by knob 6) and
F 4.1.1. Activating the linkage lowered back to the same depth (lower position set by the
position control, 1) by switching to the lower position.
The position control is activated by pressing down both NOTE: The control panel is fitted with lights (8) to indicate
edges of the lift/stop/lower switch (2). After this the whether the lower links are being lifted or lowered. There
diagnosis light (3) goes out and the lower links move is also a draft control indicator light (7), on the Autocontrol
slowly to the position which has been pre---set. The D (ACD) linkage panel.
linkage has to be activated every time the tractor has been
switched off or when the push buttons mounted on the
mudguards or inner switch for connecting implement in
the cab have been used. F 4.3. Setting transport height
The transport height selector (6) can be used to limit the
F 4.2. Position control lifting height. Switching the lift/stop/lower switch to the lift
position or using the position control knob (1) will result in
the links being lifted to the upper limit set by the selector.
The position control is used with implements which run on The numbers of the position control knob (1) and
the ground (mowers, rakes, sprayers etc.). transport height selector (6) correspond with each other.
NOTE: When the position control is being used the draft Nine different heights can be selected using this knob.
control selector (4) must be set to the P position. This This selector does not limit the lifting range when the push
ensures that the linkage will remain in the position buttons on the mudguards or inner switch for connecting
selected without draft control. implement are used.

www.maskinisten.net
F 4.4. Floating---position F 4.6. Lowering speed control

The floating position is used when working with certain The choice of lowering speed depends on the type of
types of implements, which have to follow the ground implement being used. A slow lowering speed must be
surface (e.g. sowing machine, roller etc.). The position used with heavy implements. The lowering speed is
control knob (1) is turned to the extreme counter--- increased as the knob (5) is turned clockwise and vice
clockwise position and the lower links can then move versa. The lowering speed is independent of the load.
freely up and down following the movements of the
implement. The lower indicator light (8) is lit continuously.
IMPORTANT: When working with implements, which F 4.7. Override switch for position
follow the ground surface, use the FLOATING position, control knob
otherwise the implement may be damaged.
The override switch for position control knob (9) can be
used on jobs, where lower links have to be temporarily
F 4.5. Draft control lower than the value which has been set by the control
knob. This is useful e.g. when ploughing. This switch
Draft control is used when working with implements that allows quicker entry of the plough to the correct depth at
operate below the surface of the ground (ploughs, the beginning and better maintenance of depth at the exit
cultivators etc.). The draft control sensitivity is set by from the end.
turning the selector (4) from the position (P) to one of six
different sensitivity positions (1---6).
On Autocontrol, the linkage is adjusted to regulate the F 4.8. Drive balance control switch
working depth, 1 = small influence ... 6 = very large
influence.
A 10
Position 3 is normally used for ploughing. If larger draft
control is required, position 4 can be used instead and the
ploughing depth is not significantly affected.
NOTE: The ploughing depth can be adjusted with the
position control knob.
The lift/lower indicator lights (8) show the speed at which
the draft control is operating.
NOTE: The lower links allow a certain amount of sideways
movement to the implement, and this also affects the
range of the draft control. Therefore the sideways
movement of the links should be adjusted to about 70 mm
(3 inches) at the ends of the arms. 11
N F12
NOTE: When draft control is not in use the selector switch
should be turned to the P position. On Autocontrol D
The best use of the drive balance control is in driving at
(ACD) models the control panel is fitted with an indicator
high speed when a heavy implement is attached to the
light to show when draft control is in use at any particular
three---point linkage. It can also be used on the field.
time.
The drive balance control is activated, when switch (10) is
When the draft resistance exerted by the implement on turned to position A (indicator light 11 lights). Then when
the lower links rises to the value set, the linkage lifts the lifting the linkage with the lift/stop/lower switch (2), the
implement in order to counteract the increase in drive balance control is on.
resistance to keep it constant.
When the draft control is operating the weight of the
implement is automatically shifted to maintain traction. If
pulling resistance increases the hydraulic lift raises the
implement and some of the weight is transferred to the
rear wheels. Thus the driving wheels maintain maximum
traction.

www.maskinisten.net
slip control position (position B, the indicator light (12)

F 4.9. Slip control, lights) and when the draft control switch (4) is on the draft
extra equipment on Autocontrol D model control area (the draft control indicator light 7 lights) the
slip control is on. When the wheels spin over the adjusted
slip limit the linkage lifts the implement. When the slip
decreases, the linkage lowers back to the same depth. If
C B
4 the tractor is stationary for about 30 seconds, the indicator
10 light goes out and the slip control has to be activated
again.
When switch (10) is turned between drive balance and slip
control positions (position C) the drive balance control is
on (indicator light 11 lights), when the lift/stop/lower
switch (2) is on the lifting position and the slip control is
on (the indicator light 12 lights) when the lift/stop/lower
switch (2) is in the lowing position.
7 12
11
N F13
When turning the drive balance control switch (10) to the
F 5. Auxiliary hydraulic valves

The tractor has two valve blocks as standard. They are --- the connector is under pressure when the lever is
equipped with Push---Pull type quick action couplings. pulled away from the seat.
Push---Pull type couplings are easy to use when the
The available volume of oil for the auxiliary hydraulics see
system is under pressure.
“Technical specifications” on page 180.
---the pressure for the + connector can be taken when
the lever is pulled towards the seat
F 5.1. Valve functions
2 T1ch F2
--- The valve (1); adjustable to one--- or two---action, 3 --- The valve (2); adjustable to one--- or two---action, 4
positions, (out---hold---in), spring return to centre positions, (out---hold---in---floating), spring return to
position, out---position can be locked mechanically. centre position, floating is the locked position.

www.maskinisten.net
F 5.1.1. Valve adjustment between single/double---action
T1ch F7
Adjustment between single/double ---action is carried out

through the access hole A in the front part of the cab lever
console (Adjustment of the valve (2) is easier from under
the tractor. During adjustment, stop the engine and
prevent the tractor from moving).
3 B
T1ch F6
For single action, used for tipping a trailer, it is

1 recommended to use the second valve (the valve must be
adjusted to single action). Connect the probe to coupling
B. When the rearmost lever is pulled towards the seat the
trailer will raise and vice versa. With this lever it is possible
to quickly lower the trailer by pushing the lever away from
the seat into the float position (NOTE: This position is
locked = the lever will not return to neutral by itself).
2 When using only one double acting valve it is
T1ch F3
recommended to use the 1. valve.
Adjustment to double ---action is carried out by turning

the knob inwards (on the foremost valve the knob is in the F 5.1.2. Position locking
upper part 1 and on rearmost valve in the lower part 2).
Turn the knobs outwards for single ---action function. The 1. valve is position locked in the out---position (lever
pulled towards the driver’s seat) when the knob 3 is
When using the valves as single---action valves, the + turned inwards (remove the cover A). However, the lever
quick couplings are under pressure. The quick---action can be returned manually.
couplings are under pressure when the levers are pulled NOTE: Do not keep valve adjusted in locked position if it
towards the seat. is not necessary.
WARNING: To avoid serious injury or death
due to falling loads resulting from
inadvertent raising or roll---back of the
loader, DO NOT connect loader hydraulics
to any tractor auxiliary valve that has
detents which cannot be locked out or
removed, except for the float function in the
loader lower circuit. If the tractor is
equipped with such a valve, a dedicated,
properly configured loader valve MUST be
installed.
When connecting the loader to the standard valves the
lowering of loader lift/lower has to be connected to the
floating side of the valve block 2 (position locking).

www.maskinisten.net
As additional equipment two extra valves, an oil flow

F 5.1.3. Floating position distribution valve and a trailer brake valve can be fitted to
the tractor. The following types of valves can be fitted:
The rearmost valve has a floating position when the lever
--- Valves are the same as the standard valves.
is pushed outwards. Oil can then circulate freely and the
--- Adjustable oil flow distribution valve, this enables
implement follows the ground contours.
simultaneous use of two auxiliary valves or
simultaneous use of the hydraulic lift and auxiliary
hydraulics.
F 5.2. Return coupling --- Valve which has a pressure return function (Kick---out).
--- Valve for trailer brakes which takes pressurized oil from
the high pressure circuit when the brake pedals are
pressed.
A F 5.4. Hydraulic motor

WARNING: Before connecting the hydraulic
motor release the pressure by switching off
the tractor and move the levers to their
extremes, if the implement and the safety
rules allow to do this.
T1ch F8
When rotating the hydraulic motor only in one direction
the return coupling can be connected to the tractor return
coupling without the shock valve.
The tractor has, as standard, an auxiliary hydraulic return
When rotating the hydraulic motor in both directions (=
coupling A (1/2 inch). If the back pressure is too high, a
connecting to both +/--- ports), the separate shock valves
one inch coupling is also available. For information about
have to be mounted to the hydraulic motor, if not already
back pressures, see Technical Specifications.
standard in hydraulic motor.
NOTE: When using auxiliary hydraulics, the return
Notice the temperature of the transmission oil !
coupling of the implement has to be connected to the
Attention must be paid to the oil temperature, because
return coupling (A) of the tractor.
high temperature is bad for the lubrication and due to that
the pump or the engine can be damaged.
The recommended working temperature is under 80˚C,
F 5.3. Action to be taken during but the absolute top limit is 93˚C, when the engine has to
operation be stopped (the transmission oil temperature can be seen
in the Agroline/Proline instrument).
NOTE: The valve control devices (the levers and operating IMPORTANT: If the hydraulic motor rotating decelerates
switches) and quick---action couplings are marked in the because of the load, the load must be decreased. In this
same way with colour codes. situation the excess of the pump capacity runs through
the pressure relief valve, the oil gets overheated quickly
IMPORTANT: Clean the quick---action couplings
and the pump may be damaged.
thoroughly before connecting any auxiliary hydraulic
equipment. The caps on the couplings should be fitted
when auxiliary equipment is not connected.
On the market there are also male connectors, not accor-
ding to standards, which do not open correctly the quick
couplings. This may occur e.g as slow lowering when
using the tipping device.
DANGER: When auxiliary cylinders and
hydraulic motors are connected, ensure that
the hoses are attached to the correct
couplings. If the hoses are incorrectly
attached the functions will be reversed.
WARNING: It is prohibited to transport
anything on auxiliary hydraulic valves while
driving on the road. The load, the trailer link
steering etc. have to be locked (e.g.
mechanically).
WARNING: Implements connected to the
linkage or the auxiliary hydraulic system
must be lowered during maintenance.
All quick---action couplings are the type ISO7241---1

and serie A.

www.maskinisten.net
F 6. Attaching implements
When attaching implements to the three---point linkage
(this also applies to the drawbar) the lift/lower F 6.1. Using PTO shafts
push---buttons located on the mudguards or inner switch
for connecting implement in the cab must be used. When PTO---powered implements are used, always make
sure that the PTO shaft is of the correct length, so that it
DANGER: Before engaging or disengaging can work at full deflection vertically and horizontally. If the
an implement turn the draft control selector shaft is too long it will cause damage. Follow the
to the position control P position. In the instructions of the manufacturer when fitting the shaft.
sensitive positions even a small turn of the
position control knob may cause an DANGER: When fastening the PTO shaft
unexpected linkage movement. check that its shield is undamaged. Always
Always use the push---buttons situated on fasten the shield to a stationary part of the
mudguards or inner switch for connecting tractor frame or implement.
implements when engaging or disengaging
implements.
When engaging or disengaging implements
with push---buttons, always stand outside
the implement and beside the tractor. Never
stand on the implement or between the
implement and the tractor.
NOTE: After these buttons or inner switch for connecting
implements have been used the position control system
must be activated by operation of the lift/stop/lower
switch.
DANGER: The implement has to be
mechanically connected to the tractor (the
lower links and the top link) before
connecting the quick---action couplings.
WARNING: When coupling or decoupling an
implement it should be supported to
prevent it from falling.
Make sure that the implement is correctly attached before

putting it to work and that the implement does not strike
against the cab when raised to the top position. When
transport driving with implements carried by the hydraulic
lift, the check links must be locked with pins.
Always follow the implement manufacturer’s instructions.
Remember that correct adjustment of harrows, ploughs
and cultivators greatly reduces the required power. An
incorrectly adjusted plough for instance creates a badly
shaped furrow, tries to twist the tractor away from the
travelling direction, increases fuel consumption and
causes loss of power because of wheel slip.
When attaching implements to the hydraulic lift, make
sure that at least 20 % of the tractor weight still rests on
the front wheels. When required use a sufficient number of
front ballast weights.

www.maskinisten.net
F 7. Ploughing
--- Adjust the lifting link almost to its shortest length. This
Recommendations when
F 7.1. gains more lifting height.
ploughing with a fully mounted --- See the section on How to use the top link.
plough
B
A+(10---15) cm
A
68---65,1
--- Keep the stabilising links free when starting. When

the plough has centralised and is running true set
C the pins (A) in the long holes in the stabilising links.
The draft control will not operate if the lower links
are fixed.
IMPORTANT: If the links remain in the fixed holes damage
may occur, any sideways force will increase draft and
consequently fuel consumption.
--- Adjust the lowering speed to a suitable rate. Adjust the
plough according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
--- Choose the draft control position 3 or 4 and use the
position control knob to choose correct ploughing
depth. After this you can lift the plough to the transport
position and lower it directly to the correct ploughing
D depth using the lift/stop/lower switch.
--- If wheel slip increases, turn the draft control selector
clockwise to increase sensitivity. The automatic weight
transfer to the rear wheels now increases and the tyres
get a better grip. After that turn the draft control selector
back to its original position (counter---clockwise).
68---65 NOTE: The position control knob should not be used
when increased wheel slip occurs. Only use the draft
control selector.
A = space between rear wheels = track width rear --- rear
wheel width HINT: Write down the settings found to be optimal in the
table below for further use:
B = imagined pulling point
Distance between pin centres
C = pulling centre of the tractor
--- in the top link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm
D = side strength
--- in the leveling screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm
Track width: With all plough types the most suitable
distance between tyres when ploughing with the wheels --- draft control No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
on one side in the furrow is the distance between the
--- lowering speed No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
insides of the rear tyres which corresponds to the width of
three furrows (slices). The distance between the insides of
the front tyres should be 10---15 cm greater than that of
the rear wheels.
E.g. 16” plough:
3 x 16” (40 cm) = 48” (120 cm)
Distance between rear tyres 120---130 cm
Distance between front tyres 130---135 cm
--- Attach the lifting links to the foremost holes of the lower
links in a fixed position (not to the long holes for the
floating position) by turning the locking plate horizontal.

www.maskinisten.net
F 7.1.1. Points to note when adjusting F 7.2. When using a semi---mounted

ploughs plough
Disc coulters: Adjust the disc coulters so that they run The following exceptions from the instructions for the fully
10---15 mm (0.4---0.6 in) outside the land side of the mounted plough apply:
plough body and about 10---15 mm (0.4---0.6 in) above the
--- Adjust the lowering speed by turning the lowering
point of the plough, but make sure that the bearing does
speed selector.
not drag on the ground.
--- Adjust the lifting links to same length.
Cross shaft: Adjust the cross shaft so that the bends are --- Adjust the correct ploughing depth of the rear plough
vertical (the left---hand bend should be pointing upwards with the support wheel of the plough.
and the right---hand bend downwards). Adjust the width of --- Fit the adjustable stops on the plough support wheel
the first furrow (slice) by moving the plough on the cross and adjust the height of the front end of the plough with
shaft. The width of the furrow (slice) should be the same the position control knob so that the plough always
as the width that the plough is designed to cut. returns to the correct ploughing depth.
Support wheel: Adjust the support wheel of the plough A single---acting control valve is sufficient for lifting and
so that it presses lightly against the ground and thereby lowering the rear end of a semi---mounted plough.
prevents unwanted increase in the ploughing depth where NOTE: Leave the control valve in the lowering position
the soil is soft. until the rear plough has reached the correct ploughing
depth and the support wheel has reached the stop device.
The upper link: The length of the upper link can be
adjusted with the turnbuckle. The upper link should be
attached so that it is parallel to the ground and to the
travel direction of the tractor.
F 7.3. Ploughing with a reversible
The lower links: Seen from the side. The lower links
plough
should be horizontal or the front ends slightly higher than
the rear ends. The following exceptions from the instructions for the fully
mounted plough apply:
The levelling screw: The sideways inclination of the --- Select a suitable slow lowering speed (turn the selector
implement is adjusted with the levelling screws. counter---clockwise).
For more information, see the implement manufacturers’ --- Adjust the lower links to exactly the same height above
manuals. the ground before attaching the plough, about
30 cm under the cross shaft.
During ploughing the leveling screw must not be used
F 7.1.2. Examples of how to use the to adjust the leveling.
upper link
Lifting height:
When transport driving with, for example, long ploughs
where the surface is very uneven, the rear plough may
catch the ground. Increased lifting height is obtained by
connecting the top link as high up as possible on the
plough. If necessary, it is also possible to shorten the
lifting links.
Lifting force:
Maximum lifting force at the rear end of the lower links is
obtained by connecting the top link as parallel as possible
to the lower links.
Ploughing depth:
It is sometimes a problem to maintain a constant
ploughing depth when the soil is hard (clay or soil mixed
with clay), it is also difficult to make the plough go down
to the desired ploughing depth. Under these
circumstances it is important that the weight transferred to
the tractor is kept as low as possible. Therefore, connect
the upper link as close to the horizontal position as
possible.
If the upper link is connected horizontally, the plough
will maintain the set ploughing depth even if the
ground is hard.

www.maskinisten.net
F 7.4. Ploughing with Autocontrol, brief summary
4 5 3 8
2
1
7
T1ch F4
Always read the plough adjusting instructions --- and --- On Autocontrol B--- models it is useful (also on
ploughing instructions and adjust accordingly. Autocontrol D--- models which do not have the slip
--- Set a suitable lowering speed for the implement with the control system) that the drive balance control switch (8)
selector (4) (e.g. position 4). is in the balance position and on Autocontrol D models
--- Choose a suitable transport height for implement with with the slip control system between drive balance and
selector (5) (e.g. position 8). slip control positions. In this case when lifting the
--- Choose a suitable position with the draft control selector linkage to the upper position at the end of the run, the
(3) e.g. position 4. drive balance is working. In addition on the slip control
---Set a suitable working depth with the position control models the automatic slip control is on when the linkage
knob (1) (e.g. position 4 or 5). After selecting these is lowered down.
settings the plough can be lifted and lowered to correct
depth using the lift/stop/lower switch (2).
--- If wheel slip is excessive, turn the draft control selector
(3) temporarily to a larger value i.e. clockwise. When
slipping decreases turn the selector back to the original
position.
--- If the lift/lower indicator lights sometimes light slightly
turn the draft control selector (3) clockwise. Check and
adjust the ploughing depth if necessary using the
position control knob (1).
--- If further adjustments are required it is possible to use
the passing switch (7) as a position control. Especially
when starting ploughing at field ends by momentarily
using the passing switch, the plough will go to the right
ploughing depth quicker. In the same way when
finishing at the field ends the right ploughing depth can
be maintained at the end of ploughing.

www.maskinisten.net
G. Maintenance schedule
G 1. Service
Correct maintenance at the right time is essential for
reliable operation of the tractor. Maintenance costs are G 1.2. Cleaning the tractor
small compared with repair costs resulting from lack of
maintenance. The most important measures are those
which you carry out yourself which include lubrication and
General cleaning instructions
various checks and adjustments. Protect environment following the following environment
The service intervals shown apply for normal operating orders.
conditions but in more severe conditions servicing should The washing place must have a separator outlet when
be carried out more frequently. using some detergents.
It is best to wash the new tractor for the first time during
General instructions
G 1.1. the first week of the start---up. Never rub back and forth.
concerning oil checks and oil Note: Do not wax the paintwork of the new tractor before
the initial washing.
filling
Do not let the tractor run during washing.
--- Always stop the engine before starting work. When washing do not use special nozzles (t.g. turbo noz-
--- Apply the parking brake to ensure the tractor cannot zle). Keep the nozzle of the pressure washer at least 30
move. If the ground is uneven the wheels should be cm from the sealing points and paint work. The tempera-
blocked. ture of the washing water may not be higher than 50˚C.
--- Wash down the tractor first so that the work can be Follow also the instructions of the manufacturer!
done easily and quicker, cleaning instructions see (point
G 1.2.). When washing the cabin sides do not let the water get to
--- Always observe the utmost cleanliness in all the cabin air filter (in the side plate, usually on the left).
maintenance work. Thoroughly wipe off filler caps and Do not wash the inside of the cab with a pressure washer
plugs as well as surrounding parts of the tractor before or running water. Do not point the pressure washer to-
filling up with fuel or oil. wards to the electrical equipment, electrical connectors,
Inspect the oil and filters when changing. Large amounts lead---through points, bearings, seals and locks. Use lo-
of dirt (e.g. heavily clogged filters) can point to a fault wer pressure, 65 bar / 940 psi) and point the water jet dia-
which could cause extensive and costly repairs if not gonally to the above points. Do not point the pressure
corrected in time. washer towards the radar sensor (distance min. 1m and
the max pressure 65 bar / 940 psi).
--- When carrying out checks the tractor should stand on
level ground. When using the so---called cold fat remover, do not keep
--- Levels should be checked in the morning when the oil is the tractor in sunshine, the paintwork must not be hot
cold and has had time to run down to the bottom of the otherwise the hot paintwork may be damaged.
unit concerned. After washing grease the lubricating points, the joints and
--- When changing the oil, bear in mind that the oil can be bearings must be lubricated with oil. Wax the painted sur-
very hot when it drains from the tractor. faces.
--- Avoid touching the exhaust manifold, turbocharger and
other hot parts of the engine.
--- Keep the engine surfaces clean in order to avoid the risk Engine compartment
of fire.
Keep the engine surfaces clean in order to avoid the risk
--- The fuel, lubricating oil and coolant cause irritation to
of fire. Do not wash the hot engine, fire risk.
skin if in contact for long periods.
--- After completion of service work replace all safety
covers etc. Radiator honeycombs
--- Waste oil, liquid waste, oil filters and batteries should be
Clean all the radiator honeycombs regularly using
handled carefully and disposed of properly.
compressed air or by flushing with water (according the
maintenance program).
Greasing lubricating points fitted with
grease nipples Bellows of front axle suspension (air---suspend front
axle)
--- Always clean the grease nipples before applying the
grease gun. To ensure correct function of the front axle suspension,
--- Apply grease through the nipples until clean grease the dirt in the bellows of the suspension and in the hou-
oozes out (unless otherwise instructed). sing have to be occasionally removed (detach the hou-
--- Wipe away superfluous grease which has been pressed sing, if necessary).
out at the lubricating point.
--- Preferably carry out lubrication with bearing points and Keep the pressure washer nozzle during washing at dis-
joints unloaded and with the bearings in different tance of at least 30 cm from the bellows. The temperature
positions. of the washing water may not be higher than 50 C. Do not
G. Maintenance schedule ---116---

www.maskinisten.net
use special nozzles when washing (Turbo nozzle).

G 1.4. Service inspection (after 100
Cleaning the polycarbonate windows hours)
If the cab has the polycarbonate windows clean them ac- Your dealer gives a cost---free service inspection
cording to the following instructions for keeping the win- (excluding oil and filter costs) to all new tractors after 100
dows bright as long as possible: hours running. The service procedure is as follows:
--- Clean the stains by wiping using a detergent or plenty
of water. Never rub back and forth.
--- Never use the side window wiper on a dry window. 20 Engine
--- Ensure that there is enough fluid in the washer reservoir.
--- Change engine oil and filter
--- Never clean the side window using a sharp tool like an
--- Change prefilter, fuel system
ice scraper.
--- Change fuel filter
--- Never use an abrasive detergent.
--- Do not point the pressure washer towards the side seals
or lead---through seals because the possible detergent 40 Power transmission
may reach the uncoated glass parts. However the coa-
--- Change pressure filters and hydraulic return filter
ted window withstands well different detergents.
60 Front axle and steering system

G 1.3. Lubrication and maintenance --- Change oil in differential
schedule --- Change oil in hubs
NOTE: All intervals are counted from zero hours on the Other points
hour recorder. For example, the 500 hours service is
carried out after 500, 1000 hours etc. even if the measures --- Lubricate according to chart
have been carried out at the 100 hours service. --- Road test tractor. Check during the road test all the
Example: The 1000 hour service contains all items functions of the controls and instruments. After the road
mentioned under the 10 hr/daily and the 50 hr/weekly test, check for oil leaks, check the coolant and fuel
checks as well as the 500 hr service. system.
---117--- G. Maintenance schedule

www.maskinisten.net
G 2. Recommended fuel and lubricants

All volumes are with filters.
API---gra- Volume, when

Part of machine Valtra---grade SAE---grade
de changing (liter)
Valtra CI---4
Engine 10W---40: ---25˚C...+40˚C 19
Engine CR (ACEA E7)
Hydraulic system and transmis- Valtra HT 60: ---30˚C...+30˚C min 55
GL---4
sion Transmission HT 100: ---10˚C...+40˚C maks 65
Powered front axle Valtra Axle LS
--- differential (Limited Slip) 8
--- hub reduction gears, agricultu-
80W---90 GL---5 2x1
ral front axle
Valtra Axle
---hub reduction gears, industral-
2x1,5
front axle
Front PTO (extra equipment) Shell Donax TX 22
2,2
Fueltank 165
Diesel fuel which conforms to EN 590 norm
--- extra tank 170
Cooling g system
y
--- T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h water + anti freeze agent (standard ASTM D3306---86a
D3306 86a or BS 29
--- T161c---T171c, T151eh---T171h, 6580:1985)) 30
--- T191h, 31
Brake fluid reservoir
0,5
T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h
Clutch fluid reservoir, Tc models Brake fluid SAE J1703 0,2
Clutch fluid reservoir (HiShift),
0,25
Tc models (extra equipment)
Windscreen washer 11,00
Windscreen washer (forest Washer fluid
17,5
equipment, extra equipment)
G 2.1. Oil recommendations according to outdoor temperature

When starting the tractor in a warm garage, oil meant for warmer areas may be used.
HT 60
10W---30
10W---40
15W---40
HT100
80W---90
---30˚C ---20˚C ---10˚C 0˚C +10˚C +20˚C +30˚C +40˚C

N G3
ISO 15380 class HEES (synthetic esters) bio oils can be used as transmission and hydraulic oil. The oil must fulfil the
technical requirements of tractor transmission oil. The bio oil cannot be mixed with mineral oil.
IMPORTANT: The bio oil must not be mixed with other oils, for example when filling or using the machines. The bio oil
can be hazardous to the environment and it must be destroyed properly. Follow the instructions on the package and the
instructions of the local waste management authorities.

www.maskinisten.net
G 2.2. Quality requirements of engine fuel
Property Requirement Test standard

Specific weight +15˚C 0,82...0,84 kg/dm3 EN ISO 3675:1998, EN ISO 12185
Viscosity +40˚C 2,0...4,5 mm2/s EN ISO 3104
Sulphur content max. 350 mg/kg EN ISO 14596:1998
Cetane number min. 51 EN ISO 5165:1998
Water content max. 200 mg/kg prEN ISO 12937:1996
Lubricity/ HFRR max. 460 μm ISO 12156---1
The fuel must conform to the EN 590 standard. G 2.2.3. Filter system
IMPORTANT: To mix fuel with any admixing materials is --- The engine’s standard filter system gives sufficient
not allowed. protection for the injection system from impurities that
can be present in well---tended distribution systems.
--- The control of distributor---type injection pumps is
G 2.2.1. Fuel based on internal pressure, which will drop if the fuel
--- The properties of light fuel oil that is only intended for system is clogged. If the pilot pressure drops too low,
warming use do not meet the requirements of modern engine power is reduced, smoke increased and starting
diesel engines and cannot be used as fuel. becomes more difficult. Additionally, water in the injec-
--- In particular, distributor---type injector pumps require the tion system will destroy it in a very short time. For this
fuel to have sufficient lubricity, because they do not reason, the water trap and the filters must always be
have oil lubrication in the same way as typical multi---el- serviced according to the specified amount of run-
ement pumps. Adding oil to diesel fuel is not recom- ning hours.
mended, because it causes carbon build---up, and if oil --- It is also important always to use original Valtra (or Sisu
is mixed with even a small amount of water it will clog Diesel) fuel filters. They guarantee sufficient filtration,
the filter. preventing impurities from damaging the fuel system.
--- Additionally, various fuel quality requirements imposed There are many cheap filter kits (so---called pirates) on
by taxation and seasonal changes have to be taken into the market, with lower quality and performance in order
consideration. to minimise the cost. Among other things, the quality
and amount of filter paper are often insufficient. There
are also often dangerous defects in the basic structure
G 2.2.2. Fuel storage that may cause expensive damage even in a short
--- Storing and distributing fuel must be arranged in condi- period of time.
tions where no water or impurities can enter the storage
tanks. The storage tanks must be installed in a slanted G 2.2.4. Biodiesel fuel
position, so that water and impurities are collected at
the opposite end from the suction pipe of the pump. The only possible alternative fuel to use is RME
The suction pipe of the pump should not reach the bot- (Rapeseed Methyl Ester) Biodiesel according to European
tom of the tank. norm EN 14214 or US norm ASTM D6751. When using
--- Water must be periodically drained from the tank in Biodiesel the engine capacity is almost the same as using
order to prevent problems. Refueling at the same time diesel fuel.
the tank is being refilled must be avoided without excep-
tion. In Tier 3 SisuDiesel engines with Common Rail fuel
--- When the tank is filled with winter---quality fuel in good injection system only max 20% dilution of Biodiesel (B20)
time, the engine is guaranteed to run flawlessly during is allowed.
the cold season.

www.maskinisten.net
G 3. Grease
Always use the following greases in Valtra tractors. Each universal grease for vehicle use. It is recommended for
point requires it own type of grease. greasing chassis, water pumps, pins etc.The grease is
adhesive, protects against corrosion and resists water and
varying temperatures. Temperature range is ---25˚ ...
Valtra Grease, NLGI2 +80˚C.
Universal grease
Valtra Grease Moly, NLGI2
Lithium ---based universal grease. Is suitable for grea-
sing all heavy machines. Moly Grease
---25˚ ... +130˚C
Is suitable for greasing all heavy machines. Lithium ---ba-
Universal grease of high quality, lithium based grease for
sed universal grease. Molybdenum sulphide as an addi-
vehicle use. It is recommended for greasing wheel bea-
tive (1---3%) improves greasing in places exposed to
rings, chassis water pumps, catepillar rollers etc. The
shock loads.
grease is adhesive, protects against corrosion and resists
---25˚ ... +130˚C
water and varying temperatures. Temperature range is
---25˚ ... +130˚C. Universal grease of high quality, lithium based grease for
vehicle use. It is recommended for greasing wheel bea-
rings, chassis water pumps, catepillar rollers etc. The
Valtra Calsium LF, NLGI2 grease is adhesive, protects against corrosion and resists
Calsium Grease LF water and varying temperatures. Temperature range is
---25˚ ... +130˚C.
Is suitable for greasing all heavy machines. Long fibre
Avoid repeating skin contact.
grease. Colour red. Especially good for greasing points
exposed to water. Protect nature and take care of empty packages.
---25˚ ... +80˚C
Calsium LF is of long fibre, high quality and calsium based
G 4. Maintenance schedule
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE---schedule (according to Observe when doing the services that if the tractor is
operator’s manual) is recommended for all tractors and equipped with extra equipment like towing device, air
specially for tractors, which have more than 1000 running condition, air pressure brakes etc. the periodical
hours in one year. The periodical maintenances from 50 maintenances and checks for them must be carried out.
hours onwards can also be ordered from the authorized The extra equipment which needs servicing is given in the
workshop. In that case the periodical maintenance is end of this manual in section ”K”.
carried out by Valtra authorized and trained service
personnel.
YEARLY MAINTENANCE---schedule should be carried
out by an authorized workshop, but for tractors which
have under 1000 running hours in one year the operator
has to carry out the normal service routines according to
the following table (like daily and weekly periodic
maintenance).

www.maskinisten.net
The same numbering system as used on the detached

maintenance schedule are placed in brackets where G 4.3. Every 500 hours
applicable.
12. Grease door hinges 129
13. Change engine oil and filter (or yearly), in
extremely dusty conditions or when using over 5 %
G 4.1. Daily/every 10 hours Biodiesel fuel at 250---hour 129
14. Check brake fluid level and clutch fluid level 130
See page 15. Clean cab ventilation air filter (more often if
1. Check engine oil level 124 needed) 131
2. Check coolant level and radiator fins 124 16. Check wheel nuts tightness 131
3. Check for leaks 124 17. Check brake pedal free travel 132
18. Change pressure filters of the transmission and
hydraulics and also auxiliary hydraulic return oil filter
G 4.2. Weekly/every 50 hours (Th models, on Tc models as extra equipment) or if
the filter indicator lamp illuminates 132
4. Grease three---point linkage 125 19. Check oil level in front axle differential and hubs 133
5. Grease brake mechanism (high pressure grease) 125
6. Grease front axle mounting bearings 126 NOTE: When carrying out servicing you must follow
7. Check oil level in transmission and hydraulics 126 the service intervals, i.e., you must also do all
8. Check belt/belts tightness 126 previously mentioned items. For example, when doing
9. Check fuel system prefilter and sediment bowl 127 500 hours service you must also do the servicing
10. Check electrolyte level in battery 128 required at 50 and 10 hours.
11. Check tyre pressures 128
14
T121c---T171c 13
11 16 5 15 14 13 9 11 19 16 1 13 2
T121c---T171c/
T121c---T131c 6 19 6
4
7
IND
10 2
11 18 18 16 5 17 18 14 6 11 19 16 8 6
Th, Tc, T121c---T131c 19
(Tc) Th T121h---T131h
T1ch G1

www.maskinisten.net
G 4.4. Every 1000 hours/yearly G 4.5. Every 2000 hours/every other

year
See page
20. Change oil in transmission/hydraulics and clean 32. Change radiator coolant 139
suction strainer 134 33. Change brake fluid, clutch fluid and oil in brake
21. Change oil in front axle differential and hubs 135 circuits 140
22. Change cab ventilation air filter and recirculation 34. Check the function of fuel injectors 141
filter 135 35. Check/change engine vibration damper, the models
23. Change fuel filter and prefilter, when using over 5 % T121c---T161c and T121h---T161h. 142
Biodiesel fuel at 500---hour 136
24. Change air filter and safety filter 137 NOTE: When carrying out servicing you must follow
25. Grease flywheel ring gear 138 the service intervals, i.e., you must also do all
26. Check/adjust front wheel toe---in 138 previously mentioned items. For example, when doing
27. Clean fuel tank 138 2000 hours service you must also do the servicing
28. Adjust valves 138 required at 1000, 500, 50 and 10 hours.
29. Change transmission housing breather 138
30. Accelerator pedal calibration and checking of
power shuttle operation 139
31. Tighten frame nuts and bolts 139
20 33
27 T121c---T131c 32 26
33
29 T161c---T171c 22 33 23 21 32 26 21
25 24
T151h---T191h T121c---T171c/
T121c---T131c
20
20
IND
33
T121c---T131c
T121h---T131h
20 30 22 32 28 26 21 35 26 21
34 T1ch G2
T1ch G2

www.maskinisten.net
H. Periodic maintenance
H 1. General
Periodic maintenance for the extra and alternative --- After every 1000 hours
equipment are in section K, after each extra equipment. --- After 5 cleanings, when the indicator light for the air
cleaner has illuminated 5 times
IMPORTANT: Before the maintenance and repair work of
the tractor, loosen the removable parts and clean the envi- Change safety air filter (2):
ronment carefully. Waste oil, liquid waste and brake oil
has to be destroyed properly. Follow the instructions in --- At least once a year
the package and the instructions of the local waste mana- --- After every 1000 hours
gement authorities. Unless it is necessary do not open the cover of the air
The maintenance of the tractor has to be done according cleaner housing. Only associated with the situations
to the periodic maintenance instructions to minimize the mentioned before. During the maintenance check, that the
environmental hazard. cover of the housing, pipes and unions are in good
condition.
NOTE: Clean the tractor before maintenance. Instructions
for cleaning see point G on page 116.
NOTE: When the tool symbol of periodic maintenance is
illuminated in the display, the service work has to be car-
ried out before the tool symbol is deleted.
H 1.1. Air filters

A
T H72
A low---pressure indicator with a warning lamp is

connected to the air cleaner. When the lamp (A) lights up
on the instrument panel, the filter must be cleaned. If the
indicator light illuminates quickly in dusty conditions,
check the ejector pipe (1) is fitted properly.
2 Cleaning
Always stop the engine before cleaning. A blockage of the
air filter is indicated by a change of the engine beat,
smoky exhaust and reduction of engine power.
--- Check the inside of the air cleaner housing and the inlet
pipe. Dirt on these parts indicates that the filter element
is defective or has not been fitted properly.
--- Clean the filter element with compressed air, max.
pressure 500 kPa (5 bar = 73 lbf/in2), or with an
effective vacuum cleaner.
IMPORTANT: The filter element must not be cleaned
more than 5 times, after which it must be replaced. The
filter must be changed every 1000 hours in accordance
with the maintenance requirement:
--- Hold the filter element up against the light and inspect
the element.
T H71
--- If any holes are noticed the filter element must be
changed.
Change air filter (1): Filter fitting, see maintenance point 24 on page 137.
--- At least once a year
---123--- H. Periodic maintenance

www.maskinisten.net
H 2. Maintenance daily or every 10 hours

H 2.1. Check engine oil level (1) H 2.2.2. Check also radiator grilles and
clean if needed
2 4
A
5
3
1
2
T H73
The oil level should come between the max. and min.
marks on the dipstick (1). Adding oil should be done
through the oil filler cap (2). Stop the engine and allow it
to stand for a few minutes before checking the level so
that all the oil has had time to run down into the sump. 1
For the correct oil grade, see Recommended fuel and
T1 H1
lubricants on page 118.
When cleaning use air pressure, a water hose (not

H 2.2. Check coolant level (2) pressure washer) or a soft brush (be careful not to
damage the cores). Direct the spray against the air
streaming direction. When opening the grill (A) up,the
tractor is equipped with the following coolers/radiators:
2 --- Front PTO oil cooler (1), extra equipment
--- Air conditioning cooler (2), extra equipment
--- Engine intake air cooler (3)
--- Gearbox/hydraulics oil cooler (4), in cleaning position
--- Engine coolant radiator (5)
The air conditioning cooler (2) turns forwards to make
cleaning easier and the gearbox/hydraulics oil cooler (4)
can be turned sidewards by opening the locking devices.
1
H 2.3. Check for leakage (oil,

T1ch H1
fuel, coolant) (3)
The expansion tank has a liquid level sign (1) where the Check, that there are no leakages.
liquid level must be when it is cold. Hot liquid level is
higher.
IMPORTANT: The coolant pump is provided with a
drainage hole on its underside. This hole must not be
blocked. If coolant drips out of the hole, the pump seal is
faulty and should be changed immediately. There may be
slight leakage on a new engine before the pump has been
run in.
H 2.2.1. Freezing point of coolant

Check the freezing point of the coolant at the beginning of
the cold season. If the freezing point is too high, drain off
some of the coolant and top up with anti---freeze. Run the
engine for a while until the anti---freeze has been mixed in,
then re---check the freezing point of the coolant. Drain the
cooling system completely every second year and refill
with new coolant.
IMPORTANT: Never use just water as a coolant.
H. Periodic maintenance ---124---

www.maskinisten.net
H 3. Maintenance weekly or every 50 hours

H 3.1. Grease the three---point H 3.2. Grease brake cam (5)
linkage (4)
1 4 4 1
3 3
5 5 T1ch H11
Use Valtra Grease Universal.

--- 1. levelling screws (2 nipples)
--- 2. top link (2 nipples)
T1ch H12
--- 3. lifting cylinder lower pins (2 nipples)
--- 4. lifting cylinder upper pins (2 nipples)
--- 5. trailer hitch (extra equipment), 2 nipples One nipple on both sides.
Grease sliding surfaces in the brake mechanism also,
shown by the arrows.
Use Valtra Calsium LF grease when greasing.

www.maskinisten.net
H 3.3. Grease front axle mounting H 3.5. Check belt/belts tensions (8)
bearings (6)
The fan/generator belt has an automatic belt tensioner.
Use Valtra Grease Universal. When checking belt tension, ensure that the belt is in
good condition. A slack, worn and/or oily belt can cause
problems with battery charging and the cooling system.
Always keep a spare fan belt handy.
If the tractor is equipped with a compressor, check also
the tension of the compressor’s belt.
H 3.5.1.Adjusting the belts of the

compressors (extra equipment)
Air conditioning compressor
1
A
M H28
10 mm
One nipple on both fastening bearings.
The front end of the tractor has to be lifted a little (not from
front axle or front weight bracket, with suspended front
axle from subframe”). This is to make certain, by turning
the axle that grease goes equally into the bearings.
Check oil level in power

H 3.4.
transmission/hydraulic system (7) A
T H58
The adjustment of the air conditioning compressor is done

by turning the compressor (1) in its mountings. All the
three attaching bolts (A) have to be slackened when doing
the adjustment. A deflection of approx. 10 mm. is suitable
for the tension the belt.
Pressure air compressor
10 mm
N H8 D D
E 10 mm
Steering, transmission and hydraulics have the same oil. N H9
The oil level should be between the min. and extra max.
lines on the dipstick. Top---up if necessary, the filling The pressure air compressor belt tension is adjusted with
instructions on page 134. For the correct oil grade, see the adjustment belt pulley (D) by slackening the belt
Recommended fuel and lubricants on page 118. pulley nut (E). The belt tension is suitable with a deflection
of approx. 10 mm.
Occasionally empty the leakage oil reservoir for the
quick---action couplings.

www.maskinisten.net
H 3.5.2. Changing the belts H 3.6. Check fuel system prefilter

and sediment bowl (9)
1
M H7
When changing the compressor belts loosen the

2
visco---fan (1) with the belt pulley by opening the belt 1 T H74
pulley nut (2).
IMPORTANT: The nut is left hand thread. Drain the fuel prefilter into a container, NOT ON THE
GROUND, by opening the tap a little (1) at the bottom of
the prefilter.
Close the tap (1) when the filter is empty.
When needed, drain water also from the fuel filter by
opening the tap (2) below it.
IMPORTANT: If there is water in the fluid; it can damage
the pump and the nozzles.
If necessary bleed the fuel system, see instructions on
page 143.
4
Drain the water traps more often if reguired.
M H8
When changing the multi---grooved fan belt loosen the

belt by turning the automatic belt tensioner (4) with a 1/2”
wrench (3).The belt can be changed without detaching
the fan. If the tractor is equipped with front PTO, see the
instructions page 189.

www.maskinisten.net
Battery in bulkhead (forest equipment)

H 3.7. Check electrolyte level in
battery (10) Extra equipment.
WARNING: Be careful with the battery

solution --- it is corrosive!
2
4
68h 45
T H16
The battery can be pulled out in the battery casing to ma-
ke the maintenance easier. Lock the casing after mainte-
nance.
--- Open the locking (1) or the steps and set them under
the tractor. NOTE: If the water in the battery evaporates too quickly, it
--- Open the latch (2) and move the toolbox (3) from its may be a sign that the charging voltage is too high. Keep
place. the battery clean and dry on the outside. Protect the pole
--- Open the latch (4) and turn the battery casing to open studs and the cable terminals with grease.
position.
--- IIf necessary remove the cowl panel on the battery up- IMPORTANT: During the cold season it is important that
perright end (under the toolbox bottom). the engine is allowed to run for a while after topping up
with distilled water, otherwise the water may freeze before
it has had time to mix with the battery acid.
Also check cables and battery terminals and clean them if
necessary.
After service fasten the covers and the steps.
H 3.8. Check tyre pressures (11)

NOTE: Check the tyre pressures regularly (values are
listed in Technical Specifications on page 159).
DANGER: Avoid over inflation as excess
pressure may cause the tyre to explode.
T H17
It is recommended that the changing of tyres and wheels

--- The battery electrolyte level should be on the level is carried out in a professional tyre workshop which is
marked on the battery. If the battery has not that mark equiped to handle this type of work.
check that the electrolyte level is approx. 5---10 mm
(0.2---0.4 in) above the cell plates in the battery. DANGER: When welding the discs the tyre
--- Top up with distilled water if required. must be away from the rim/ disc, DANGER
--- Under no circumstances should you attempt to OF EXPLOSION!
replenish the battery acid yourself.
--- Never use a naked flame to check the level of the When mounting the tyre on the disc the pressure limit is
electrolyte. 250 kPa. If the tyre does not go on the disc properly,
remove it and refit. When the tyre is positioned correctly
on the disc, inflate to correct pressure.

www.maskinisten.net
H 4. Maintenance every 500 hours

When using over 5 % Biodiesel fuel, the filter should be
changed every 500 hours. For more details see Mainte- H 4.2.2. Changing oil filter
nance every 1000 hours or yearly, page 136.
H 4.1. Grease door hinges (12)

There are nipples on door hinges. Use Valtra Universal
Grease.
2
1
H 4.2. Change engine oil and 3
filter (13) T H76
In extremely dusty conditions or when using over 5 % --- Unscrew the filter (1).
Biodiesel fuel, the oil and filters should be changed every --- Wipe off any oil which has run out onto the chassis.
250 hours. If the amount of operating hours is low, the oil --- Lubricate the new gasket and tighten the new filter by
and filters should be changed at least once per year. hand (not too tight).
Fill with the recommended oil through the filler hole (2) to
the prescribed level, the upper mark on the dipstick (3).
H 4.2.1. Oil changing For the correct oil grade, see ”Recommended fuel and
lubricants” on page 118.
H 4.2.3. Oil capacity

For the correct oil grade, see Recommended fuel and
To the upper mark of the dipstick including filter 13,0 l
NOTE: After changing the oil and the filter run the engine
and check for possible leaks. Then start the engine in the
usual way. Run the engine for a while and check the oil
level.
H 4.2.4. The breatherpipe

Check, that the breather is not blocked.
T H75
Drain the oil when the engine is warm, by removing the

plug from the engine sump, with the tractor standing on
level ground. Clean, refit and tighten the drain plug.

www.maskinisten.net
H 4.3. Check the brake fluid--- and Clutch fluid

the clutch fluid level (14)
T121c---T131c
Brake fluid
T121c---T131c
2 3
1
2
T1ch H4
T161c---T171c
T1ch H9
The brake--- (1) and clutch fluid reservoirs (2) are next to
each other on the models, which are not equipped with-
HiShift clutch.
T121h---T131h
2
3
T1ch H5
1
The models which are equipped with HiShift clutch, the

clutch (2) and HiShift clutch reservoir (3) are one behind
the other.
WARNING: Brake fluid is corrosive and
T1ch H8 poisonous and must be handled carefully at
all times (it also corrodes the paint).
Brake fluid reservoir (1).

The clutch and brakes can use the same fluid.The fluid
level should be between the max. and min. marks. Top up
with new fluid as necessary, see recommended fuel and
WARNING: Normally there will be no need
to top up the fluid. If leakage has occurred,
it must be repaired immediately, before
driving. If necessary, contact the authorized
Valtra---workshop.
The brake fluid level should be checked frequently. Use
recommended fluid only.

www.maskinisten.net
Filling windscreen washer fluid reservoir

H 4.4. Clean cab ventilation air
filter (15) When the temperature is under 0˚C, use an anti---freeze
agent in the fluid.
3
N H17
Do the cleaning more often if needed.

Detach the filter housing cover from the upper LH corner
of the cabin roof and remove the filter. Knock the filter
element against the palm of your hand, clean it with the
T H21
vacuum cleaner from the outside in or blow it clean with
compressed air from the center outwards. Make sure that
the air pressure is not too high. Check the condition of the --- Open the latch (1) and move the toolbox (2) from its
filter. A damaged filter must be changed. place.
--- Remove the cowl panel (3) under the toolbox.
WARNING: The air filter element does not --- The common reservoir cap can be found in the right
remove chemicals from the outside air.The rear corner of the housing (4).
instructions of the pesticide manufacturer
must be abided with when using extra Windscreen washer fluid reservoir (forest equip-
activated charcoal filter. ment)
As extra equipment is a larger air filter housing with active
Extra equipment.
coal filter or larger air filter available.
Also check the windscreen washer fluid level in the reserv-
oir (common for both the front and rear windscreens).
When the temperature is under 0˚C, use an anti---freeze
agent in the fluid.
Fill with fluid if necessary, see the filling table on page 118.
68h 49
H 4.5. Check wheel nuts

tightness (16)
CAUTION: Regularly check the tightness of
the wheel nuts also the wheel disc/rim bolts
(values are listed in Technical
Specifications on page 159).

www.maskinisten.net
H 4.6. Check brake pedal free H 4.7.Change pressure filters

travel (17) (power transmission and
hydraulic system) and return oil
Models T121c---T131c and T121h---T131h filter of auxiliary hydraulic (18)
(unboosted system)
B
D
B
6080---86
The free travel should be 70---80 mm (2.8---3.1 in) with the

pedals latched together. Adjust the free travel if necessary
(see Checks and Adjustments on page 149). C
Parking brake adjusting instructions can be found under
Checks and Adjustments on page 149. A N H18
Models T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h

(boosted system) NOTE: Change pressure filters (A and B) and return oil
filter (C, Th models, on Tc models as extra equipment).
The filters are similar.
If the lamp indicating a blocked filter (D) is illuminated
(common indicator light for all three filters) when the oil
has been warmed, then change all three filters.
If the indicator lamp illuminates when using auxiliary
hydraulics it is probable that the auxiliary hydraulic return
filter is blocked. This can be checked by disconnecting
the pressure sensor wires and running the engine. If the
indicator lamp does not light now, the fault is in the return
filter. Then only the return filter need be changed.
--- Fit a suitable container under the filter and clean the
filter housing and the surrounding area. Remove the
filter housing and filter element.
--- Wash the filter housing in diesel fuel and fit a new
element (lubricate new seal). Do not use the old seal.
--- Refit the filter housing and tighten with a suitable
wrench to a torque of about 200 Nm.
IMPORTANT: Always change the pressure filters (A and
T1LS H5
B) if repairs have been carried out due to impurities in the
hydraulic system. If one or the other of the pressure filters
The free travel should be 35---45 mm with the pedals illuminates, indicator lamp (D), both filters have to be
latched together. Adjust the free travel if necessary (see changed.
Checks and Adjustments on page 150).
Parking brake adjusting instructions can be found under Tc models
Checks and Adjustments on page 151.
IMPORTANT: If auxiliary hydraulics are used and a return
filter has not been mounted, the filter has to be changed
after every 250 hours.

www.maskinisten.net
When using auxiliary hydraulics, mounting of a return

filter is recommended (as extra equipment). On tractors H 4.8.2. Hubs
with return filter all oil from auxiliary equipment comes
back through the return filter.
H 4.8. Check oil levels in front axle

differential and hubs (19)
H 4.8.1. Differential
Agricultural front axle
N H42
Turn the wheel until the oil surface indicator line is

horizontal. The oil surface should be level with the hole.
Add more oil if necessary (recommended oil and
lubricants on page 118).
M H17
Industrial front axle
T H64
The oil should be level with the inspection hole. Add more
oil if necessary.

www.maskinisten.net
H 5. Maintenance every 1000 hours or yearly

2. Wipe off any oil which has run out on to the chassis
Change oil in power
H 5.1. 3. Clean the insert in diesel fuel and dry it with
transmission/hydraulic system compressed air. Change the insert if damaged.
4. Refit the suction strainer (2) and the cover (1).
and clean the suction IMPORTANT: In conditions where the hydraulic system
strainer (20) becomes dirty quickly, the suction strainer has to be
cleaned more frequently. If the operating sound of the
pump changes to a shrieking noise, the engine must be
H 5.1.1. Draining stopped, the suction strainer cleaned and the oil checked
to ensure that its viscosity corresponds to the
manufacturer’s recommendation.
H 5.1.3. Filling
2 1 2 1
T H29
Run the tractor until the gearbox and hydraulic lift are 2
warm as this will speed up the oil drainage and most of
the impurities will come out with the oil. Lower the
hydraulic lift.
T1ch H13
Remove the drain plugs under the gearbox (1) and brake
housings (2) and drain the oil into a suitable container.
Clean and refit the plugs.
For the correct oil grade see ”Recommended fuel and
lubricants” on page 118.
H 5.1.2. Cleaning suction strainer When changing oil it is recommended to refill by pump
through the hydraulic return coupling (3), then the oil goes
through the return filter. When filling the oil through the
filler cap (1), care must be taken with cleanliness.
The oil level should reach the min mark on the
dipstick (2); this is equivalent to 55 liters of oil with
30 liters for the auxiliary hydraulics.Normalfilling is
between min and max mark.
If more oil is needed for the auxiliary hydraulics, fill up to
the max. mark on the dipstick. This is equivalent to
1 65 liters of oil; with 40 liters for the auxiliary hydraulics.
As well the brake cooling improves with the larger amount
of oil. After filling the system, start the engine and check
the oil level.
IMPORTANT: When attaching implements to the auxiliary
hydraulics. Note if there is dirty oil in the implement it will
contaminate the clean oil in the tractor. Implements also
2 require oil changes from time to time.
IMPORTANT: After driving for a short while check through
the filler hole that the oil does not foam. Foaming is a
symptom of a leaking cover gasket. If the oil foams,
tighten down the cover or change the seal.
1
N H20
1. Remove the cover (1) and the suction strainer (2).

www.maskinisten.net
H 5.2. Change oil in powered front H 5.2.2. Hub reduction gear oil
axle (21)
H 5.2.1. Differential oil
N H42
Unscrew the plug and drain the oil. Turn the wheel until
the line of the inspection hole is horizontal and fill up with
oil to the level of the hole.
2
1 Oil capacity:
Agricultural front axle 2 x 1 l
(as standard T161c---T171c, T151eh---T191h) 2 x 1,5 l
M H18 For the correct oil grade see Recommended fuel and

H 5.3. Change cab ventilation air
filter and recirculation filter (22)
H 5.3.1. Change cab ventilation air

filter
1
2
T H65
Unscrew the drain plug 1. Clean the plug and refit it. Fill
with new oil through the inspection hole 2 up to the level
of the hole.
Oil capacity 8 liters.
See Recommended fuel and lubricants on page 118. N H17
Remove the filter housing cover from the cab roof lower
LH corner and replace the filter with a new one. Change
filter more often if necessary.

www.maskinisten.net
--- Open the locking ring (1) and remove the filter
H 5.3.2. Change recirculation filter element (2).
--- Fill the new filter element with fuel.
--- Install the filter element. NOTE: the filter fits in one
2 position only.
1 --- Screw the locking ring CLOSED (ON) until you hear a
clicking sound.
Change prefilter
NOTE: Unscrew the filter by hand, do not use a filter
wrench.
--- Slightly open the drain cock (4) at the lower part of the
prefilter (3) and drain the fuel into a container, NOT ON
THE GROUND.
3 --- If the bleeder---screw (5) is opened in the prefilter’s
mounting frame, the fuel drains more easily. After
draining has been completed, close the bleeder---screw.
--- Unfasten the water trap (6) from the prefilter.
--- Open the locking ring (7) and remove the filter
element (3).
1 --- Fasten the water trap to the lower part of the new
prefilter.
--- Fill the filter element and the water trap with fuel.
--- Install filter element. NOTE: the filter fits in one position
only.
T H35 --- Screw the locking ring CLOSED (ON) until a clicking
sound is heard.
Remove the recirculation control knob (1) and grille (2) IMPORTANT: Change the filters more often if necessary.
and extract the filter (3). Change the new filter. It may be
necessary to change the filter more frequently. If necessary bleed the fuel system see instructions on
page 143.
H 5.4. Change fuel filter and

prefilter (23)
When using over 5 % Biodiesel the changing is every 500
hours.
Change fuel filter
5
1
2
6
4 T1LS H7
IMPORTANT: Unscrew the filter by hand, do not use a filter

wrench.

www.maskinisten.net
H 5.5. Change air filter and safety

filter (24)
T1LS H8
Filter fitting
T H71 --- check that seals are in good condition
--- check that the sealing surfaces are clean
The main air filter (1) has to be changed no later than --- fit the safety filter and make sure that it is correctly
1000 hours together with the safety filter if it has not been positioned in the housing.Tighten the nut (1) to hold it
cleaned 5 times previously and changed earlier. The in place.
safety filter (2) protects the engine if the main filter should --- fit the main filter and make sure that it is correctly posi-
become damaged. The safety filter must not be cleaned, it tioned in the housing. Tighten the fastener (2) of the
should always be replaced. filter until the filter comes into contact with the end of
filter housing.
IMPORTANT: Never run the tractor without the safety filter.
Do not over tighten the nut (3) on the air cleaner housing
Take the greatest possible care when removing the safety (approx 1---1,5 turns after the flange seal has come into
filter so that no dirt enters the induction pipe. contact with the surface of the housing). The cover of the
--- Take out the main filter housing must be mounted so that the ejector pipe (4) is in
--- Remove the safety filter the lower position.

www.maskinisten.net
H 5.6. Grease flywheel ring H 5.9. Adjust the valves (28)

gear (25)
T1 H4
T H83
On the left---hand side of the clutch housing there is a hole Both inlet and exhaust valves should have a valve
(remove the shield plug) through which the ring gear can clearance of 0.35 mm (0.014 in). The valve clearance can
be greased. Apply a little grease (one stroke with a grease be adjusted when the engine is either warm or cold.
gun) at a few points on the ring gear. With use the grease Perform the adjustments to the valve clearances of the
will spread round the gear. Use Valtra Grease Moly. desired cylinder in injection order with the piston at the
top dead centre of the compression stroke. Checking and
adjustment should be carried out by an authorized Valtra
H 5.7. Check and adjust front wheel workshop.
toe---in (26)
Change transmission/
H 5.10.
See ”Checks and Adjustments” on page 152.
hydraulics housing breather (29)
H 5.8. Clean fuel tank (27)
T1ch H14
T H41
If the tractor is used continuously in dusty conditions, the
Always clean the fuel tank at the start of the winter breather should be changed more frequently.
season. This avoids problems with condensation in the Unscrew the old breather. Lubricate the seal on the new
fuel tank. Always make sure that the tank is as full as breather and tighten it by hand.
possible, so that condensation is prevented.
--- Empty the tank and rinse it with clean diesel fuel. Fit the
drain plug.
--- Fill with new fuel. Use a fine metal gauze when filling the
tank.
IMPORTANT: Never use methylated spirit as an
anti---freeze in the fuel. It may cause clogging of the fuel
filter and impairs the lubricating ability of the fuel.

www.maskinisten.net
shuttle operation has to be done after 1000 operating

Accelerator pedal calibration
H 5.11. hours. Contact an authorized workshop.
and checking of power shuttle
operation (30) H 5.12. Tighten frame nuts and
Accelerator pedal calibration and checking of power bolts (31)
H 6. Maintenance every 2000 hours or every other year

H 6.1. Change radiator coolant (32) 3
If problems occur with the function of the cooling system

this could be a sign that the whole system needs to be
thoroughly cleaned as follows:
Clean the cooling system using a special cleaning agent
available from your dealer. Follow the manufacturer’s 4
instructions.
H 6.1.1. Draining coolant

T1ch H3
1 --- Open the drain cock on the cylinder block (3) and open
the plug.
--- Open also the drain plug (4) on the oil cooler. The coo-
ler locates between the engine block and the oil filter.
--- Turn the heater control in the cab clockwise.
--- Drain the water pump by cranking the engine a few revs
with the drain plugs removed.
Before filling, close:
--- The radiator drain cock (2)
--- The drain cock of the cylinder group(3)
--- The drain plug of the oil cooler (4)
T1LS H2
Always stop the engine before draining coolant.

--- Open the cap (1) of the expansion tank. Open the
expansion tank cap carefully. At running temperature
the expansion tank has overpressure (1,0 bar).
5
2
T1LS H9
--- Loosen the hose placed on the thermostat housing

going to the expansion tank and check that the
restrictor hole (Ø about 2 mm) in the union (5) is open.
T1LS H3
Refit the hose.
--- Connect a hose from the radiator’s draining cock (2) to

a clean container and open the plug.

www.maskinisten.net
T121h---T131h
H 6.1.2. Filling
Ensure that a recommended coolant is always used.
--- T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h: 29 l
--- T161c---T171c, T151eh---T171h: 30 l
--- T191h: 31 l
Mix the antifreeze and water according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
IMPORTANT: Never fill up with cold fluid while the engine
is warm. Do not use plain water as a coolant.
1
T1ch H8
WARNING: Brake fluid is corrosive and

6 poisonous and must be handled carefully at
all times.
T1ch H2
It is recommended that the brake fluid be changed every
second year or after 2000 hours of operation.
--- Fill the system to the expansion tank fluid level mark (6).
--- Empty the brake fluid reservoir (1), open the bleed
After filling the fluid run the engine for a time and check
nipples. It is better to place hoses from the nipples into
the level of fluid.
a container, as the fluid corrodes the paint. Pump the
brake pedal (if with reverse drive control pump also its
brake pedal) until all brake fluid in the pipes and
H 6.2. Change brake fluid, clutch cylinders has run out.
fluid and oil in brake --- Fill the brake system with new brake fluid.
--- Bleed the brake system of air (see Checks and
circuits (33) Adjustments on page 151).
If the tractor is equipped with the trailer brake valve and/or
air pressure brakes as extra equipment, open also their
H 6.2.1. Brake fluid bleed nipples to drain the hoses. The brakes must also be
bleeded from the nipples in question:
--- the fluid brakes of the trailer, see the bleeding instructi-
T121c---T131c ons on page 193.
--- the air pressure brakes, see the bleeding instructions on
page 191.
The correct amount of brake fluid is 0.5 liter.
T1ch H10

www.maskinisten.net
the reservoir from the valve side.

H 6.2.2. Clutch fluid
H 6.2.3. Oil in brake circuits
T121c---T131c
Models T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h

The oil in the brake circuits will not be changed when
changing the transmission/hydraulic oil. Because of this
after every other oil change the brake circuit oil has to be
changed by bleeding. Also when repairing, the system
has to be filled and bled in the same way. Bleeding in-
structions, see page 151.
1 2
H 6.3. Check function of fuel system

injectors (34)
If the engine is to continue to give full power output, the
injectors must be maintained in first class condition.
On the Common Rail models the function of the injectors
T1ch H6 will be tested with a tester. Checking and cleaning should
be carried out by an authorized workshop.
T161c---T171c Symptoms of dirty or faulty injectors are:

--- Knocking is an indication that one of the injectors is
faulty. When a cold engine ticks over a certain amount
of knocking is unavoidable. If the engine knocks after it
has reached normal operating temperature, it is very
likely that one of the injectors is faulty. Air in the fuel
system can also cause knocking (which should
disappear after the system has been bled of air).
1 --- Smoky exhaust gases may indicate impaired
2 performance of the injectors. However, this can also be
caused by other faults such as a blocked air cleaner.
T1ch H7
WARNING: Clutch fluid is corrosive and

poisonous and must be handled carefully at
all times.
It is recommended that the clutch fluid be changed every

second year or after 2000 hours of operation.
--- Empty the clutch fluid reservoir (1) and open the bleed
nipple on the end of the hose, so the fluid can be emp-
tied into the container (if the fluid goes to the frame it
corrodes the paint). The hose is placed on the clutch
case. Pump the clutch pedal until all clutch fluid in the
pipe and cylinder has run out.
--- Fill the clutch system with new clutch fluid.
---Bleed the clutch system of air (see Checks and Adjust-
ments on page 148).
The correct amount of clutch fluid is 0,2 liter.
If the tractor is equipped with the push button for HiShift
as extra equipment, change also the clutch fluid. The
clutch fluid reservoir (2) for HiShift is beside the primary
fluid reservoir and you can use the same fluid. Empty the
clutch fluid reservoiri by loosening the hose coming from

www.maskinisten.net
--- if the outer circumference is slack or it moves in the di-

Check/change engine
H 6.4. rection of the shaft, change the damper
vibration dumper (35) NOTE: The vibration damper is recommended to be chan-
ged after every 4000 operating hours!
ModelsT121c---T161c and T121h---T161h. This work should be carried out at an authorized Valtra-
workshop.
The outer circumference of the vibration damper (belt pul-
ley) can twist in relation to the hub. For this reason align-
ment marks have been added to the damper front face,
which indicate the possible twisting.
T H50
1. Check the alignment marks (A) on both sides of the

rubber element. If the difference is more than 1,5 mm,
change the damper for a new one.
T H51
2. Check the condition of the rubber element:

--- if rubber pieces have been loosened from the element
or
--- if rubber has been pressed to the depth of more than
3,5 mm or

www.maskinisten.net
I. Checks and adjustments

Check and adjustment instructions for the extra and
alternative equipment are in section K, after each extra
equipment.
I 1. Engine
I 1.1. Bleeding fuel system I 1.2. Air filter
Allow air to bleed automatically from the system every
time the system has been opened or fuel has run out
1
during driving (in order to avoid a long starting time).
T1LS I1
Low pressure circuit

The fuel system bleeds air automatically due to the elec-
tric feed pump. If the engine is not restarted, air is bled
from the fuel system by holding the ignition switch in posi-
tion 1 when the fuel pump is rotating for one minute at a
time. If the engine fails to start, move the ignition switch
back to the STOP position, bleed again in the position 1
and start the engine.
High pressure circuit T I39
In Common Rail engines let the pump run for 30 seconds

and the start for 10 seconds in turn (the high pressure The air cleaner prevents dust and other particles from
circuit bleeds only when the high pressure pump is rota- entering the engine with the induction air. Engine wear is
ting). largely dependent on the cleanliness of the induction air,
WARNING: The fuel system connectors are so it is very important to check the air cleaner regularly
not allowed to be opened when the engine and to maintain it correctly.
is running and not in 30 seconds after IMPORTANT: The safety filter (2) behind the main filter (1)
switching off the engine. The pressure in must not be cleaned but must always be changed
injection type of engines (CR models) is according to the maintenance schedule. The purpose of
over 1000 bar. If the jet of the high pressure the safety filter is to prevent damage to the engine if the
fuel contacts your skin, the fuel penetrates main filter should fail.
the skin causing serious injuries. Contact
your doctor immediately. Only an authorized
person is allowed to repair the fuel system.
---143--- I. Checks and adjustments

www.maskinisten.net
I 1.2.1. Maintenance of main filter I 1.3. Maintenance---cooling system

The air filter must not be cleaned more than 5 times, after
which it must be replaced. Check when cleaning that the
filter and its seals are undamaged. A damaged filter must
always be changed.
IMPORTANT: Never clean or remove the air filter unless it
is absolutely necessary. When removing the air filter there
is always the possibility that dirt may enter the induction
system of the engine.
Cleaning of the main filter

Use clean and dry compressed air with a max. pressure of
500 kPa (5 bar = 72.5 lbf/in2).
T I5
The following action should be taken to make sure that

the cooling system functions correctly:
--- Check the coolant level (see maintenance point 2 on
page 124).
--- Check the fan belt (belts) tensions (see maintenance
point 8 on page 126).
--- Clean the radiator honeycomb externally using
compressed air or by flushing with water.
I 1.3.1. Coolant
The cooling system is filled with a mixture of water and
anti---freeze agent on delivery. The anti---freeze agent also
prevents rust from forming in the cooling system.
T I3
However, the anti---rust properties of the agent diminish
with time, so it is important to change the coolant at
1. First, direct the air flow from the rearside of the filter regular intervals. A suitable mixture is one part anti---freeze
forward into the air direction. Do not hold the nozzle agent to one part water, but the manufacturer’s directions
closer than 3---5 cm (1.2 --- 2.0 in). should always be followed (see maintenance point 32).
2. Then, direct the air flow from the front side of the filter
and after that from the rearside of the filter again.
3. Check the filter and its sealing surfaces using a
flashlight. Change the filter if any holes or other defects
are discovered.
IMPORTANT: See maintenance on page 123.
I. Checks and adjustments ---144---

www.maskinisten.net
I 2. Electrical system
--- Disconnect the negative battery lead before removing
I 2.1. Battery checks and the alternator.
maintenance --- Remove the battery caps during charging to prevent the
build up of explosive gases in the battery.
Do not connect any additional electrical equipment, as
this may damage components of the existing electrical
system.
I 2.3.1. Welding
IMPORTANT: The battery leads (negative first), the alter-
nator wiring and the engine management multipolecon-
nectors (3 pcs) have to be disconnected before arc wel-
ding is carried out on the tractor or an implement which is
attached to it.
The engine control unit (1) is placed:
A6181---114
--- Check the charge in the battery using a hydrometer

(”acid tester”). The density of the electrolyte should be
1
at least 1,23.
--- Make sure that the fan belt (belts) are always correctly
tensioned.
--- Keep the battery clean. It can be washed with lukewarm
water after removal from the tractor (always disconnect
the negative lead first).
--- Also clean the pole studs, the cable terminals and the
battery retainer thoroughly. Wash off oxidized spots with
water. Wipe the outside of the battery when it is clean, 2
and coat the pole studs and the cable terminals with 3
petroleum jelly.
--- Refit the battery (always connect the positive lead first).
DANGER: Avoid sparking or naked flames
near the battery. The battery gives off
explosive hydrogen gas!
Battery electrolyte is corrosive.
I 2.2. Alternator
T I40
The tractor has a negative---grounded alternator which

can easily be damaged if incorrect connections are made --- The engine control unit (1) is placed in the left side of
in the electrical system. For example, connection of the the engine. The cover of the connectors must first be
battery with wrong polarity can burn out the alternator or disconnected. The demountable connectors are three.
rectifier. The electrical charging circuit must not be broken
All the connectors (2) will be disconnected and connected
when the engine is running.
in the same way. Open the connector locking device (3) to
disconnect the connector, then the connector opens.
When re---connecting turn the locking device back to the
I 2.3. Safety precautions for the locking position.
electrical system IMPORTANT: Never run the engine with the alternator
disconnected.
--- Always connect the battery with the correct polarity.
--- Disconnect the negative lead of the battery first and
connect it last.
---Never open the charging circuit while the engine is
running.

www.maskinisten.net
I 2.4. Fuses
T I52
The fuse box, which is positioned under the instrument F15 25A FAN, AIR CONDITIONING
panel should always be kept clean. It contains 31 fuses. F16 10A REAR WORKING LIGHTS, INNER
The nominal current rating of the fuses is between F17 10A DIRECTION INDICATORS, FIELDMASTER,
5---30 A. If any of the fuses blow, the fault must be traced ISOADAPTER
and remedied. Fuses must not be replaced with ones of F18 5A INSTRUMENTATION, WARNING LIGHTS,
a higher rating, as this may cause damage to the AUTOCONTROL
electrical equipment. The fuse diagram is placed under F19 10A WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER, HORN
the fuse box (it is shown in the figure above). There is F20 10A REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER, RADIO,
space for reserve fuses between the fuses. (TRAILER HITCH LIGHT)
F21 15A AIR CONDITIONING, CONTROL, FLOOR FAN,
When you need a continuous electrical supply e.g. to the
FUEL FEED PUMP 4)
implement, illumination etc. power can be taken from the
F22 10A 4WD, PTO, POWERSHIFT, (FRONT
trailer connection (see page 103). With the implement
SUSPENSION) 1)
control system (optional equipment) electrical power to
F22 10A HITECH SENSORS, 4WD, (FRONT
the optional equipment can be switched on and off from
SUSPENSION) 2)
the driver’s cab.
F23 10A REAR WORKING LIGHTS, OUTER
Power for optional equipment can also be taken from the F24 10A RESERVE 1)
spare fuses or unused optional equipment fuses. A F24 10A AC---5, SEAT DIRECTION 2)
continuous current source can be connected from the F25 15A AIR SPRING SEAT/SEAT HEATING, REVERSE
main current pole of the starter motor (on the models with DRIVE LOCKOUT, EL FRONT LOADER VALVES
main circuit breaker, current is switched off with main F26 10A BACK BUZZER, (SIGMA), HISHIFT
switch) through the new fuse. F27 10A BRAKE LIGHTS, DIFFERENTIAL LOCK,
EXHAUST BRAKE
F28 10A RESERVE
I 2.4.1. Fuse list F29 10A CIGARETTE LIGHTER, 2 PIN CURRENT
SOCKET
F1 15A HAZARD, WATERPUMP F30 10A 1A IF HF*
F2 5A RADIO, INSTRUMENTATION, TEL., EL. MAIN F31 30A CR---CONTROLLER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT SWITCH, TACHOGRAPH
F3 15A MAIN BEAMS *IF HANDS FREE IS FITTED
F4 15A DIPPED BEAMS 1) 6000---series, Nc, 2)HiTech, Nh, 3) Motor cont-
F5 10A PARKING LIGHTS, LEFT rol , Bosch VE,4) Common Rail motor
F6 10A PARKING LIGHTS, RIGHT
F7 25A FRONT WORKING LIGHTS
F8 25A LIGHT SWITCH I 2.4.2. Relays
F9 15A TRAILER SOCKET/REAR FOG LIGHT,EL. MAIN
CIRCUIT SWITCH K1 FRONT WORKING LIGHTS
K2 REAR WORKING LIGHTS
F10 25A 3 PIN CURRENT SOCKET
F11 5A AUTOCONTROL (+BAT), BUZZER1) K3 REAR FOG LIGHT
K4 RELAY, STARTER SWITCH
F12 10A ROTATING WARNING LIGHT, CAB LIGHT
K5 RELAY, STARTER SWITCH
F13 10A RESERVE
K6 AIR CONDITIONING, FAN, CONTROL
F14 15A IGNITION SWITCH
K7 4---WHEEL BRAKING, CONTROL
F14 15A PREHEATING OF INDUCTION AIR,
FUEL PUMP3)

www.maskinisten.net
I 2.4.3. Electric preheating of engine I 2.5. Headlight adjustment

induction air
Correct adjustment of the headlights is very important
when running on the public road.
Headlight adjustment can be carried out quickly and
accurately by using an optical headlight adjusting unit. If
no optical instrument is available, adjustment can be done
as follows:
Check before adjusting the headlight that the tractor
loading is normal and tyre pressures are correct. With
dipped---beam switched on, the cutoff edge of the light
pattern should come at height H when the tractor is at
distance L. With full---beam switched on, the distance
between the light points should be B. Any necessary
adjustment is done using the headlamp adjusting screws.
T I41
F52 250A Fuse for electric preheating of engine induction

air
I 2.4.4. Cabin power supply
A6181---118
Measurements:
L=5m
B = Distance between headlight centers
H = Height of headlights above ground minus 50 mm
(2 in)
If tractor has up lifted full/dipped beam headlights (on the
top part of the cab), the lights have to be adjusted so that
the light pattern shines on the mark at a distance of 30 m
on even ground.Lights which can be mounted under the
lower part of the front frame can not be used on general
roads.
T1 I1
F100 125A Cabin power supply

The fuse is situated immediately in front of the cab in the
RH corner in the power supply cable from the starter
motor.

www.maskinisten.net
I 3. Power transmission
I 3.1. Bleeding clutch system of air

T121c---T131c The free travel can not be felt because the thrust bearing
is in continuous contact. If the clutch stops releasing, the
clutch system has to be bled.
Bleed the clutch system in the follow-

ing way:
IMPORTANT: Check that the clutch fluid reservoir(1) is full
before starting to bleed the system.
1 --- Depress the clutch pedal and at the same time open the
bleed nipple (the bleed nipple is on the end of the hose
on the clutch case). Before depressing the clutch pedal
and opening the bleed nipple, pump several times on
the pedal in order to build up pressure in the system.
--- Depress the pedal fully and close the nipple and slowly
let the pedal up again.
T1ch I5 --- Repeat the pumping action with the pedal until the fluid
which runs out at the bleeding nipple is completely free
of air.
--- Check the clutch fluid amount in the reservoir after blee-
ding.
The HiShift push button (2), available as extra equipment,
will be bled by using the push button.
1 2
T1ch I6
T161c---T171c
1
2
T1ch I1
The clutch pedal normally has no need for adjustment.

www.maskinisten.net
I 4. Brake system
I 4.1. Adjusting travel of brake pedals
I 4.1.1. Models T121c---T131c and T121h---T131h (unboosted system)
1---2 mm
2A
1
1
3 3
T1ch I2
The pedal free travel should be 70---80 mm with the in front of the front wheels to prevent the tractor from
pedals latched together. The free play on the rear brake moving. Pull the cable clearance to the end of the cable
pedal is (extra equipment) 60---70 mm. It can be checked (to direction of arrow A). Open the locking nut (2) and
as follows: adjust through the adjusting nut (2A) the tolerance is 1---2
--- Make sure that the tractor cannot move by itself. mm. Tighten the locking nut.
--- Raise the rear wheels off the ground and adjust the both IMPORTANT: When mounting the parking brake cable,
brakes individually via the adjusting screws (1) until they the cylinder side end has to be mounted according to the
cannot be turned by hand. tolerances, this should only be carried out by an
--- Slacken the adjusting screw 1.5---2 turns and check that authorized workshop.
the wheel can rotate freely.
--- Check that the brake action is the same on both wheels
T121c---T131c
while driving with the pedals latched together.
Check the pedal free travel. The parking brake is controlled mechanically and it is con-
nected to the foot brake mechanism by a cable. The park-
ing brake is adjusted in the factory and readjustment is
I 4.1.1.1. Adjusting parking brake not necessary unless parts of brake mechanism have
been changed (the parking brake is affected when the
T121h---T131h foot brakes are adjusted).
When adjusting, the parking brake has to be off. Fit blocks
The parking brake is controlled with a spring return in front of the front wheels to prevent the tractor from mov-
pressure cylinder and it is connected to the foot brake ing. Pull the cable clearance to the end of the cable (to
mechanism by a cable. The parking brake is adjusted in direction of arrow A). Open the locking nut (2) and adjust
the factory and re---adjustment is not necessary unless through the adjusting nut (2A) the tolerance is 1---2 mm.
parts of brake mechanism have been changed (the Tighten the locking nut.
parking brake is affected when the foot brakes are
adjusted). IMPORTANT: Always adjust the driving brakes before
adjusting the parking brake.
IMPORTANT: Always adjust the driving brakes before
When adjusting, the parking brake has to be off. The
tractor engine must be running, shuttle --- main gear ---
and range levers have to be in neutral position, fit blocks

www.maskinisten.net
--- Check the brake fluid amount in the reservoir after

I 4.1.1.2. Bleeding brake system of air bleeding and top it if required.
If the tractor is equipped with the trailer fluid brake valve,
NOTE: Check that the brake fluid reservoir is full before air pressure brakes or reverse drive controls as extra
starting to bleed the system. equipment, they all must also be bled:
--- the fluid brakes of the trailer, see bleeding instructions
Bleed the brake system in the following way (the on page 193
brake pedals should not be latched together): --- the air pressure brakes, see the bleeding instructions on
--- Depress one of the brake pedals and at the same time page 190.
open the bleed nipple (3) on the brake which is being The tractors equipped with extra equipment will be bled
actuated by the pedal. Before depressing the brake from the lowest bleed nipple as follows:
pedal and opening the bleeding nipple, pump several --- the trailer air pressure brakes, the bleed nipples of the
times on the pedal in order to build up pressure in the control valve
system. --- the tractor brakes, the bleed nipples of the working
--- Depress the brake pedal fully and close the nipple and cylinder
slowly let the brake pedal up again. --- the trailer fluid brakes, the bleed nipple of the fluid valve
--- Repeat the pumping action with the brake pedal until --- bleeding of the brakes for the reverse drive tractor will
the brake fluid which runs out at the bleeding nipple is be carried out through the bleed nipple of the trailer
completely free of air. fluid brake valve. If there is no trailer fluid brake valve,
--- The procedure for bleeding the brake is the same on the bleeding must be carried out last through the bleed
both sides. nipples of the tractor working cylinder.
I 4.1.2. Models T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h (boosted system)
1---2 mm
2A
1
1
T1ch I3
Brake adjustment with torque wrench: Brake adjustment without torque wrench:
1. The engine has to be stopped. 1. Make sure that the tractor cannot move by itself. Raise
2. Tighten the adjusting nuts (1) to 20 Nm. the rear wheels off the ground. Engage the range gear
3. Slacken the screws 2,3 turns. to neutral, start the tractor and engage the shuttle---
4. Check when driving the function of both brakes and parking brake lever to the N---position.
individually. 2. Raise the rear wheels off the ground and adjust the
5. Check that the brake action is the same on both both brakes individually via the adjusting screws (1)
wheels while driving with the pedals latched together. until they cannot be turned by hand.
6. Check that the pedal free travel is the same on both 3. Slacken the adjusting screw 1,5 turns and check that
wheels while driving with the pedals latched together. the wheel can rotate freely.
The pedal free travel is 35---45 mm. 4. Check that the brake action is the same on both
wheels while driving with the pedals latched together.
5. Check that the pedal free travel is the same on both
The pedal free travel is ca. 35---45 mm.

www.maskinisten.net
I 4.1.2.1. Adjusting parking brake Bleed the brake system in the following way:
1. Start the tractor and let run ca. 3 minutes. Then the oil
from pump is completely free of air.
T151eh---T191h
The parking brake is controlled with a spring return pres-
sure cylinder and it is connected to the foot brake mech-
anism by a cable. The parking brake is adjusted in the
factory and re---adjustment is not necessary unless parts
of brake mechanism have been changed (the parking
brake is affected when the foot brakes are adjusted).
IMPORTANT: Always adjust the driving brakes before 1
When adjusting, the parking brake has to be off. The trac-
tor engine must be running, shuttle --- speed gear --- and
range levers have to be in the neutral position, fit blocks in
front of the front wheels to prevent the tractor from mov-
ing. Pull the cable clearance to the end of the cable (in the
direction of arrow A). Open the locking nut (2) and adjust
with the adjusting nut (2A) the tolerance is 1---2 mm. T1LS I3
Tighten the locking nut.

2. The bleeding nipples (1) for the control valve of the
T161c---T171c trailer air pressure brakes (extra equipment, all the
models). Both brake pedal circuits, right and left, have
The parking brake is controlled mechanically and it is con- their own bleed nipple. The control valve is situated on
nected to the foot brake mechanism by a cable. the right side under the cab on the air pressure
The parking brake is adjusted in the factory and readjust- reservoir.
ment is not necessary unless parts of brake mechanism
have been changed (the parking brake is affected when
the foot brakes are adjusted).
Open the locking nut (2) and adjust the parking brake
lever free travel to about 50 mm (at lever end) by turning
the adjusting nut (2A) at the rear end of the cable. Tighten
the locking nut. 2
IMPORTANT: Always adjust the driving brakes before 3
I 4.1.2.2. Bleeding the brake system of air

The brake system has to be bled every two years when
changing the oil of the brake circuits or if the connections
have been opened when repairing. T1ch I4
When bleeding the brakes, the latches must be locked

together. Do not let the oil run on the ground. Open the 3. The bleed nipples of the tractor brake working cylinder
bleeding nipples, it is recommended running hoses from (extra equipment). Both brake pedal circuits, right and
the bleeder nipples to a suitable container. When bleeding left, have their own bleed nipple. The nipples are
pump the pedals until no air bubbles are in the oil. Close placed in the bleed plate on the top of the left axle
the bleed nipples. housing, two highest nipples (2).
4. The bleed nipple of the tractor fluid brake valve of the
trailer (extra equipment). The nipple is placed in the
bleed plate on the top of the left axle housing, the
lowest nipple (3).
5. Check that the pedal free travel is the same on both
The pedal free travel should be ca. 35---45 mm.
6. The bleeding of the brake circuit for reverse drive
control (extra equipment) is carried out from the bleed
nipples (2) of the working cylinder by pressing the rear
brake pedal.
7. Check the free play on the rear brake pedal. The
pedal free travel should be ca. 60---70 mm.

www.maskinisten.net
I 5. Steering system
be adjusted (both tie rods must be of the same length
I 5.1. Checking and adjusting after the adjustment). Loosen the tie rod locking nut (1)
toe---in of front wheels and turn the adjustment screw (2) in the desired direction.
Perform the measurement described above and tighten
the locking nut (1) once the correct distance has been
A achieved.
I 5.2. Steering angle adjustment,

4WD
A+0---2 mm
6080---121
2
First check that there is no play on the ball joints of the 1
steering arms and tie rod. Set the wheels for running
straight ahead. A6181---123
I 5.1.1. Checking IMPORTANT: When altering the track width or when fitting
a front loader, always make sure that the front wheels
Make a vertical mark on both front tyres in the middle of have free movement to full lock in both directions and that
the tread level with the hubs. Measure the distance the front axle and the wheels can turn fully.
between the marks. Roll the tractor forwards so that the If necessary adjust the steering lock stop screws on the
marks again come level with the hub, this time at the rear powered front axle.
edge. Measure the distance between the marks again. To carry out the adjustment slacken the locking nuts (1)
The measurement should be 0---2 mm larger at the rear and adjust the adjusting screws (2). After adjusting tighten
edge on 4WD axles. the locking nuts.
IMPORTANT: Adjust the adjusting screws of both sides to
the same length, so that the turning angle is same on both
I 5.1.2. Adjusting toe---in 4WD axle sides.
1 2
A6181---122
In order not to limit steering movement, both tie rods must

www.maskinisten.net
I 6. Adjusting track width

When track widths are adjusted or larger tyres fitted, the cab to the tyres does not go below 80 mm. Check
the turning angles have to be checked/adjusted with that the distance from parking lights to the outer sides
max turning angle of the front axle on both sides. of the tyres does not exceed 400 mm.
Check also when using chains that the distance from
I 6.1. Adjusting track width, 4WD axle
380/85R28
14.9R28
16.9R28, 420/70R28
420/85R28, 440/65R28
480/65R28, 480/70R28
540/65R28
520/60R28
230/95R36 2102 2002 1980 1880 1702 1602 1580 1504

T I56

www.maskinisten.net
14.9R28
420/70R28 2130 2026 1928 1830 1732 1626 1530
16.9R28, 420/85R28 2026 1928 1830 1732 1626 1530

480/65R28, 480/70R28
520/60R28 2030 1935 1835 1740 1630 1535
460/85R30 2030 1940 1835 1745 1630 1540
540/65R28 1928 1830 1732 1626 1530

1935 1835 1740 1630 1535
600/65R28
230/95R36 2255 2210 1940 1900 1855 1810 1545 1500
TI50
Industrial front axle, standard on T161c---T171c, T151eh--- Different track widths (also fixed discs) are indicated in
T191h. ”Specifications” on page 160.
The standard track widths are underlined. IMPORTANT: Maximum track width must not be used with
big front loaders.
Adjusting front and rear wheel track widths is done in the
same way.
Track width can be adjusted by changing the position of
the wheel rim in relation to the central disc or by moving
the wheels to the other side.
--- Block the front wheels (or rear wheels) to prevent the
tractor from moving.
--- Raise the rear wheels (or front wheels) off the ground
and position sturdy axle stands under the axle housing.
--- Make sure that the arrows on the upper part of the tyres
are pointing forwards.
--- Lubricate the wheel nuts and tighten them to the
recommended values. Wheel nuts must be retightened
periodically (see technical specifications 159).
--- When adjusting track widths or changing tyres the
turning angles must be checked/adjusted to give
maximum turning angles on both sides of the axle.

www.maskinisten.net
I 6.2. Adjusting track width, rear axle
2012 1910 1808 1714 1612

18.4R38, 460/85R38
20.8R38, 520/70R38, 520/85R38
2012 1910 1808 1714
480/80R42
540/65R38 1910 1808 1714
580/70R38, 600/65R38,
1910 1808
650/60R38
620/70R42, 650/65R42, 1811

710/70R38
20.8R42 1808 1714
270/95R48 2022 2000 1922 1900 1622 1600 1522 1500
T1ch I7
The standard track widths are underlined. Wheel nuts (both

front and rear) must be retightened periodically.
I 7. If the tractor is not used

--- Make sure that the coolant contains enough
I 7.1. Storing the tractor anti---corrosion liquid and check the charge in the
battery
--- Run the engine until it is thoroughly warm
For a period shorter than two months --- Lower the hydraulic lift to its lower position
--- Crank the engine a few rews.
No special measures are required provided that: --- Remove the battery, clean it and store it in a cool dry
--- The tractor has been regularly maintained place where there is an even temperature. Charge the
--- The tractor is clean and has been washed battery every 2nd month.
--- The coolant contains enough anti---corrosion liquid --- Slacken the fan belt
--- The fuel tank is full --- Protect exposed parts against corrosion by applying
--- The battery is kept in a suitable place anti---corrosion oil.
--- The air conditioning is operated for a few minutes at --- Cover the air induction pipe to the air cleaner and the
least once a month exhaust pipe with a plastic bag or similar.
--- Operate the air conditioning for a few minutes at least
once a month
For a period longer than two months
--- Clean, wash and lubricate the tractor
--- Clean the fuel tank
--- Fill the fuel tank with fuel
--- Change the prefilter in fuel system
--- Change the fuel filter and bleed the fuel system of air
--- Clean the air cleaner
--- Change engine oil and oil filter

www.maskinisten.net
I 7.2. Removing the tractor from

storage
After a period shorter than two

months
--- Fit the battery (fully charged)
--- Check the oil level in the engine and transmission, the
coolant level in the radiator, the electrolyte level in the
battery and the tyre pressures.
--- Carry out the general lubrication
--- Bleed the fuel system if required
--- Start the engine without racing it
--- Test---run the tractor and make sure that everything
works correctly.
After a period longer than two months

--- Check the tyre pressures
--- Remove the protective covers
--- Turn the radiator fan carefully forwards and backwards,
so that the sealing ring of the coolant pump works loose
(it may have stuck to the shaft).
--- Wash off any anti---corrosion oil applied to the exterior of
the tractor
--- Tension the fan belt/belts (compression belt)
--- Remove the valve cover (covers) and lubricate the
rocker mechanism with engine lubricating oil.
--- Check the oil level in the engine and transmission, the
coolant level in the radiator and the electrolyte level in
the battery
--- Bleed the fuel system of air
--- Refit the battery (fully charged)
--- Start the engine without racing it
--- Test---run the tractor

www.maskinisten.net
J. Technical specifications
Specification information for the extra and alternative equipment are in section K, after each extra equipment.
J 1. Dimensions and weights

Dimensions (mm) T121c T131c T161c T171c
With front tyres 16.9R28 16.9R28 460/85R30 460/85R30
With rear tyres 20.8R38 20.8R38 20.8R42 20.8R42
Length 5148 5148 5148 5148
Width 2338 2338 2338 2338
Height to the roof 2996 2996 3046 3046
Height to the exhaust pipe 2900 2900 2900 3003
Wheel base 2748 2748 2748 2748
Ground clearance (front axle) 545/5051) 545/5051) 595/5551) 595/5551)
Ground clearance (rear axle) 550 550 600 600
Dimensions (mm) T121h T131h T151eh T161h T171h T191h

With front tyres 16.9R28 16.9R28 460/85R30 460/85R30 460/85R30 460/85R30
With rear tyres 20.8R38 20.8R38 20.8R42 20.8R42 20.8R42 20.8R42
Length 5148 5148 5148 5148 5148 5148
Width 2338 2338 2338 2338 2338 2338
Height to the roof 2996 2996 3046 3046 3046 3046
Height to the exhaust pipe 2900 2900 2900 2900 3003 3003
Wheel base 2748 2748 2748 2748 2748 2748
Ground clearance (front axle) 545/5051) 545/5051) 595/5551) 595/555 1) 595/555 1) 595/5551)
Ground clearance (rear axle) 550 550 600 600 600 600
1) With front axle suspension.
Dimension from the rear axle mid point to the cab roof part is 2121 mm.
Weights kg T121c, T121h T131c, T131h

With tyres 16.9R28, 20.8R38 16.9R28, 20.8R38
Total weight (with full fuel tank and
55901) 55901)
without ballast weights)
Front axle weight (%) 25201) (45) 25201) (45)
Rear axle weight (%) 3070 (55) 3070 (55)
Weights kg T151eh T161c, T161h T171c, T171h T191h

460/85R30, 460/85R30, 460/85R30, 460/85R30,
With tyres
20.8R42 20.8R42 20.8R42 20.8R42
Total weight (with full fuel tank and
5930 5930 5980 5980
without ballast weights)
Front axle weight (%) 2660 (45) 2660 (45) 2710 (45) 2710 (45)
Rear axle weight (%) 3270 (55) 3270 (55) 3270 (55) 3270 (55)
1) With industrial front axle 140 kg heavier, standard on models T161c---T171c, T151eh---T191h.
---157--- J. Specifications
www.maskinisten.net
J 2. Maximum permissible axle loadings, (kg)

Regardless of any limitations due to the tyres/tires, with standard track widths max. speed.
T121c ---T131c, T161c ---T171c,

Tractor
T121h---T131h T151eh---T191h
max 40 km/h 4000
max 8 km/h 5500
Front 4WD
industrial front axle max 40 km/h 5000 5500
industrial front axle max 8 km/h 6200 6200
Rear, max 40 km/h 8000 9000
Total weight, max 40 km/h 9000 11000
J 3. Tyres (alternative tyre equipment)
T151eh,
Speed Radius T121c- T131c,
xed disc
xed disc
Rear Front T161c- T171c,
IndexSRI T121h- T131h
T161h- T191h
Fixe
Fixe
Front axle Agricultural Industrial
460/85R38 825 380/85R28 x
x
18 4R38
18.4R38 825 14 9R28
14.9R28
x x x
520/70R38 825 420/70R28 x x
x x
520/85R38 875 420/85R28
x x x x
x x
20 8R38
20.8R38 875 16 9R28
16.9R28
x x x x
540/65R38 800 440/65R28 x
580/70R38 875 480/70R28 x x
600/65R38 825 480/65R28 x x
650/60R38 825 520/60R28 x1) x1)
x x
650/65R38 875 540/65R28
x x
710/70R38 925 600/65R28 x1)2)
480/80R42 825 16.9R28 x x
20.8R42 925 460/85R30 x
520/85R42 925 460/85R30 x
620/70R42 925 480/70R30 x
650/65R42 925 540/65R30 x
650/65R42 925 600/65R28 x
270/95R48 825 230/95R36 x x
480/80R38 IND 825 400/80R28 IND x x x x
540/80R38 IND 825 440/80R28 IND x x x x
650/65R42 IND 925 540/65R30 IND x x
18.4---38/14 FOR 825 14.9---28/14 FOR x x x x
600/65---34 FOR 775 500/60---26,5 FOR x x
20.8---38/14 FOR 875 16.9---28/14 FOR x x
600/65R38 FOR 825 500/65R28 FOR x x x x
650/65R38 FOR 825 540/65R28 FOR x x
650/75---38 FOR 925 540/70---30 FOR x x
1) Not with automatic check link.
2) Not with Autocomfort.
Speed Radius Index (dynamic rolling radius): It is used only when calculating the theoretical tractor speed according
to the ECE/EC---classification.
J. Specifications ---158---
www.maskinisten.net
Always contact your dealer to ensure the right ratio is used. When track widths are adjusted or larger tyres fitted, the
turning angles have to be checked/adjusted with max turning angle of the front axle on both sides.
IMPORTANT: With larger tyres and the suspended cab (extra equipment), the space between the mudguard and the
tyre may become too small (under 25 mm) when the cab moves down. Note this especially when using the chains.
Then adjust the mudguards (instruction on page 99) to suit.
IMPORTANT: On the traffic tractors 50 km/h the tyre loadings are smaller. Check from the tyre manufacturer’s catalogue.
J 3.1. Wheel nuts, tightening torque

--- Wheel nuts, front 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Nm
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Nm
--- Rim---wheel disc (front and rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Nm
J 3.2. Tyre loadings and pressures (40 km/h)

Rear axle Front axle
Max loading/axle* (kg) / Max loading/axle* (kg) /
Tyre Tyre
pressure (bar) pressure (bar)
460/85R38 6000/1.6 14.9R28 3600/1.6
18.4R38 6000/1.6 380/85R28 3600/1.6
520/70R38 6700/1.6 420/70R28 4120/1.6
520/85R38 7750/1.6 420/85R28 4860/1.6
20.8R38 7300/1.6 16.9R28 4480/1.6
540/65R38 6150/1.4 440/65R28 3900/1.6
580/70R38 7750/1.6 480/65R28 4480/1.6
600/65R38 7300/1.6 480/70R28 5000/1.6
650/60R38 3875/1.6 520/60R28 4720/1.6
650/65R38 8250/1.6 540/65R28 5300/1.6
710/70R38 10600/1.6 600/65R28 6150/1.6
480/80R42 7500/1.4 460/85R30 5800/1.6
520/85R42 9500/1.6 480/70R30 5150/1.6
20.8R42 7750/1.4 540/65R30 5450/1.6
650/65R42 5150/2.4 540/70R30 2900/1.6
620/70R42 9000/1.6 230/95R36 3800/3.6
270/95R48 5300/3.6 400/80R28 IND 6900/3.2
480/80R38 IND 10600/3.2 440/80R28 IND 4000/3.2
540/80R38 IND 12600/3.2 540/65R30 IND 9250/3.2
650/65R42 IND 14200/3.2 500/60---26.5 FOR 8770/2.4
600/65---34 FOR 8820/2.4 14.9---28/14 FOR 5000/3.0
18.4---38/14 FOR 7750/2.6 16.9---28/14 FOR 5800/2.7
20.8---38/14 FOR 8750/2.6 500/65R28 FOR 5600/2.4
600/65R38 FOR 8750/2.4 540/65R28 FOR 6500/2.4
650/65R38 FOR 10000/2.4 540/70---30 FOR 7100/2.4
650/75---38 FOR 11200/2.4
* Two wheels/axle.
Maximum permissible front axle loading is 4000 kg or 5500 kg (industrial front axle).
Maximum permissible rear axle loading is 8000 kg (T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h) or 9000 kg (T161c---T171c,
T151eh---T191h).
Permissible wheel loadings can reduce max permissible axle loadings.
When using twin---mounted wheels note the following:

--- the loading on these two wheels together can be multiplied by 1.76 of the permissible loading on one wheel.
--- using twin---mounted wheels is for decreasing the surface pressure, not for obtaining better side support
--- do not exceed tyre size stated for the model in table J 3. when using dual/extension wheels
--- the track width of the inner wheels has to be adjusted to minimum value.
--- if necessary limited turning axle
www.maskinisten.net
J 4. Track widths mm
Rear Track width
460/85R38, 18.4R38 1612, 1714, 1808, 1910, 2012
520/70R38, 520/85R38, 20.8R38, 480/80R42 1714, 1808, 1910, 2012
540/65R38 1714, 1808, 1910
580/70R38, 600/65R38 1808, 1910
650/60R38, 650/75R38, 620/70R42, 650/65R42, 710/70R38 1811
20.8R42 1714, 1808
270/95R48 1500, 1522, 1600, 1622, 1900, 1922, 2000, 2022
520/85R38, 540/80R38 IND ,20.8R38, 20.8---38 FOR, 650/75R38,
1676 ,1850
650/65R42 IND, 650/75---38 FOR
600/65R38 FOR, 650/65R38, 650/65R38 FOR, 650/75R38,
1850
650/65R42 IND
18.4R38, 18.4---38 FOR, 480/80R38 IND 1650, 1876
600/65---34 FOR 1900
Front Track width
14.9R28, 380/85R28 1530, 1645, 1735, 1840, 1930, 2045, 2135
420/70R28, 420/85R28, 16.9R28, 440/65R28, 480/65R28,
1530, 1645, 1735, 1840, 1930, 2045
480/70R28
520/60R28 1530, 1640, 1735, 1835, 1930
540/65R28 1530, 1645, 1735, 1840, 1930
230/95R36 1504, 1580, 1602, 1702, 1880, 1980, 2002, 2102
14.9R28, 420/85R28, 16.9R28, 400/80R28 IND,
1745, 1840
440/80R28 IND,14.9---28 FOR, 500/65R28 FOR
Industrial front axle Track width
14.9R28, 420/70R28 1530, 1626, 1732, 1830, 1928, 2026, 2130
16.9R28, 420/85R28, 480/65R28, 480/70R28 1530, 1626, 1732, 1830, 1928, 2026
540/65R28 1530, 1626, 1732, 1830, 1928
520/60R28 1535, 1630, 1740, 1835, 1935, 2030
600/60R28 1535, 1630, 1740, 1835, 1935
460/85R30 1540, 1630, 1745, 1835, 1940, 2030
230/95R36 1500, 1544, 1812, 1856, 1898, 1942, 2210, 2254
14.9R28, 400/80R28 IND, 14.9---28 FOR, 540/70---30 FOR 1875,1900
16.9R28, 540/65R28, 540/65R28 FOR, 440/80R28,
1865,1890
440/80R28 IND, 16.9---28 FOR, 500/65R28 FOR
500/60---26,5 FOR 1895, 1885
Measured between middle of tyres. Adjusting track widths on page 153.

With air suspension front axle track widths are 40 mm narrower.
The standard track widths are underlined. When track widths are adjusted or larger tyres fitted, the turning angles
have to be checked/adjusted with max turning angle of front axle on both sides. When adjusting the rear axle
track widths, check that the wheels rotate freely. Check also when using chains that the distance from the cab to
the tyres does not go below 80 mm. Check further that the distance from parking lights to the outer sides of the
tyres does not exceed 400 mm.
IMPORTANT: The maximum allowed width of the tractor is 2550 mm.
Fixed rims
At the rear, the distance between the mudguards is 1090 mm.

In many work applications, it is advisable to adjust the track widths so that the track made by the front tyres is covered
by the track made by the rear tyres.
When using the narrow track widths for the rear axle, check that the lower links do not touch the tyres. When required
lock the side regulators.
IMPORTANT: According to EU---directive the smallest allowed distance between the tyre and the cab is 50 mm.
www.maskinisten.net
J 5. Engine
Model T121c T131c T61c T171c
Designation 66 CTA---4V 66 CTA---4V 66 CTA---4V 74 CTA---4V
Type F o u r s t r o k e d i r e c t i n j e c t i o n d i e s e l e n g i n e with Common Rail
Turbocharged, intercooler yes yes yes yes
Number of cylinders 6 6 6 6
Numbering of cylinders
1---2---3---4---5---6 1---2---3---4---5---6 1---2---3---4---5---6 1---2---3---4---5---6
(fr. front)
Cylinder bore, mm 108 108 108 108
Stroke, mm 120 120 120 134
Cylinder displacement, dm3 6,6 6,6 6,6 7,4
Max. output,
102/(139)/2000 113/(154)/2000 128/(174)/2000 135/(184)/2000
kW/(hp)/r/min (ISO 14396)
Nominal output,
98/(133)/2200 109/(148)/2200 125/(170)/2200 132/(180)/2200
kW/(hp)/r/min (ISO 14396)
Max Torque, Nm/r/min 550/1500 580/1500 660/1500 670/1500
Max. no load speed,
2400 2400 2400 2400
r/min
Low idling speed, r/min 850 850 850 850
Model T121h T31h T151eh

Designation 66 CTA---4V 66 CTA---4V 66 CTA---4V
Turbocharged, intercooler yes yes yes
Number of cylinders 6 6 6
1---2---3---4---5---6 1---2---3---4---5---6 1---2---3---4---5---6
(fr. front)
Cylinder bore, mm 108 108 108
Stroke, mm 120 120 120
Cylinder displacement, dm3 6,6 6,6 6,6
ECO
Max. output, 119/(162)/20001) 127/(173)/20001)
102/(139)/2000 127/(173)/18001)
kW/(hp)/r/min (ISO 14396) 113/(154)/2000 120/(163)/2000
117/(159)/1800
ECO
Nominal output, 115/(156)/22001) 123/(167)/22001)
98/(133)/2200 127/(173)/18001)
kW/(hp)/r/min (ISO 14396) 109/(148)/2200 117/(159)/2200
117/(159)/1800
650/15001) 680/15001) 730/11001)
Max Torque, Nm/r/min 550/1500
580/1500 620/1500 680/1100
Max. no load speed,
2400 2400 2400 2000
r/min
850 850 850 850
Low idling speed, r/min
6502) 6502) 6502) 6502)
1) Higher transport boost power area, when the main gear is H2 or higher.
2) Parking brake is on
www.maskinisten.net
Model T161h T171h T191h

Designation 66 CTA---4V 74 CTA---4V 74CTA---4
Turbocharged, intercooler yes yes yes
Number of cylinders 6 6 6
1---2---3---4---5---6 1---2---3---4---5---6 1---2---3---4---5---6
(fr. front)
Cylinder bore, mm 108 108 108
Stroke, mm 120 134 134
Cylinder displacement, dm3 6,6 7,4 7,4
155/(211)/20003)
Max. output, 135(184)20001) 142(193)20001)
155/(211)/20002)
kW/(hp)/r/min (ISO 14396) 128(174)2000 135(184)2000
139/(189)/2000
153/(208)/22003)
Nominal output, 131,5/(179)/22001) 136/(185)/22001)
151/(205)/22002)
kW/(hp)/r/min (ISO 14396) 125/(170)/2200 132/(180)/2200
136/(185)/2200
830/15003)
710/15001) 730/15001)
Max Torque, Nm/r/min 750/15002)
660/1500 670/1500
680/1400
Max. no load speed,
2400 2400 2400
r/min
850 850
Low idling speed, r/min 8506504)
6504) 6504)
1) Higher transport boost power area, when the main gear is H2 or higher.
2) Higher transport boost power area, when the main gear is H2 or higher and PS boost area, when quick---shift is 2 or
3. The trans boost and PS boost power areas are equal.
3) Sigma power area, the largest output/torque area, when the power transferred through the power---take---off is large
enough. The symbol is illuminated in the instrument panel.

4) Parking brake is on
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead --- push---rod operated
Valve clearance cold/hot:
--- inlet valves, mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.35
--- exhaust valves, mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.35
J 5.1. Engine lubrication system

Engine lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear type pump --- strainer on suction side and replaceable
filter on pressure side
Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disposable type filter element
Oil pressure at idling speed (min) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 kPa (1.0 kp/cm2)
Oil pressure at normal working speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250---400 kPa (2.5---4 kp/cm2)
Oil volumes and qualities, see table on page 118.
J 5.2. Fuel system and air cleaner

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel fuel, see the quality requirements on page 119
Common rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High pressure pump with electric control of injection
Fuel feed pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric pump
Order of injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1---5---3---6---2---4
Fuel filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper filter
Pre filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper filter with water trap
Cold---starting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating of induction air with an electric resistor
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two---stage, dry element, with blockage indicator
Pre---cleaner system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ejector
Fuel tank volumes, see table on page 118.
www.maskinisten.net
J 5.3. Coolant system

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugal pump, pressurized radiator with expansion tank,
regulated by pressure cap
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 thermostats 79˚C and 83˚C
Fan, belt driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Visco--- fan automatically switches on and off according
the cooling temperature, fan blades 8 pcs, ø 600 mm
Cooling system volumes, see table on page 118.
J 6. Electrical system
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 V, negative ground
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Ah
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120A
Starter motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,2 kW
Safety start
---T121c---T171c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operated by the clutch pedal
---T121h---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operated by the parking brake
Electric resistor (engine induction air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,1 kW
Bulbs:
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60/55 W --- H4
Sidelights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5W
Rear/brake lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/21 W
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 W
Working lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 W --- H3
Instrument panel lights and warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 W --- 1,2 W
Cabin lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 x 10 W
Fuses, see page 146
Electrical system:
T121c---T171c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC9.2
T121h---T171h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC10.2
T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC10.21
J 7. Power transmission
J 7.1. Clutch
T121c---T171c
Hydraulically controlled, dry, single---disc clutch with disc spring
Disc linings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organic material (asbestos---free)
Disc diameter: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 mm
The free travel can not be felt because the thrust bearing is in continuous contact. The free pedal travel is 10---15 mm
measured at the piston rod.
As extra equipment it is available to have the push buttons for HiShift, so there is no need to use the foot clutch pedal.
J 7.2. Power shuttle
T121h---T191h
Th models have a power shuttle unit, where forward and reverse driving multi---disc clutches are controlled hydraulically
by the electronic (or when required with the clutch pedal). The multi---disc clutches for forward and reverse driving
operate at the same time as the driving clutch. The multi---disc clutch operation is controlled by oil pressure using
HiShift--- switches on the speed gear and range levers electronically or with the clutch pedal.
There is no need to adjust the clutch.
The disc numbers of power shuttle multi---disc clutches:
--- Forward driving/reverse driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 kpl / 9 kpl
Friction area, forward driving/reverse driving . . . . . . . . . . 1742 cm2 / 1742 cm2
www.maskinisten.net
J 7.3. Gearbox
Helical gears, fully synchronized (except range LL), four speed gears with three ranges (LL=creeper range, M=Medium
range, H=High range).
In addition tractors have 3---step quick---shift gear, giving 36 forward and 36 reverse gears. The Powershift function is
also controlled in Th models by the electronic control unit. When required the pre---programmed automatic functions of
PS can be engaged to accommodate different driving situations.
As a traffic tractor (50 km/h, in some marketing areas) and tractors equipped with an electric maximum speed limiter the
drive gears have a different ratio.
Transmission
--- T121c---T130c, T121h---T131h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS 650
--- T161c---T171c, T151eh---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS 700
Powershift gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I = 1,0
II = 0,811
III = 0,651
J 7.4. Final drives

Planetary gear in rear axle housing
Reduction ratio
--- T121c---T130c, T121h---T131h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,86
--- T161c---T171c, T151eh---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8,571
Flange distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750 mm
J 7.4.1. Differential lock, rear axle

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electro hydraulic multi---disc type
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic, with electrical control
www.maskinisten.net
J 7.5. Speed ranges
J 7.5.1. 40 km/h
Speed ranges on the models T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h with Powershift km/h at nominal engine
output speed of 2200 r/min, reverse speeds are about 5 % faster.
Without Powershift read the speeds from column II. (Crown wheel/pinion wheel is different as on PS
models).
The Speed Radius Index (rolling radius of the tyre) for different tyres, see the table on the page 158.
(final drive 650R)

Speed Radius Index Speed Radius Index Speed Radius Index Speed Radius Index
r = 775 r = 800 r = 825 r = 875
I II III I II III I II III I II III
LL1 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.6 0.7 0.9 LL1
LL2 0.8 0.9 1.2 0.8 1.0 1.2 0.8 1.0 1.3 0.9 1.1 1.3 LL2
LL3 1.1 1.3 1.7 1.1 1.4 1.7 1.1 1.4 1.8 1.2 1.5 1.9 LL3
LL4 1.5 1.9 2.3 1.6 1.9 2.4 1.6 2.0 2.5 1.7 2.1 2.6 LL4
M1 2.7 3.3 4.1 2.8 3.4 4.2 2.8 3.5 4.4 3.0 3.7 4.6 M1
M2 3.8 4.7 5.9 3.9 4.9 6.0 4.1 5.0 6.2 4.3 5.3 6.6 M2
M3 5.4 6.6 8.2 5.5 6.8 8.5 5.7 7.0 8.8 6.0 7.5 9.3 M3
M4 7.6 9.3 11.6 7.8 9.6 12.0 8.1 9.9 12.4 8.6 10.5 13.1 M4
H1 8.3 10.3 12.8 8.6 10.6 13.2 8.9 11.0 13.6 9.4 11.6 14.5 H1
H2 11.9 14.7 18.3 12.3 15.1 18.9 12.7 15.6 19.5 13.4 16.6 20.6 H2
H3 16.7 20.6 25.7 17.3 21.3 26.5 17.8 21.9 27.3 18.9 23.3 29.0 H3
H4 23.6 29.1 36.3 24.4 30.1 37.5 25.2 31.0 38.7 26.7 32.9 41.0 H4
The driving speeds of the tractor equipped with the electric maximum speed limiter (EcoSpeed), on the mo-
del T131h, are according to the 50 km/h traffic tractor up to the limitation, the maximum speed is limited to
the 40 km/h.
Traffic tractor (final drive 650)

r = 775 r = 800 r = 825 r = 875
LL1 0.7 0.8 1.0 0.7 0.9 1.1 0.7 0.9 1.1 0.7 0.9 1.1 LL1
LL2 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.0 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.3 1.6 LL2
LL3 1.3 1.7 2.1 1.4 1.7 2.1 1.4 1.8 2.2 1.5 1.8 2.3 LL3
LL4 1.9 2.3 2.9 1.9 2.4 3.0 2.0 2.5 3.1 2.1 2.6 3.2 LL4
M1 3.3 4.1 5.1 3.5 4.3 5.3 3.5 4.4 5.4 3.7 4.6 5.7 M1
M2 4.7 5.8 7.3 4.9 6.0 7.5 5.0 6.2 7.8 5.3 6.5 8.1 M2
M3 6.7 8.2 10.2 6.8 8.4 10.5 7.1 8.8 10.9 7.4 9.2 11.4 M3
M4 9.4 11.6 14.5 9.7 11.9 14.9 10.0 12.4 15.4 10.5 13.0 16.2 M4
H1 10.4 12.8 15.9 10.8 13.3 16.6 11.1 13.6 17.0 11.6 14.3 17.8 H1
H2 14.8 18.3 22.7 15.2 18.7 23.3 15.8 19.4 24.2 16.5 20.4 25.4 H2
H3 20.8 25.6 32.0 21.3 26.3 32.8 22.1 27.3 34.0 23.2 28.6 35.7 H3
H4 29.4 36.3 45.2 30.2 37.2 46.3 31.3 38.6 48.1 32.8 40.5 50.4 H4
www.maskinisten.net
With Powershift, km/h at max.---/nominal engine output speed of 1800 r/min on the model T151eh (with
low engine range ECO), reverse speeds are about 5 % faster.
(final drive 700)

r = 775 r = 825 r = 875 r = 925
LL1 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.6 0.8 1.0 0,7 0,8 1,0 LL1
LL2 0.8 1.0 1.2 0.8 1.0 1.3 0.9 1.1 1.4 0,9 1,2 1,4 LL2
LL3 1.1 1.4 1.7 1.2 1.4 1.8 1.2 1.5 1.9 1,3 1,6 2,0 LL3
LL4 1.6 1.9 2.4 1.7 2.0 2.5 1.8 2.2 2.7 1,9 2,3 2,9 LL4
M1 2.7 3.4 4.2 2.9 3.6 4.5 3.1 3.8 4.7 3,3 4,0 5,0 M1
M2 3.9 4.8 6.0 4.1 5.1 6.4 4.4 5.4 6.8 4,7 5,7 7,2 M2
M3 5.5 6.8 8.4 5.8 7.2 9.0 6.2 7.6 9.5 6,5 8,1 10,0 M3
M4 7.7 9.6 11.9 8.2 10.2 12.7 8.7 10.8 13.4 9,2 11,4 14,2 M4
H1 8.5 10.5 13.1 9.1 11.2 13.9 9.6 11.9 14.8 10,2 12,6 15,6 H1
H2 12.2 15.0 18.7 12.9 16.0 19.9 13.7 16.9 21.1 14,5 17,9 22,3 H2
H3 17.1 21.1 26.3 18.2 22.4 27.9 19.3 23.8 29.6 20,4 25,2 31,3 H3
H4 24.2 29.8 37.1 25.7 31.7 39.5 27.3 33.6 41.9 28,8 35,6 44,3 H4
With Powershift, km/h on the models T161c---T171c, T161h---T191h at nominal engine output speed of
2200 r/min, reverse speeds are about 5 % faster.
Without Powershift read the speeds from column II. (Crown wheel/pinion wheel is different as on PS
models).
(final drive 700)

r = 775 r = 825 r = 875 r = 925
LL1 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.6 0.7 0.9 0,6 0,8 1.0 LL1
LL2 0.8 0.9 1.2 0.8 1.0 1.3 0.9 1.1 1.3 0,9 1,1 1.4 LL2
LL3 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.4 1.8 1.2 1.5 1.9 1,3 1,6 2.0 LL3
LL4 1.5 1.9 2.3 1.6 2.0 2.5 1.7 2.1 2.6 1,8 2,2 2.8 LL4
M1 2.7 3.3 4.1 2.8 3.5 4.4 3.0 3.7 4.6 3,2 3,9 4.9 M1
M2 3.8 4.7 5.8 4.0 5.0 6.2 4.3 5.3 6.6 4,5 5,6 7.0 M2
M3 5.3 6.6 8.2 5.7 7.0 8.7 6.0 7.4 9.3 6,4 7,8 9.8 M3
M4 7.5 9.3 11.6 8.0 9.9 12.3 8.5 10.5 13.1 9,0 11,1 13.8 M4
H1 8.3 10.2 12.8 8.8 10.9 13.6 9.4 11.6 14.4 9,9 12,2 15.2 H1
H2 11.8 14.6 18.2 12.6 15.5 19.4 13.4 16.5 20.6 14,1 17,4 21.7 H2
H3 16.6 20.5 25.6 17.7 21.8 27.2 18.8 23.2 28.9 19,8 24,5 30.5 H3
H4 23.5 29.1 36.1 25.0 30.9 38.5 26.6 32.8 40.8 28,1 34,6 43.1 H4
www.maskinisten.net
The driving speeds of the tractor equipped with the electric maximum speed limiter (EcoSpeed), on the mo-
dels T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h, are according to the 50 km/h traffic tractor up to the limitation, the
maximum speed is limited to the 40 km/h
Traffic tractor 50 km/h (final drive 700)

r = 775 r = 825 r = 875 r = 925
LL1 0.7 0.8 1.0 0.7 0.9 1.1 0.8 0.9 1.2 0.8 1.0 1.2 LL1
LL2 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.0 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.3 1.7 1.1 1.4 1.8 LL2
LL3 1.3 1.7 2.1 1.4 1.8 2.2 1.5 1.9 2.3 1.6 2.0 2.5 LL3
LL4 1.9 2.3 2.9 2.0 2.5 3.1 2.1 2.7 3.3 2.3 2.8 3.5 LL4
M1 3.3 4.1 5.1 3.6 4.4 5.5 3.8 4.7 5.8 4.0 4.9 6.1 M1
M2 4.8 5.9 7.3 5.1 6.3 7.8 5.4 6.6 8.3 5.7 7.0 8.7 M2
M3 6.7 8.3 10.3 7.1 8.8 11.0 7.6 9.3 11.6 8.0 9.9 12.3 M3
M4 9.5 11.7 14.5 10.1 12.4 15.5 10.7 13.2 16.4 11.3 13.9 17.4 M4
H1 10.4 12.9 16.2 11.1 13.7 17.1 11.8 14.5 18.1 12.4 15.3 19.1 H1
H2 14.9 18.3 22.8 15.8 19.1 24.3 16.8 20.7 25.8 17.8 21.9 27.3 H2
H3 20.9 25.8 32.1 22.2 27.2 34.2 23.6 29.1 36.2 25.0 30.7 38.3 H3
H4 29.5 36.4 45.4 31.4 38.8 48.3 33.3 41.1 51.2 35.2 43.5 54.1 H4
J 7.5.2. 50 km/h
With Powershift on the model T131h, km/h at nominal engine output speed of 2200 r/min, reverse speeds
are about 5 % faster.

r = 775 r = 800 r = 825 r = 875
LL1 0.7 0.8 1.0 0.7 0.9 1.1 0.7 0.9 1.1 0.7 0.9 1.1 LL1
LL2 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.0 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.3 1.6 LL2
LL3 1.3 1.7 2.1 1.4 1.7 2.1 1.4 1.8 2.2 1.5 1.8 2.3 LL3
LL4 1.9 2.3 2.9 1.9 2.4 3.0 2.0 2.5 3.1 2.1 2.6 3.2 LL4
M1 3.3 4.1 5.1 3.5 4.3 5.3 3.5 4.4 5.4 3.7 4.6 5.7 M1
M2 4.7 5.8 7.3 4.9 6.0 7.5 5.0 6.2 7.8 5.3 6.5 8.1 M2
M3 6.7 8.2 10.2 6.8 8.4 10.5 7.1 8.8 10.9 7.4 9.2 11.4 M3
M4 9.4 11.6 14.5 9.7 11.9 14.9 10.0 12.4 15.4 10.5 13.0 16.2 M4
H1 10.4 12.8 15.9 10.8 13.3 16.6 11.1 13.6 17.0 11.6 14.3 17.8 H1
H2 14.8 18.3 22.7 15.2 18.7 23.3 15.8 19.4 24.2 16.5 20.4 25.4 H2
H3 20.8 25.6 32.0 21.3 26.3 32.8 22.1 27.3 34.0 23.2 28.6 35.7 H3
H4 29.4 36.3 45.2 30.2 37.2 46.3 31.3 38.6 48.1 32.8 40.5 50.4 H4
www.maskinisten.net
With Powershift on the models T161c---T171c, T151eh---T191h, km/h at nominal engine output speed of
2200 r/min, reverse speeds are about 5 % faster. The model T151eh is a traffic tractor when the standard
engine range (max. 2200 r/min) is chosen.

r = 775 r = 825 r = 875 r = 925
LL1 0.7 0.8 1.0 0.7 0.9 1.1 0.8 0.9 1.2 0.8 1.0 1.2 LL1
LL2 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.0 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.3 1.7 1.1 1.4 1.8 LL2
LL3 1.3 1.7 2.1 1.4 1.8 2.2 1.5 1.9 2.3 1.6 2.0 2.5 LL3
LL4 1.9 2.3 2.9 2.0 2.5 3.1 2.1 2.7 3.3 2.3 2.8 3.5 LL4
M1 3.3 4.1 5.1 3.6 4.4 5.5 3.8 4.7 5.8 4.0 4.9 6.1 M1
M2 4.8 5.9 7.3 5.1 6.3 7.8 5.4 6.6 8.3 5.7 7.0 8.7 M2
M3 6.7 8.3 10.3 7.1 8.8 11.0 7.6 9.3 11.6 8.0 9.9 12.3 M3
M4 9.5 11.7 14.5 10.1 12.4 15.5 10.7 13.2 16.4 11.3 13.9 17.4 M4
H1 10.4 12.9 16.2 11.1 13.7 17.1 11.8 14.5 18.1 12.4 15.3 19.1 H1
H2 14.9 18.3 22.8 15.8 19.1 24.3 16.8 20.7 25.8 17.8 21.9 27.3 H2
H3 20.9 25.8 32.1 22.2 27.2 34.2 23.6 29.1 36.2 25.0 30.7 38.3 H3
H4 29.5 36.4 45.4 31.4 38.8 48.3 33.3 41.1 51.2 35.2 43.5 54.1 H4
J 7.6. Power take---off

Equipped with electro---hydraulically controlled multi---disc clutch and mechanical gear clutch. The electronic control
unit engages the power take---off smoothly. On the rear wall outside the cab there is a remote connection which can be
used mechanically or electrically to stop the PTO.
T121c ---T171c,
PTO alternatives T151eh
T121h---171h
T191h
540 + 1000 x
540 + 1000 + PGS x
1000 EHD X X
1000 EHD + PGS X X
540+ 540 E (540+750) X
540 + 540 E + PGS X
1000 + 540E / (750+540)1) x X X
1000 + 540E + PGS / (750+540 +PGS)1) x X X
PGS = proportional ground speed, EHD = heavy duty
1) Model T151eh with low engine range “ECO”
PTO ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 r/min at engine speed 1874 r/min

1000 r/min at engine speed 2000 r/min
540E = 540 r/min at engine revs 1539 r/min
PTO---shaft, changeable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ø 1 3/8” (35 mm), 6---splines, standard
ø 1 3/8” (35 mm), 21---splines, extra equipment
ø 38 mm, 8---splines, extra equipment
www.maskinisten.net
Lower link end distance from PTO shaft (T---measure, mm)

The length of the lower PTO shaft
links (mm) 6---splines 21---splines 8---splines 20---splines 1---3/4 6---splines
940 740 740 755 722 742
T J01
J 7.6.1. Driving speeds at different rear PTO nominal revs (km/h)
The Speed Radius Index (rolling radius of the tyre) for different tyres, see the table on the page 158.
Models T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h (40 km/h, final drive 650)

Speed Radius Index r = 775
Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7 LL 1
LL 2 0.5 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.8 1.0 1.1 LL 2
LL 3 0.8 0.9 1.0 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5 LL 3
LL 4 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.3 1.6 1.7 1.6 2.0 2.1 LL 4
M1 1.9 2.3 2.4 2.3 2.8 3.0 2.9 3.5 3.7 M1
M2 2.7 3.2 3.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.1 5.0 5.3 M2
M3 3.7 4.6 4.9 4.6 5.6 6.0 5.8 7.0 7.5 M3
M4 5.3 6.5 6.9 6.5 8.0 8.5 8.1 9.9 10.6 M4
H1 5.8 7.1 7.6 7.2 8.8 9.4 9.0 10.9 11.7 H1
H2 8.3 10.1 10.8 10.3 12.5 13.3 12.8 15.6 16.6 H2
H3 11.7 14.2 15.2 14.4 17.6 18.7 18.0 21.9 23.3 H3
H4 16.5 20.1 21.5 20.4 24.8 26.5 25.4 30.9 33.0 H4
www.maskinisten.net

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0,4 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,7 0,8 LL 1
LL 2 0,6 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,8 0,9 0,8 1,0 1,1 LL 2
LL 3 0,8 0,9 1,0 1,0 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,5 1,6 LL 3
LL 4 1,1 1,3 1,4 1,4 1,6 1,8 1,7 2,1 2,2 LL 4
M1 1,9 2,4 2,5 2,4 2,9 3,1 3,0 3,6 3,9 M1
M2 2,8 3,4 3,6 4,1 4,1 4,1 4,2 5,2 5,5 M2
M3 3,9 4,7 5,0 4,8 5,8 6,2 5,9 7,2 7,7 M3
M4 5,5 6,7 7,1 6,7 8,2 8,8 8,4 10,2 10,9 M4
H1 6,0 7,3 7,8 7,4 9,0 9,7 9,3 11,3 12,0 H1
H2 8,6 10,5 11,2 10,6 12,9 13,8 13,2 16,1 17,2 H2
H3 12,1 14,7 15,7 14,9 18,1 19,3 18,5 22,6 24,1 H3
H4 17,1 20,8 22,2 21,0 25,6 27,4 26,2 31,9 34,1 H4

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 LL 1
LL 2 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.1 LL 2
LL 3 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.5 1.6 LL 3
LL 4 1.1 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.7 1.8 1.7 2.1 2.3 LL 4
M1 2.0 2.4 2.6 2.5 3.0 3.2 3.1 3.7 4.0 M1
M2 2.8 3.5 3.7 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.4 5.3 5.7 M2
M3 4.0 4.9 5.2 4.9 6.0 6.4 6.1 7.5 8.0 M3
M4 5.6 6.9 7.3 7.0 8.5 9.0 8.7 10.6 11.3 M4
H1 6.2 7.6 8.1 7.7 9.3 10.0 9.5 11.6 12.4 H1
H2 8.9 10.8 11.5 10.9 13.3 14.2 13.6 16.6 17.7 H2
H3 12.4 15.2 16.2 15.4 18.7 20.0 19.1 23.3 24.9 H3
H4 17.6 21.4 22.9 21.7 26.4 28.2 27.0 32.9 35.1 H4
www.maskinisten.net

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 LL 1
LL 2 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.7 0.9 1.0 0.9 1.1 1.2 LL 2
LL 3 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.3 1.4 1.3 1.6 1.7 LL 3
LL 4 1.2 1.5 1.6 1.5 1.8 1.9 1.8 2.2 2.4 LL 4
M1 2.1 2.6 2.7 2.6 3.2 3.4 3.2 4.0 4.2 M1
M2 3.0 3.7 3.9 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.6 5.6 6.0 M2
M3 4.2 5.2 5.5 5.2 6.4 6.8 6.5 7.9 8.4 M3
M4 6.0 7.3 7.8 7.4 9.0 9.6 9.2 11.2 11.9 M4
H1 6.6 8.0 8.6 8.1 9.9 10.6 10.1 12.3 13.2 H1
H2 9.4 11.4 12.2 11.6 14.1 15.1 14.4 17.6 18.8 H2
H3 13.2 16.1 17.2 16.3 19.8 21.2 20.3 24.7 26.4 H3
H4 18.7 22.7 24.3 23.0 28.0 29.9 28.7 34.9 37.3 H4

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 LL 1
LL 2 0.5 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.8 1.0 1.1 LL 2
LL 3 0.8 0.9 1.0 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5 LL 3
LL 4 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.3 1.6 1.7 1.6 2.0 2.1 LL 4
M1 1.9 2.3 2.4 2.3 2.8 3.0 2.9 3.5 3.7 M1
M2 2.7 3.2 3.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.1 5.0 5.3 M2
M3 3.7 4.5 4.9 4.6 5.6 6.0 5.7 7.0 7.5 M3
M4 5.3 6.4 6.9 6.5 7.9 8.5 8.1 9.9 10.5 M4
H1 5.8 7.1 7.6 7.2 8.7 9.3 8.9 10.9 11.6 H1
H2 8.3 10.1 10.8 10.2 12.4 13.3 12.7 15.5 16.5 H2
H3 11.6 14.2 15.1 14.4 17.5 18.7 17.9 21.8 23.2 H3
H4 16.5 20.0 21.4 20.3 24.7 26.4 25.3 30.8 32.9 H4
www.maskinisten.net

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0,4 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,7 0,8 LL 1
LL 2 0,6 0,7 0,7 0,7 0,9 0,9 0,9 1,1 1,1 LL 2
LL 3 0,8 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,2 1,3 1,2 1,5 1,6 LL 3
LL 4 1,1 1,4 1,5 1,4 1,7 1,8 1,7 2,1 2,2 LL 4
M1 2,0 2,4 2,6 2,4 3,0 3,2 3,0 3,7 4,0 M1
M2 2,8 3,4 3,7 4,2 4,2 4,2 4,3 5,3 5,6 M2
M3 4,0 4,8 5,2 4,9 6,0 6,4 6,1 7,4 7,9 M3
M4 5,6 6,8 7,3 6,9 8,4 9,0 8,6 10,5 11,2 M4
H1 6,2 7,5 8,0 7,6 9,3 9,9 9,5 11,6 12,3 H1
H2 8,8 10,7 11,5 10,9 13,2 14,1 13,5 16,5 17,6 H2
H3 12,4 15,1 16,1 15,3 18,6 19,8 19,0 23,2 24,7 H3
H4 17,5 21,3 22,8 21,6 26,3 28,1 26,9 32,8 35,0 H4

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 LL 1
LL 2 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.7 0.9 1.0 0.9 1.1 1.2 LL 2
LL 3 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.3 1.4 1.3 1.6 1.7 LL 3
LL 4 1.2 1.5 1.6 1.5 1.8 1.9 1.8 2.2 2.4 LL 4
M1 2.1 2.6 2.7 2.6 3.2 3.4 3.2 3.9 4.2 M1
M2 3.0 3.7 3.9 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.6 5.6 6.0 M2
M3 4.2 5.1 5.5 5.2 6.3 6.8 6.5 7.9 8.4 M3
M4 6.0 7.3 7.7 7.3 8.9 9.5 9.2 11.1 11.9 M4
H1 6.6 8.0 8.5 8.1 9.9 10.5 10.1 12.3 13.1 H1
H2 9.4 11.4 12.2 11.5 14.0 15.0 14.4 17.5 18.7 H2
H3 13.1 16.0 17.1 16.2 19.7 21.0 20.2 24.6 26.2 H3
H4 18.6 22.6 24.1 22.9 27.9 29.8 28.5 34.7 37.1 H4
www.maskinisten.net

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 LL 1
LL 2 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.3 LL 2
LL 3 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.7 1.8 LL 3
LL 4 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.9 2.0 1.9 2.4 2.5 LL 4
M1 2.2 2.7 2.9 2.7 3.3 3.6 3.4 4.2 4.4 M1
M2 3.2 3.9 4.1 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.9 5.9 6.3 M2
M3 4.5 5.4 5.8 5.5 6.7 7.1 6.8 8.3 8.9 M3
M4 6.3 7.7 8.2 7.8 9.5 10.1 9.7 11.8 12.6 M4
H1 6.9 8.4 9.0 8.6 10.4 11.1 10.7 13.0 13.8 H1
H2 9.9 12.0 12.9 12.2 14.9 15.8 15.2 18.5 19.7 H2
H3 13.9 16.9 18.1 17.1 20.9 22.3 21.3 26.0 27.7 H3
H4 19.6 23.9 25.5 24.2 29.5 31.5 30.2 36.7 39.2 H4
The driving speeds of the tractor equipped with the electric maximum speed limiter (EcoSpeed) are accor-
ding to the 50 km/h traffic tractor up to the limitation, the maximum speed is limited to the 40 km/h.
Model T131h (50 km/h, final drive 650)

Speed Radius Index r = 775 mm
Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.9 0.9 LL 1
LL 2 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.2 1.3 LL 2
LL 3 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.8 1.9 LL 3
LL 4 1.3 1.6 1.7 1.6 2.0 2.1 2.0 2.5 2.6 LL 4
M1 2.3 2.8 3.0 2.9 3.5 3.7 3.6 4.4 4.6 M1
M2 3.3 4.0 4.3 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.1 6.2 6.6 M2
M3 4.7 5.7 6.1 5.7 7.0 7.5 7.2 8.7 9.3 M3
M4 6.6 8.0 8.6 8.1 9.9 10.6 10.1 12.3 13.2 M4
H1 7.3 8.8 9.4 9.0 10.9 11.6 11.2 13.6 14.5 H1
H2 10.3 12.6 13.5 12.8 15.5 16.6 15.9 19.4 20.7 H2
H3 14.5 17.7 18.9 17.9 21.8 23.3 22.3 27.2 29.0 H3
H4 20.6 25.0 26.7 25.4 30.9 33.0 31.6 38.5 41.1 H4
www.maskinisten.net

Speed Radius Index r = 800 mm
Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1648 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.7 0.9 1.0 LL 1
LL 2 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 LL 2
LL 3 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.9 LL 3
LL 4 1.4 1.7 1.8 1.7 2.1 2.2 2.1 2.6 2.7 LL 4
M1 2.4 2.9 3.1 3.0 3.6 3.8 3.7 4.5 4.8 M1
M2 3.4 4.2 4.4 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.3 6.4 6.8 M2
M3 4.8 5.9 6.3 5.9 7.2 7.7 7.4 9.0 9.6 M3
M4 6.8 8.3 8.8 8.4 10.2 10.9 10.4 12.7 13.6 M4
H1 7.5 9.1 9.7 9.2 11.3 12.0 11.5 14.0 15.0 H1
H2 10.7 13.0 13.9 13.2 16.0 17.1 16.4 20.0 21.3 H2
H3 15.0 18.3 19.5 18.5 22.5 24.1 23.1 28.1 30.0 H3
H4 21.2 25.8 27.6 26.2 31.9 34.0 32.6 39.7 42.4 H4

Speed Radius Index r = 825 mm)
Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1648 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 LL 1
LL 2 0.7 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 LL 2
LL 3 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.5 1.6 1.5 1.9 2.0 LL 3
LL 4 1.4 1.7 1.8 1.7 2.1 2.3 2.2 2.6 2.8 LL 4
M1 2.5 3.0 3.2 3.1 3.7 4.0 3.8 4.6 4.9 M1
M2 3.5 4.3 4.6 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.4 6.6 7.0 M2
M3 5.0 6.0 6.4 6.1 7.5 8.0 7.6 9.3 9.9 M3
M4 7.0 8.5 9.1 8.6 10.5 11.2 10.8 13.1 14.0 M4
H1 7.7 9.4 10.0 9.5 11.6 12.4 11.9 14.5 15.4 H1
H2 11.0 13.4 14.3 13.6 16.5 17.7 16.9 20.6 22.0 H2
H3 15.5 18.9 20.1 19.1 23.2 24.8 23.8 29.0 30.9 H3
H4 21.9 26.7 28.4 27.0 32.9 35.1 33.6 40.9 43.7 H4
www.maskinisten.net

Speed Radius Index r = 875 mm)
Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1648 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.1 LL 1
LL 2 0.8 0.9 1.0 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5 LL 2
LL 3 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.3 1.6 1.7 1.6 2.0 2.1 LL 3
LL 4 1.5 1.8 1.9 1.8 2.2 2.4 2.3 2.8 3.0 LL 4
M1 2.6 3.2 3.4 3.2 3.9 4.2 4.0 4.9 5.2 M1
M2 3.7 4.6 4.9 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.8 7.0 7.5 M2
M3 5.3 6.4 6.8 6.5 7.9 8.4 8.1 9.8 10.5 M3
M4 7.4 9.1 9.7 9.2 11.2 11.9 11.4 13.9 14.9 M4
H1 8.2 10.0 10.6 10.1 12.3 13.1 12.6 15.3 16.4 H1
H2 11.7 14.2 15.2 14.4 17.5 18.7 18.0 21.9 23.3 H2
H3 16.4 20.0 21.3 20.2 24.7 26.3 25.2 30.7 32.8 H3
H4 23.2 28.3 30.2 28.6 34.9 37.2 35.7 43.4 46.3 H4
T151eh from 50 km/h table:

Alternatives 1000 and 540E.
Alternatives 750 and 540E with low engine range (Eco) engaged.
Models T161c---T171c, T151eh---T191h (50 km/h, final drive 700)

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.7 0.9 0.9 LL 1
LL 2 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.3 1.3 LL 2
LL 3 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.8 1.9 LL 3
LL 4 1.3 1.6 1.7 1.6 2.0 2.1 2.0 2.5 2.7 LL 4
M1 2.3 2.9 3.0 2.9 3.5 3.8 3.6 4.4 4.7 M1
M2 3.3 4.1 4.3 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.1 6.2 6.7 M2
M3 4.7 5.7 6.1 5.8 7.0 7.5 7.2 8.8 9.4 M3
M4 6.6 8.1 8.6 8.2 9.9 10.6 10.2 12.4 13.2 M4
H1 7.3 8.9 9.5 9.0 11.0 11.7 11.2 13.6 14.6 H1
H2 10.4 12.7 13.5 12.8 15.6 16.7 16.0 19.5 20.8 H2
H3 14.6 17.8 19.0 18.0 21.9 23.4 22.5 27.3 29.2 H3
H4 20.7 25.2 26.8 25.5 31.0 33.1 31.7 38.6 41.2 H4
www.maskinisten.net

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0,5 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,8 0,9 1,0 LL 1
LL 2 0,7 0,9 0,9 0,9 1,1 1,1 1,1 1,3 1,4 LL 2
LL 3 1,0 1,2 1,3 1,2 1,5 1,6 1,5 1,9 2,0 LL 3
LL 4 1,4 1,7 1,8 1,7 2,1 2,3 2,2 2,6 2,8 LL 4
M1 2,5 3,0 3,2 3,1 3,7 4,0 3,8 4,7 5,0 M1
M2 3,5 4,3 4,6 5,3 5,3 5,3 5,4 6,6 7,1 M2
M3 5,0 6,1 6,5 6,1 7,5 8,0 7,7 9,3 9,9 M3
M4 7,0 8,6 9,2 8,7 10,6 11,3 10,8 13,2 14,1 M4
H1 7,8 9,4 10,1 9,6 11,7 12,4 11,9 14,5 15,5 H1
H2 11,1 13,5 14,4 13,6 16,6 17,7 17,0 20,7 22,1 H2
H3 15,5 18,9 20,2 19,2 23,3 24,9 23,9 29,1 31,0 H3
H4 22,0 26,8 28,6 27,1 33,0 35,2 33,8 41,1 43,9 H4

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.5 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.8 1.0 1.1 LL 1
LL 2 0.8 0.9 1.0 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5 LL 2
LL 3 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.3 1.6 1.7 1.6 2.0 2.1 LL 3
LL 4 1.5 1.8 2.0 1.9 2.3 2.4 2.3 2.8 3.0 LL 4
M1 2.6 3.2 3.4 3.3 4.0 4.2 4.1 4.9 5.3 M1
M2 3.8 4.6 4.9 5.7 5.6 5.6 5.8 7.0 7.5 M2
M3 5.3 6.4 6.9 6.5 7.9 8.5 8.1 9.9 10.6 M3
M4 7.5 9.1 9.7 9.2 11.2 12.0 11.5 14.0 14.9 M4
H1 8.2 10.0 10.7 10.2 12.4 13.2 12.7 15.4 16.4 H1
H2 11.7 14.3 15.3 14.5 17.6 18.8 18.0 22.0 23.4 H2
H3 16.5 20.1 21.4 20.3 24.8 26.4 25.3 30.9 32.9 H3
H4 23.3 28.4 30.3 28.8 35.0 37.4 35.8 43.6 46.6 H4
www.maskinisten.net

Powers- Powers-
I II III
hift hift
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 r/min
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 r/min
LL 1 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.1 LL 1
LL 2 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.5 1.6 LL 2
LL 3 1.1 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.7 1.8 1.7 2.1 2.2 LL 3
LL 4 1.6 1.9 2.1 2.0 2.4 2.5 2.4 3.0 3.2 LL 4
M1 2.8 3.4 3.6 3.4 4.2 4.5 4.3 5.2 5.6 M1
M2 4.0 4.8 5.2 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.1 7.4 7.9 M2
M3 5.6 6.8 7.3 6.9 8.4 9.0 8.6 10.5 11.2 M3
M4 7.9 9.6 10.3 9.7 11.9 12.7 12.1 14.8 15.8 M4
H1 8.7 10.6 11.3 10.7 13.1 14.0 13.4 16.3 17.4 H1
H2 12.4 15.1 16.1 15.3 18.6 19.9 19.1 23.2 24.8 H2
H3 17.4 21.2 22.7 21.5 26.2 28.0 26.8 32.6 34.8 H3
H4 24.7 30.0 32.0 30.4 37.0 39.5 37.9 46.1 49.2 H4
J 7.6.2. Proportional ground speed

PTO axle revs/1 rear wheel rew
Model Gearbox
(Bevel pinion shaft/crown wheel)
T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h 40,81 (8/42)
36 + 36
T161c---T171c, T161h---T191h 41,03 (9/38)
T161c---T171c, T151eh---T191h (50 km/h) 36 + 36 40,79 (11/37)
J 7.6.3. Max. power take---off output at nominal revs of 1000 r/min (engine
speed 2000 r/min), kW (hp)
T121c, T121h T131c T131h T151eh T160c
88 (120) 95,3 (130)1) / 95
77 (105) 88 (120) 103 (140)
94 (128)2) 104,3 (142)1, 2) / 1022))
T161h T171c T171h T191h
114 (155)
103 (140) 110 (150)
110 (150) 130 (177)3)
110 (150)2) 117 (159)2)
130 (177)4)
1) At engine speed 1750 r/min.
2) Transportboost power area, when the main gear is H2 or higher.
3) Transportboost power area, when the main gear is H2 or higher and PS boost area, when quick---shift is 2 or 3. The
transport boost and PS boost power areas are equal.
4) Sigma power area, the largest output/torque area, when the power transferred through the power---take---off is large
enough. The symbol is illuminated in the instrument panel.
J 7.6.4.Front PTO (extra equipment) nominal revs 1000 r/min corresponding

engine revs (r/min)
T121c ---T171c, T121h---T191h
1920
www.maskinisten.net
J 7.7. Powered front axle

Agricultural Hi ---lock Hi ---lock1)
Axle type
axle Agricultural axle Industrial axle
Control, on/off Electro---hydraulically controlled multi---disc clutch
Ratio, differential 2,923 2,923 2,923
Ratio, planetary gears 6,000 6,000 6,000
Total ratio 17,54 17,54 17,54
T121c, T131c T121c, T131c T121c, T131c T161c ---T171c
Ratio,front axle/rear axle 40 km/h T121h, T131h T121h, T131h T121h, T131h T161h---T191h
1,323 1,323 1,323 1,33
T161c ---T171c
T131h T131h T131h
Ratio,front axle/rear axle 50 km/h T151eh---T191h
1,329 1,329 1,329
1,323
Differential lock, automatic differ-
yes --- ---
ential brake
Differential lock, electrohydraulic
controlled multidisc differential
--- yes yes
brake, simultaneously controlled
with rear axle differential lock
Steering arc, adjustable max. 55° max. 55° max. 55°
Axle turning 8° 8° 8°
Caster 0° 0° 0°
King pin inclination KPI 5° 5° 5°
Camber 1° 1° 1°
Toe---in, mm 0---2 0---2 0---2
Flange distance, mm 1800 1800 1900
1) Standard on models T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h.
J 8. Brake system
Operation:
--- T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hydraulically controlled multi---disc type brakes with wet discs,
two brake cylinders
--- T161h---T171h, T151eh---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hydraulically controlled multi---disc type brakes with wet discs,
boosted with low pressure hydraulic, two brake cylinders. No
separate brake fluid. Pressure accumulator to ensure the pres-
sure.
Number of brake discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 pcs/side
Disc diameter:
--- T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 mm
--- T161h---T171h, T151eh---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,5 mm
Brake friction area:
--- T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3690 cm2/org.
--- T161h---T171h, T151eh---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4272 cm2/org.
Parking brake
--- T121c---T171c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanically controlled, acting on the foot brakes
--- T121h---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving brakes engaging with spring, disengaging with
pressure cylinder
controlled with shuttle lever
electro---hydraulically controlled
when engine is not running, the parking brake is applied
Brake pedal free travel:
--- T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70---80 mm
--- T161c---T171c, T151eh---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35---45 mm
Brake valve for trailer brakes, extra equipment
www.maskinisten.net
J 9. Steering system
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydrostatic, oil supply from main pump via priority valve.
Adjustable, telescopic steering column. One double action
central steering cylinder
Max. working pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 MPa (140 bar)
Shock valve opening pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 MPa (200 bar)
Steering valve revolution volume:
--- Agricultural front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 cm3
--- Industrial front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 cm3
Steering speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Over 2 rounds/sec. at idling speed
Steering wheel rotates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 turn
Steering capacity ±30° with front axle load of 5000 kg on dry asphalt.
J 9.1. Turning circle radius

Tyres, with standard track width 16.9R28
Front axle with no suspension/with air suspension, minimum
5,6
turning circle radius, m
J 10. Hydraulic system

Hydraulic system is independent of engine and PTO clutches.
J 10.1. Electro---hydraulic linkage

Autocontrol D (ACD)
Operations Autocontrol B (ACB)
(alternative equipment)
With electro---hydraulic lower link draft sensing X X
Draft control mixing (position control/draft control mixing) X X
Lowering speed, independent of load X X
Transport height X X
Drive balance control X X
Slip control, extra equipment X
Separate pumps for working hydraulics and low pressure circuit hydraulics which have a common suction strainer. Both
circuits are equipped with a pressure filter.
J 10.2. Low pressure circuit

Pump capacity:
---T121c---T171c, T121h---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 l/min at 2200 r/min engine revs
---T151eh with low engine range (ECO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 l/min at 1800 r/min engine revs
Max. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,8 MPa (18 bar)
Supplies oil for following functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powershift
Powered front axle
Power take---off
Differential lock
Gearbox and PTO lubrication
Power shuttle
Parking brake
Boosted brake system, T161c---T171c, T151eh---T191h
www.maskinisten.net
J 10.3. Working hydraulic circuit

Pump capacity:
---T121c---T171c, T121h---T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 l/min at 2200 r/min engine revs with free low pressure
---T151eh with low engine range (ECO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 l/min at 1800 r/min engine revs with free low pressure
Max. pressure at 1500 r/min engine revs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,6 MPa (196 bar)
Shock valve opening pressure of pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 MPa (230 bar)
Shock valve opening pressure of working
hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 MPa (200 bar)
Supplies oil for following functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering (prioritized), hydraulic lift, auxiliary hydraulics, trailer
brake valve (extra equipment)
Available volume of oil for auxiliary hydraulics with different filling quantities:
min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 l
max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 l
J 10.3.1. Valves for auxiliary hydraulics

The tractor has as standard, rear:
--- two valves, controlled with separate levers
Both of these valves are adjustable for either single---acting or double---acting functions. First of these valves can be
locked mechanically in position while the other valve has a ”floating position”.
As extra equipment, rear:
--- two valves
--- an oil flow control valve
--- a trailer brake valve
As extra equipment, front:
--- two electrically controlled adjustable valves for the front loader use
--- pair of quick---action couplings
J 10.3.2. Counter pressures when using return connection for auxiliary

hydraulics
1/2 inch connection, flow 50 l/min, 10°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 9 bar
1/2 inch connection, flow 50 l/min, 50°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 4 bar
1 inch connection, flow 50 l/min, 10°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 5 bar
1 inch connection, flow 50 l/min, 50°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 3 bar
www.maskinisten.net
J 10.4. Hydraulic linkage

Three ---point linkage Lifting cylinder ø Lower link type The length of the lower links
T121c---T171c, Category 3, quick coupling
100 mm 940 mm
T121h---T191h grabs
J 10.4.1. Max lifting force on the whole lifting area, kN

with max. pressure 19,6 MPa (196 bar)
Tractor Lifting cylinder ø 100 mm
Lifting links at additional fastening points 77
Lifting links at rearmost fastening points 72
Lifting links at centre fastening points 67
Lifting links at forward fastening point 63
J 10.4.2. Lifting range at end of lower links, mm

The length of the lower links 940
Lifting links at additional fastening points 620
Lifting links at rearmost fastening points 710
Lifting links at centre fastening points 780
Lifting links at forward fastening point 900
J 11. Other specifications
J 11.1. Markings of gearbox and power take---off

The gearbox and power take off are marked with codes consisting of letters or numbers. These markings are designed
to assist changing of tyre sizes and also the ground speed drive to the PTO. When ordering spare parts it is useful to
provide these codes.
T 1ch J2
www.maskinisten.net
J 11.2. The capacity of the cab filter

Standard filter (dop test, 300 m3) . . . . . . . > Ø 0,2 μm 10 %, > Ø 1 μm 20 %, > Ø 5 μm 90 %, > Ø 8 μm 100 %
Active coal filter, cab (dop test, 200 m3) . > Ø 2 μm 100 %, from gases > 98 %
J 11.3. Stud dimensions and spacing for wheel discs
Tich J1
www.maskinisten.net
J 11.4. Code number table for calibrating

The code numbers of the table are used when calibrating Agroline instrument panel and transmission speed sensors
after changing tyres.
Code numbers with different tyre sizes and transmission types
T121c ---T131c, T121c ---T131c,

T131h T131h
Rear wheel T121h---T131h Rear wheel T121h---T131h
50 km/h 50 km/h
40 km/h 40 km/h
13.6---38/8 N 216 197 460 / 85R38 CON 190 174
13.6R38 GY 215 197 480/70R---38 198 181
13.6R---38/8 M 216 197 480/80R42 M 181 166
14.9R---38/8 M 209 191 520 / 70R34 CON 203 186
14.9R---38/8 N 209 191 520 / 70R34 GY 203 186
16.9---34/14 IND 214 196 520 / 70R34 TA 204 187
16.9---34/8 N 214 196 520 / 70R38 CON 193 177
16.9R34 GY 212 194 520 / 70R38 GY 191 174
16.9R---34/8 M 214 196 520 / 85R38 CON 181 166
16.9R---34/8 N 214 196 520/70R---34 203 186
16.9R---38/8 GY 201 184 520/70R---38 191 174
16.9R---38/8 M 201 184 520/85R42 169 155
16.9R---38/8 N 201 184 540 / 65R38 GY 200 183
18.4---34/14 FOR 207 190 540/65R---38/ M 202 185
18.4---34/14 IND 207 190 540 / 80R38 NO 181 166
18.4---34/8 N 207 190 580 / 70R38 GY 182 167
18.4---34/ IND 207 190 580 / 70R38 TA 183 168
18.4---38/14 FOR 195 178 580/70R---38 182 167
18.4---38/14 IND 195 178 600 / 65R34 NO 203 186
18.4---38/ FI 195 178 600 / 65R34 TA 204 187
18.4R---34/8 GY 207 190 600 / 65R38 CON 193 177
18.4R---34/8 M 207 190 600 / 65R38 GY 190 174
18.4R---34/8 N 207 190 600 / 65R38 IND 191 175
18.4R38 TA 191 175 600/65---34 FOR 204 187
18.4R---38/14 M 195 178 600/65R---34/ M 208 190
18.4R---38/8 GY 195 178 600/65R---38/ M 192 176
620/70R42 Kle-
18.4R---38/ M 195 178 172 158
berSuper9L
20.8R38 GY 183 167 620/75R---30/ M 199 182
650/60R38 M
20.8R38 IND 184 168 195 178
(XEOBIB)
20.8R38 TA 182 167 650/65R38 NO 184 168
20.8R---38/8 M 187 171 650/65R38 CON 185 169
20.8R---38/ M 187 171 650/65R38 FOR 183 167
20.8R42 173 159 650/65R38 GY 182 167
230/95R48 TA 196 180 650/65R38 M 184 168
270/95R48 TA 192 175 650/65R42 175 160
340 / 85R38 CON 214 196 650/75R38 173 159
420 / 85R38 CON 197 180 680/75R32 M 183 168
www.maskinisten.net
On the model T151eh code number must alvays be taken from the 50km/h table.
T161c ---T171c, T151eh---T191h TT161c ---T171c, T151eh---T191h

Rear wheel Rear wheel
40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8N 217 196 420 / 85R38CON 200 181
13.6R38GY 216 196 460 / 85R38CON 191 173
13.6R---38/8M 217 196 480/70R---38 199 181
14.9R---38/8M 210 190 480/80R42M 182 165
14.9R---38/8N 210 190 520 / 70R34CON 204 185
16.9---34/14IND 215 195 520 / 70R34GY 204 185
16.9---34/8N 215 195 520 / 70R34TA 205 186
16.9R34GY 214 194 520 / 70R38CON 194 176
16.9R---34/8M 215 195 520 / 70R38GY 192 174
16.9R---34/8N 215 195 520 / 85R38CON 182 165
16.9R---38/8GY 202 183 520/70R---34 205 185
16.9R---38/8M 202 183 520/70R---38 192 174
16.9R---38/8N 202 183 520/85R42 170 154
18.4---34/14FOR 208 189 540 / 65R38GY 201 182
18.4---34/14IND 208 189 540/65R---38/M 203 184
18.4---34/8N 208 189 580 / 70R38GY 183 166
18.4---34/IND 208 189 580 / 70R38TA 183 166
18.4---38/14FOR 196 177 580/70R---38 183 166
18.4---38/14IND 196 177 600 / 65R34NO 204 185
18.4---38/FI 196 177 600 / 65R34TA 205 186
18.4R---34/8GY 208 189 600 / 65R38CON 195 176
18.4R---34/8M 208 189 600 / 65R38GY 191 174
18.4R---34/8N 208 189 600 / 65R38IND 192 174
18.4R38TA 192 174 600/65---34FOR 205 186
18.4R---38/14M 196 177 600/65R---34/M 209 189
18.4R---38/8GY 196 177 600/65R---38/M 193 175
18.4R---38/M 196 177 620/75R---30/M 200 182
20.8R38GY 184 167 650 / 65R38NO 185 167
20.8R38IND 185 168 650/65R38CON 186 169
20.8R38TA 183 166 650/65R38FOR 184 166
20.8R---38/8M 188 170 650/65R38GY 183 166
20.8R---38/M 188 170 650/65R38M 185 168
20.8R42 174 158 650/65R42 175 159
230/95R48TA 201 182 650/75R38 174 158
270/95R48TA 195 177 680/75R32M 184 167
340 / 85R38CON 216 196
NOTE: If a tractor has tyres which are not listed in this table, the code number can passably be calculated as follows:
YxV
X=
vmax
X= correct code number
Y= actual code number in LCD---display unit of the Agroline instrument panel
V= tractor’s constructional speed (30, 40 or 50 km/h)
Vmax = tractor’s max driving speed which is shown by LCD---display unit in Agroline instrument panel
Example:
In LCD---display unit, the actual code number is 170. Tractor’s constructional speed is 40 km/h. LCD---display unit
shows the tractor max. driving speed of 39 km/h.
170 x 40
X= = 174
39
00
www.maskinisten.net
K. Extra and alternative equipment

Slip control system for Autocontrol D (ACD) linkage,
K 1. Extra equipment catalogue Th--- models
Tachograph
It is possible to get extra equipment as described in the PTO rear start/stop;Th--- models
following cataloque. Alternative equipment is mounted in Hands Free---ready
the factory and it can not easily be fitted afterwards. Infolight---kit:
---extra coupling kit for rear working lights
Compulsory equipment of the 50 km/h ---model: ---step light
---extra front working lights
Trailer brake valve or trailer air pressure brakes ---cab light delay
---trailer hitch light
and Cruise control
Implement signal connection
Finland
Monitor fastener
--- Front mudguards, wide rear mudguards Powershift extra push buttons for the range lever and
Germany shuttle lever on Tc models, as standard on Th models
HiShift (contact button) ; T121c---T131c
--- Suspension of front axle, trailer air pressure brakes and Instrument panel Proline
emergency brake without towing device or Scharmüller- Xenon working lights rear, 2 pcs, not with Forest cabin
frame and towing coupling A11 or A10 Auto---Guide equipment, order monitor fastener, order the
England front axle with turning angle sensor
--- Suspension of front axle and seat belt Auto---Guide, order monitor fastener, order the front axle
with turning angle sensor
Canada
--- Suspension of front axle, trailer air pressure brakes or
hydraulic brake valve, front mudguards and for Th---mo- K 1.3. Power transmission
dels emergency brake
Austria P.T.O. shaft 21---splines Ø 1 3/8” (35 mm)
P.T.O. shaft 20---splines Ø 1 3/4” (45 mm)
---wide mudguards
P.T.O. shaft 6---splines Ø 1 3/4” (45 mm)
Slovenia P.T.O. shaft 8---splines Ø 38 mm
--- Suspension of front axle and trailer air pressure brakes Front power take---off, only with front linkage
Hungary
--- Suspension of front axle K 1.4. Brake system
Brake valve mounting 1 : 13; T121c---T131c,T121h---T131h
K 1.1. Engine Brake valve mounting 1 : 11; T161c---T171c,
T151eh---T191h
Pressure air set, with compressor, tank and output of Pressure air brakes, the two pipe system, does not
compressed air include compressor
Vertical engine air intake Trailer air pressure brakes quick. coupling, matching with
the two pipe system (obligatory in UK, if used with the two
pipe system
K 1.2. Electrical system Pressure air brakes Duo---Matic, does not include
compressor
Rear window wiper and washer Pressure air brakes, one and two pipe system, does not
Radio equipment include compressor
Radio RDS/CD Emergency brake, Th models
Radio RDS/MP3, not USA and Australia
Socket for current DIN standard
Electric main circuit switch K 1.5. Steering system
Socket for cab heater 230V
Socket for cab heater+ cab heater 230V (not Denmark Front mudguards for all front tyres
and Canada) Flexible front mudguards, not with 30” front tyres
Rotating warning light, yellow Suspension of front axle, order also pressure air set
Rotating warning light, yellow, right Controlling systems, rear, T121h---T191h
Rotating warning light, blue Controlling systems, rear + the steering preventing valve
Double rotating warning light, yellow of the opposite driving direction; T121h---T191h. If the
Upper headlights, right hand traffic controlling systems rear and the cab suspension has
Upper headlights, left hand traffic been chosen, you have to choose stiffer springs for the
Upper headlights, Forest cabin cabin.
Control stop Accelerator pedal, rear
Reverse Buzzer
---185--- K. Extra and alternative equipment

www.maskinisten.net
K 1.6. Frame and wheel K 1.8. Working hydraulics

Front ballast weights 12 x 40 kg, not available with front
linkage and front loader K 1.8.1. Towing devices
Extra front ballast weights 490 kg, order also front ballast
weights Trailer hitch
Belly weights 10 x 40 kg, not available with front linkage Towing device frame, long (height 580 mm)
front loader and air suspension of front axle Towing coupling D (fixed bolt Ø 31,5 mm) to towing de-
Belly weights 250 kg, if with air suspension of front axle, vice frame
not available with front linkage and front loader Towing coupling A10 (fixed bolt Ø 31,5 mm) to towing
Solid ballast weight 650 kg (three---point attaching, device frame
available with front and rear linkage) Towing coupling A11 (fixed bolt Ø 38 mm) to towing
Solid ballast weight 1100 kg (three---point attaching, device frame
available with front and rear linkage), for front linkage only Towing coupling C (demountable pin Ø 28 mm, Italy)
with industrial front axle to towing device frame, not to towing device with fixed
Front wheel weights 28” (adjustable) 4 x 70 kg, not for 30” hitch (Piton Fix)
tyres Towing coupling D2 (demountable pin Ø 43 mm, Italy)
Rear wheel weights 34---42”, 4 pcs /80 kg each to towing device frame, not to towing device with fixed
(+mounting screws) hitch (Piton Fix)
Rear wheel weights 34---42”, 8 pcs /80 kg each Towing coupling D3 (demountable pin Ø 50 mm, Italy)
(+mounting screws) to towing device frame, not to towing device with fixed
Extra fuel tank 170 l, plastic hitch (Piton Fix)
Forest guarding for plastic tank
Fuel strainer Trailer hitch + towing device frame
Battery holder for forest use, incl. toolbox, not with front Trailer hitch + agricultural towing device
loader and front valves Trailer hitch + agricultural towing device, light, Sweden
Cover, tyre air valve Agricultural towing device without trailer hitch
Front loader ready Trailer hitch + agricultural towing device+ towing device
Front weights for front linkage frame
Trailer hitch + agricultural towing device, light + towing
device frame, Sweden
Trailer hitch Euro
K 1.7. Cab and shields Trailer hitch Euro + bracket kit, Th models
Trailer hitch Euro + towing device frame
Air---suspend driver’s seat Trailer hitch Euro + drawbar + bracket kit
Seat, mechanical spring suspension with horizontal Trailer hitch Euro + drawbar + bracket kit + towing de-
isolator vice frame
Air conditioning, manual Agricultural towing device without trailer hitch +towing
Air conditioning; automatic, not available with Forest cab, device frame
not for models T121c---T171c Towing device frame + fixed hitch (Piton Fix) + agricultu-
First aid kit ral towing device
Seat belt Agricultural towing device, light, without trailer hitch, North
Forest cab with roof hatch, normal glasses of cab, not with America
automatic air conditioning Agricultural towing device, light, without trailer hitch, North
Forest cab with roof hatch, polycarbonate glasses of cab, America+ towing device frame
not with automatic air conditioning Trailer hitch + agricultural towing device, North America
Shuttle lever on the right, Th models Trailer hitch + agricultural towing device, North America +
Dry powder extinguisher 2 kg towing device frame
Dry powder extinguisher 6 kg
Customers name sticker If with cab suspension and trailer hitch, order also trailer
Roof with roof hatch hitch hydraulic unlatching.
Floor fan
Fold---out platform, on cab left mudgard, not together with K 1.8.2. Extra valve blocks
Ålö Ergodrive to the left side
Ashtray
At the rear:
Cab suspension, T121h---T191h, order also air---suspend
driver’s seat. If with hydraulic trailer hitch, order also When ordering the extra valves you have to know if it is
hydraulic trailer unlatching. Not available with forest cab. third or fourth valve:
Stiffer springs for the cab suspension, T121h---T191h. 2/1 act: out---hold---in
As standard if with controlling systems rear and cab DBL act: out---hold---in---float, position lock, out, in, float,
suspension. As option if with cab suspension press. ret.
Mirrors, adjustment, electric, not with Forest cab DBL act: out---float---in, position lock, out, in
Armrest left/right. Order one or the other for the 2/1 act: out---hold---in---float, position lock, float
Tc/Th---models with front valves.
Autocomfort cabin suspension, Th---models Flow control valve
Active coal filter, incl. also extra air filter, paper, it Hydr. free ret. 1” quick. coupler
can be mounted with either, not available with Forest
cabin.
Extra air filter, paper, not available with Forest cabin
K. Extra and alternative equipment ---186---

www.maskinisten.net
At the front: K 1.8.5. Front linkage

Electric front loader valves, order also arm rest left/right
Front loader or front linkage possible Front linkage, front loader also with Ålö valve, but not with
Ålö Ergodrive or Ålö electrodrive, in frontloader use alter- front loader ready
native for front valves Front linkage, front loader not with Ålö valve and not with
Front quick couplings front loader ready. Order 2 front valves (incl. front quick
couplings) and arm rest left/right,
Front quick couplings, back---connected to front linkage,
K 1.8.3. Front loader ready use only with front linkage
Pressure accumulator for front linkage
Simultaneous connection of Valtra Quick front loader
hoses, must also have front valves
Quick couplings for front loader hoses, must also have K 1.8.6. Other equipment
front valves
Front loader, several models and different implements
Valtra Quick, quick coupling plate for coupling loader
K 1.8.4. Three point linkage, equipment hoses
Three point linkage, HD, incl. lift link ram and top link,
cannot be ordered other three point linkages and top links
Lower disengaging cable, complete, only with HD three
point linkage equipment,
Lift link ram, hydr.
Lift link ram, hydr. + direction control valve
Top link, ball---hitch (Cat 3/2)
Top link, hydr., (Cat 2)
Top link, hydr., ball---hitch (Cat 3 and 3/2)
Automatic check links
K 2. Extra and alternative equipment, operating and service

In this section provides the operating and service
instructions of the more complicated extra and alternative
equipment, which need special attention.
K 2.1. Engine
K 2.2. Electrical system

--- The opposite side to the symbol pressed down =
K 2.2.1.Control Stop safety stop off
The control stop automatically stops the engine if the
stop---light comes on (see on page 54).
Control stop prevents the possibility of more serious
damage to the engine or in the transmission. If control
stop stops the engine the fault must be found and
repaired before the engine can be started again.
NOTE: When starting the engine the control stop must be
disengaged.
IMPORTANT: The control stop is useful when the tractor
is driving an implement and there is no control from the
tractor. Do not use when driving.
T1ch K19
The cut off is useful when the tractor is driving an

implement (e.g. compressor, pump etc.) and there is no
control from the tractor.
It can be switched off and on with the ”Control Stop”
switch located in the right---hand side pillar.
--- The symbol side pressed down = safety stop on

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.2.2. Electric main circuit switch K 2.2.3. Implement signal connection

The implement signal connection is in accordance with
ISO 11786 standard. It is situated in the cab on the lower
part of the right hand side pillar. The signal light for its
operation has been introduced on page 85.
An implement can be connected into the connector, which
can use the following informations from the tractor:
T1ch K20
1 True ground speed (radar), 130 pulses/m

6080---182,2 2 Theoretic ground speed (wheel speed), 130 pulses/m
3 Rear PTO speed, 6 pulses/round
4 In work (< 1,5 V) / out of work (> 6,3 V)
The symbol side pressed down = electric main circuit 5 Rear linkage position (0---10 V)
switch is on.When pressing down the symbol side, push 6 Power supply max. 5 A
down locking device (A) to the midpoint of the switch. 7 Ground
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down = elec-
tric main circuit is off. When pressing down the opposite
side, push down locking device (A) to the midpoint of the
switch. With this operation the switch will be locked and
the accidental use is not possible.
When the main circuit is switched off, all the other circuits
are dead, except for the ones to the radio and the clock.
The main circuit is not allowed to be switched off, before
the ignition key is turned into the STOP position.
When the engine is switched off/stopped, the indicator
light of the main current switch flashes to sign, that the
main current has to be switched off.
WARNING:Do not switch the main current
off when driving because the wheels will
lock causing the tractor to come to a abrupt
halt.
The fuse of the relay in the main circuit switch is situated
on the right side of the engine beside the main circuit
switch.

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.3. Power transmission
K 2.3.1. Front power take---off

1. Instructions for operating
T K5
IMPORTANT: The front PTO shaft nominal rotating speed

is 1000 r/min and the rotating direction is to the left viewed
from front. Check that the implement is compatible before
2 connecting.
The front PTO shaft nominal revs of 1000 r/min
corresponds to the engine revs as follows:
--- on models T121c---T171c, T121h---T191h, 1920 r/min
1
IMPORTANT: When using implements with front PTO use
the torque limiting clutch as follows (the maximum allowed
T1ch K23 torque moment of the engine crank axle is 420 Nm):
--- T121c ---T161c, T121h---T161h; 820 Nm
A front PTO is only available with front linkage. The front PTO is equipped with a pump inside the housing
and oil cooler (3) to prevent overheating. The cooling
When using the front PTO read the instructions for the rear
system is equipped with a relief valve inside the housing
PTO.
for cold conditions.
The front PTO switch (1) is situated on the right side
panel. When the tractor is fitted with a front PTO, the 3. Maintenance
switch for the front PTO (1) is mounted as the foremost
and the rear PTO switch (2) as the rearmost.
3.1. General
The front PTO switch is a two position rocker switch:
1. Tighten the screws of PTO after the first 15---25 running
--- The symbol side pressed down: front PTO is on. hours. Regularly check the torque of the fixing bolts
--- The opposite side to the symbol pressed down: front and hydraulic system. Contact an authorized
PTO is off. workshop, if any leaks occur.
2. When required the oil cooler (3) has to be cleaned so
2. Construction that the front PTO will not overheat.
3.2. Changing belt

3
3
2
90 Nm
2 T K4
1 T K56
The front PTO shaft (2) has a diameter of 35 mm with
6---splines.
On tractors with front PTO the flange screws (2) in front of
the elastic rubber coupling (1) have to be opened and the

www.maskinisten.net
spacing ring (3) removed. There will then be enough 3.3.2. Check rubber coupling
space to change the belts.
3.3. Maintenance every 500 hours

140 Nm 2
3.3.1. Change oil of the front power take---off
housing and wash oil filter
4
7
6
2 1
5 T K55
4
3
--- Check the rubber coupling (1) for tears. When required
the rubber coupling has to be changed. It is
recommended that this is carried out by an authorized
workshop.
--- If you perform this task yourself, note when mounting
the rubber clutch that the pieces (2) are straight (see
T K7 picture).
--- Drain oil by opening the plug (1) at the rear part of the 4. Specifications
housing.
--- operating through the switch on the right panel
--- Release the filter (2) by loosening the lock ring (3) and
--- 6---splines shaft, Ø 35 mm
the end plate (4).
--- Electro---hydraulically controlled, wet multi---disc cou-
--- Clean the strainer with diesel and dry with pressurised
pling
air.
--- precontrolled soft starting
--- Replace the filter on the contrary way. Check that the
--- rotating direction to the left viewed from front
O---ring (5) fits the groove of the rear part.
--- Fill up the housing with Shell Donax TX oil (for the
present only oil, using any other type of oil may cause
problems) (2.2 liters) to the level of hole (6). Breather (7)
can be loosened for bleeding. Check that the breather
is not blocked. When filling the tractor has to be level.
Use the front PTO a moment and check oil.
The front PTO nominal revs and corresponding driving speeds with different gears
The nominal revs of 1000 r/min at Driving speed corresponding to the nominal speed of
Model
engine speed the rear PTO (1000 r/min), see the tables page 169
T121c---T171c,
1920 r/min 4% smaller
T121h---T191h

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.4. Brake system

From the air pressure system it is possible to get pressure
K 2.4.1. Trailer air pressure brakes for external purposes, e.g. for tyre filling (8 bar) from quick
coupling (4) on the tractor rear part.
1
2
3
4
6
T1LS K12
On models T121c---T131c and T121h---T131h the brake

system uses the same brake fluid as in the tractor drive
brakes. T1LS K14
On models T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h the brake

system uses the same transmission/hydraulic oil as in the Compressed air can also be obtained from coupling (6)
tractor drive brakes. which is situated on the air reservoir, by turning the
coupling as far as it will go. Through this coupling the
On the two hose system the trailer is connected to two
system can be filled, when needed, by outside
different couplings, which have been marked as follows:
compressed air e.g. when the compressor of the tractor is
--- Container line (1) --- red cover
broken. By doing this the coupling cannot be turned to
--- Brake line (2)--- yellow cover
bottom.
On one hose systems the trailer is connected to the
coupling with a black cover (3 (brake line) (used in some When the couplings of the trailer are not in use, keep the
marketing areas). covers on them.
4
8
T1LS K13
T1LS K15
The Duo---Matic system has only one coupling (5), which

can be connected. When the ambient temperature is colder than +5°C, the
antifreeze container (7) must be filled with antifreeze
WARNING: When using the trailer brakes compound including lubricant. The liquid streaming
the brake pedals must always be locked valve (8) has to be in the open position (1 aligned with the
together when driving on the road. When arrow).
pressing one brake pedal, the brake action The container and streaming valve are situated on the left
of the trailer is smaller. drive gear, behind the tractor.
The trailer brakes operate also when using the parking
brake.

www.maskinisten.net
2.3. Service weekly or after every 50

operating hours
Check the fixing bolts of the compressor. Check and
adjust the compressor belt tension by adjusting the
adjusting wheel.
A 2.4. Service after every 500 operating hours
Grease the rubber surfaces of the trailer quick couplings

with Valtra Calsium LF Grease.
Check the integrity of the system. The system has to be
air tight, so that after stopping the engine the pressure
does not decrease more than 0,15 bar during 10
minutes (2%). When needed repair the leaks.
N K88
2.5. Service after every 2000 operating hours
WARNING: There must be maximum
pressure in the air pressure system, about Changing and bleeding of the brake fluid
7---8 bar (pressure gauge (A) of the system
On models T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h the blee-
is located in the instrument panel), before
ding of the brake system is the same as bleeding the drive
driving a tractor which has a trailer with air
brakes, instructions see page 151.
brakes.
On models T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h
2. Service
2.1. Common points
The pressure container can not be welded and drilled.

The pressure regulator is provided with an inbuilt pressure
regulator, which operates, if the pressure rises to 12---14
bar. This can be caused by a broken pressure regulator
valve, frozen or blocked filter.
To prevent the jaming of the anti freeze device flow
valve (8), use antifreeze fluid for a while at least once per a
11
month in warm season.
10
2.2. Service daily
T1ch K29
When changing the tractor brake fluid, to drain the hoses,

open the bleed nipples (11) of the control valve (10). The
control valve (10) is situated on the right side under the
cab on the air reservoir.
The control valve is situated lower than the tractor brake
cylinders. Therefore it has to be bled before bleeding the
tractor brake cylinders. Bleeding is done in the same way
9
T1LS K16 from the bleed nipples (11) as bleeding the tractor brake
cylinders, pressing the pedals, see page 151.
The water has to be drained daily from the press air
system by pressing and pulling the spindle (9) of the
water draining valve at the bottom of the container.

www.maskinisten.net
Models T121c---T131c and T121h---T131h

K 2.4.2. Fluid brake valve of the trailer
1. Instructions for operating 2
1
T1ch K30
When changing the tractor brake fluid, to drain the hoses

1 open also the bleed nipple (2) of the trailer brake valve.
T1LS K17
The brake valve (3) is situated behind on the right side of
the gearbox.
The trailer brakes are connected to the quick---action Bleeding the trailer brake valve is done in the same way
coupling (1) at the rear part of the tractor. from the bleeding nipple (2) as bleeding the brake
WARNING: Always when driving on the road cylinders, the pedals must be locked together, see
or when using the trailer brakes the brake page 151.
pedals must be locked together (the trailer
brakes do not operate if only one of the 3. Specifications
brake pedals is pressed).
--- Function with the pressure of the tractor hydraulics,
WARNING: When using the trailer brakes controlled by the braking valve
the other hydraulic valves must not be used --- The brake valve control pressure from the both side
because the trailer maximum braking power brake pedal circuits.
may reduce. --- Trailer brake connection to the tractor with quick---action
coupling
WARNING: The trailer brakes do not work --- On models T121c---T131c and T121h---T131h the brake
when using the parking brake.
system uses the same brake fluid as in the tractor drive
brakes.
--- On models T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h the bra-
WARNING: When the engine is not running, ke system uses the same transmission/hydraulic oil as
the trailer brakes do not work. in the tractor drive brakes.
2. Service
2.1. Service after every 2000 operating hours
Changing and bleeding of the brake fluid

On models T161c---T171c and T151eh---T191h the blee-
ding of the brake system is the same as bleeding the drive
brakes, instructions see page 151.

www.maskinisten.net
can be achieved by pulling the emergency brake lever

K 2.4.3. Emergency brake up on the left side of the cab (rear wheels brake).
The emergency brake lever does not stay applied, as it
Th models does not have a lock position.
N K18
If the brakes fail while driving, braking under control
K 2.5. Steering system
K 2.5.1. Reverse drive controls

Th models
10
9 5
8
7
1
3
4
T1ch K22
The reverse drive controls include the following controls: 5. Shuttle--- and parking brake lever
1. Steering wheel 6. Preprogramming push button of Powershift for power
2. Clutch pedal shuttle
3. Brake pedal 7. Lever for adjusting steering wheel space
4. Accelerator pedal 8. Switch for Powershift, (3---steps)

www.maskinisten.net
9. Engine STOP (red indicator light, does not flash). If the front shuttle lever is in the F position, the parking
If the light comes on, the tractor and the engine brake can not be engaged with the other lever.
must be stopped immediately. Driving can only
WARNING: Driving on the road with the
continue in an emergency, e.g. the tractor can be
reverse drive controls is forbidden. The
moved to the roadside.
max. driving speed is 10 km/h using the
10. Display panel for power shuttle, PS etc.
reverse drive controls.
WARNING: Using the rear controls: Before
turning the seat to the backwards position Reverse drive control does not operate when driving
the front shuttle lever has always to be forwards if the tractor has reverse drive lockout. If the
moved to the parking brake position lockout does not operate, check the fuse.
(position P). After this the seat can be Brake pedal for reverse drive control uses also trailer bra-
turned and the rear controls can be kes (extra equipment).
activated using the rear shuttle lever by
moving the parking brake on and off. If the Adjustment of the brakes of the reverse drive tractor is
parking brake lever was already in the on carried out when adjusting the driving brakes.
position it must be released. Bleeding instructions for the brakes of the reverse drive
control, see “Bleeding brake system”, models
Using the front controls: Before turning the seat to the T121h---T131h on page 151 and models T151eh---T191h
forwards position the rear shuttle lever has always to be on page 150.
moved to the parking brake position (position P). After
this the seat can be turned and the front controls can be
activated using the front shuttle lever by moving the
parking brake on and off. If the parking brake lever was
already in the on position it must be released.
K 2.5.2. Air suspension of front axle
1. General
3
2
T K14
Driving a tractor with air suspension on the front axle is The driver can observe the air pressure in the suspension
comfortable over uneven ground. When driving at high system on gauge (1). The suspension system has two air
speed the control is improved by reducing the pitching of suspension bellows (2) and two shock absorbers (3). If
the machine. Stresses are reduced to the driver, tractor the system also has air brakes the charging valve (4)
and implements. The automatic lever control keeps the ensures the air brakes get enough compressed air.
axle in the same position within the tractor frame
independently of axle load.

www.maskinisten.net
2. Instructions for operating --- Front axle weight of tractor with air suspension is 350 kg
heavier than corresponding model without air
suspension.
--- Permissible axle loading is the same as with the front
axle without suspension.
--- Air suspension bellow 8”, pressure extreme values
2---14 bar
--- Suspension travel by front axle 51 mm
8 --- Front tyres turning angles and axle turning angles are the
same as without front suspension.
--- Automatic level control independent of front axle load.
--- 2 pcs hydraulic shock absorber.
K 2.5.3. Flexible front mudguards

6
2
5
3
6 2
8 T K15 1
When the air suspension is engaged the lock pins (5) N K91
have to be in their brackets.
When you want to disengage the air suspension, the lock
pins (5) have to be placed in lock holes (6). Make sure 1. General
that the ring pins of the lock pins are locked in their
places. If the lock holes do not line up when installing the On some tractor models the flexible front mudguards are
lock pins loosen the locking wheel (7) and adjust the fitted as standard with a factory mounted front loader. It is
suspension height a little to line up the holes. also possible to fit them afterwards to other models.
When turning the wheels the mudguards turn less than
NOTE: After the adjustment lock the wheel (7) into the wheels and should be flexible incase they come into con-
middle point. Then there is enough suspension travel in tact with something.
both directions when the suspension is operating.
The locking is used for maintenance. In addition 2. Adjustment
ploughing with a fully mounted (three point) heavy plough
when the front axle load is low, the front suspension may As factory fitted the front mudguards adjustments are
interfere with the draft control sensitivity operation. correct. When tyres are fitted check with the max
oscillation and turning angles that the mudguards do not
make contact with the side panel etc.
3. Maintenance
If necessary, limit the turning of the mudgards by adjus-
ting the stoppers (1).
3.1. General
IMPORTANT: Check, that the limiter screw end does not-
For maintenance of the air pressure system see touch the cover of tyre air valve when turning the wheels
information regarding air brakes. to the maximum position.
Frequently check that all screws and nuts are tight.
The height of the mudguards can be adjusted by
3.2. Maintenance every 50 hours changing the fixing screws (2) of the shafts to other holes.
In addition the mudguards can be inclined forward/back-
Grease the nipples of the front axle mounting (8) 2 pcs ward in their fixing holes.
with Valtra Grease Universal. If the front axle is equipped
with a transfer set of nipples (extra equipment) the nipples 3. Maintenance
are on the left side of the tractor.
To aid the maintenance the mudguards can be turned
4. Specifications from the rear edge by pulling sideward.
Grease regularly the turning mechanism (3) with Valtra
--- Extra equipment with all front axle types.

www.maskinisten.net
Calsium LF grease.
K 2.6. Cab and shields
K 2.6.1. Air suspension---driver’s seat
12 11 10
13
1 1A
2
9
3
8
4
5 6 7
N K74
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the seat --- Locking is achieved by moving lever (A) to right and
while driving, increased risk of an accident. upward to lock it in the uppermost position (you will
hear a clicking sound). Using this control the seat can
be turned 180˚.
The seat can be adjusted as follows: Position 0
--- The lock for adjustment for forwards/rearwards is un-
Lock for adjustment for
K 2.6.1.1. locked. In the rearmost positions the seat touches the
cab side trim when turning the seat.
forwards/rearwards (1)
With the lock for adjustment for forwards/rearwards it is K 2.6.1.2. Forward/rearward adjusting (2)
possible to divide the forwards/rearwards adjustment
area (2) into two parts. Lift up the lever and push the seat forwards or rearwards.
Position 1

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.6.1.3. Lock for turning the seat (3) K 2.6.1.7. Seat belt anchor point (7)
Release the lock by pulling the control upwards. The seat The anchor points for the seat belt are located on the seat.
can now be turned 180° clockwise.
The seat has also the following set positions; locked at K 2.6.1.8. Seat back inclination (8)
10˚, “floating” 20---30˚, locked at 59˚ and 74˚ (e.g. can
be used when ploughing). Pull this lever up then set the back rest to the desired
position.
NOTE: If the seat has been adjusted further back than the
lock limits, the seat can touch the cab side trim when
turning. K 2.6.1.9. Arm rest adjustment (9)
K 2.6.1.4. Lock for longitudinal Adjust the arm rest by removing the cover and changing
the arm rest place in the mounting slot.
suspension (4)
When the lever is set as in the drawing, the longitudinal K 2.6.1.10. Lumber support
suspension is on. By turning the lever to the front position adjustment (10)
(clockwise 180˚) the longitudinal suspension is locked.
By turning the knob clockwise or counter clockwise the
K 2.6.1.5.Suspension and vertical lumber support can be adjusted in two directions at same
time (height and depth) to the desired position.
adjustment (of seat) (5)
K 2.6.1.11. Switch for seat heating (11)
Suspension according to the driver weight
The switch for heating the seat is placed on the left side of
Pull the control lever. When the compressor starts release
the seat backrest.
the lever. The compressor runs until the suspension has
adjusted it’s self to the weight of the driver. If the driver is
lighter than the previous driver, the compressor runs mo- K 2.6.1.12. Place for books (12)
mentary and the excess pressure is released. The seat
then lowers. Behind the seat back is a place for books (A4).
The suspension setting is set even if the tractor is
switched off. Head support height
K 2.6.1.13.
The seat suspension travel is 100 mm (± 50 mm) regard- adjustment and removing (13)
less of vertical starting position. The suspension area is
limited to 100 mm for safety reasons. Adjust the head support to the desired height by lifting or
lowering it. The head support can also be removed if
Vertical adjustment of seat 80 mm required by pulling it upwards.
The seat has a step---less vertical adjustment of 80 mm

(±40 mm from seat middle point). The upward adjustment
is achieved by pulling the vertical adjustment lever until
the required height is reached (the compressor runs con-
tinuously). When the lever is released the compressor
stops and the seat stays at that height. If the seat is set
too high and the upward movement is less than 50 mm
=> the seat lowers to the highest possible position down-
wards (automatically).
By pressing the same lever downwards the seat lowers. If
the seat is adjusted down to below the lowest limit (the 50
mm downward suspension is not possible any more), the
seat will automatically raise to the lowest limit.
Sometimes it may happen, that if the driver has sat really
carefully on the seat the previous vertical position is in the
memory and the seat raises up to that previous position.
When the seat is locked at a new vertical level there is
small “click” sound.
K 2.6.1.6. Stiffness of suspension (6)

When the lever is set as in the drawing, the suspension is
as at the firmest. By turning the lever to the front position
(clockwise 180˚), the suspension is as softest.

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.6.2. Air conditioning

Air conditioning operation which does not cause environmental hazard.
Air conditioning is extra equipment, it is available either NOTE: When the air conditioning system is in use the cab
manual or automatic (Th models). On new air conditioning doors and windows must be closed.
systems freon has been replaced with refrigerant (R134a) Ensure the cab air filter is clean.
K 2.6.2.1. Manual air conditioning
3 2 1
N K7
1. Instructions for operating CAUTION: Do not attempt to disassemble

any part of the air conditioning system.
1. First turn the knob (1) towards cold. When the engine is
running, turn the air conditioning temperature
regulating knob (2) towards cold (fully clockwise). Special safety equipment and tools are required to repair
2 Move the fan switch (3) to position 4. the air conditioning system. Contact your dealer if
3. When the desired cab temperature has been reached, problems occur.
adjust the air conditioning temperature regulating
knob (2) to maintain a comfortable temperature. NOTE: Make sure that the compressor starts (at low
4. Reduce the fan (3) speed to obtain a comfortable temperatures the thermostat prevents the compressor
temperature. from starting).
T K18
NOTE: The efficiency of the air conditioning can be

increased by keeping the recirculation grille (4) open.
3
2. Maintenance
IMPORTANT: If the air conditioning system has not been 1 T K59

used for some time, free the compressor before starting
the engine, by rotating the pulley nut with a wrench.
The condenser (1) must be cleaned at regular intervals to
To prevent seizing of the compressor, use the air remove dust, insects and other particles.
conditioning for a few minutes at least once a month with Check that there are no leaks in condenser (1),
the engine stop control in the off position. Push the engine evaporator (2) or hoses and couplings. Check also the
stop control knob in and allow the engine to idle for a few cleanness of the outlet pipe of the condensation pipe (3).
minutes.

www.maskinisten.net
WARNING: Avoid contact with the No bubbles appear at all. MAYBE EXCESSIVE
refrigerant. If refrigerant enters the eyes a REFRIGERANT. The high---pressure side (2) will
doctor should be contacted without delay. be abnormally hot. Contact an authorized
Welding work should not be carried out workshop.
near to the air conditioning system as
The fluid inside is almost transparent. A few
poisonous gas may be released. The
bubbles may appear as the engine speeds up
maximum temperature permitted in the
and down. SUFFICIENT REFRIGERANT. The
vicinity of the refrigerant pipes is 80˚C.
high---pressure side (2) will be hot and the
If the air conditioning is not running properly, have an low---pressure side (3) cold.
authorized workshop check the system.
A few bubbles appear intermittently, at intervals of
1 to 2 seconds. INSUFFICIENT REFRIGERANT.
A The high---pressure side (2) will be warm, and the
low---pressure side (3) fairly cold. Contact an
B authorized workshop.
Bubbles flow continuously, and when the
refrigerant is almost exhausted a ”mist” like flow
will be seen, with no bubbles visible. VERY
LITTLE REFRIGERANT. There will be almost no
difference in temperature between the
high---pressure side (2) and the low---pressure
side (3) near the compressor. Contact an
authorized workshop.
NOTE: Refrigerant must be colourless. If it is brown or
yellow, it must be changed. Contact an authorized
1 workshop.
The colour of the moisture eliminator/indicator (B) has to
be blue or green depending on the manufacturer. If it is
2 pink or grey replace the receiver. Contact an authorized
3 workshop.
T1LS K4
On the receiver 1 of the air conditioning system there is a

sight glass A and moisture eliminator/indicator B.
Sight glass (A) to check the equipment: Run the engine at
1500 rpm, air conditioner at max. cooling for a few minu-
tes. Let the engine run for a few minutes and check the
sight glass.

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.6.2.2. Automatic air conditioning

Not on models T121c---T171c.
T1ch K17
1. General the Led backlights in the instrument panel, the fan speed
selector switch and the adjusting switches of the tempera-
ture in daytime are white and in the dark are green. In the
The automatic control of the cabin inside temperature is selector switch of the temperature there is always blue/red
carried out with the control unit (1). The temperature blo- light.
wing through the nozzles, the fan power, the air circulation
system and the compressor are controlled by the unit. The Led light is only on, when the fuction is active. The
functions of the compressor--- and max. defrosting have
There is a separate control unit with an instrument panel. also an amber LED light in the switches.
In the instrument panel there are two selector switches The operating temperature ---40˚C +80˚ C (LCD display
(fan und temperature), three push buttons (compressor,
decelerates ---30˚ C and degrades---40˚ C ).
defrosting, air circulation), two LED lights (compressor,
defrosting) and display. The outside measure DIN (53 x 182 x 120 mm including
cables/connectors clearance).
The lighting colour of the symbols of the push buttons of
2. Air conditioning operation
1 2 3
4 5 6
T1ch K1
2.1. Air conditioning panel 2.2. Air conditioning control
1 Fan control (manual/automatic)

2 Liquid crystal display (LCD) Introduction when the battery has been discon-
3 Temperature adjustment knob nected
4 A/C (air conditioning system) on/off, also the more eco-
nomical ECO function --- The automatic adjustments are selected by pressing
5 Defroster switch 1 , don’t press the switch A/C (4).
6 Selection for the recirculation of the fresh air/indoor air
Restart
After restart of the ignition current the air conditioning au-
tomatically defaults to the last selected adjustment, except
the defrost (5).

www.maskinisten.net
Temporary start mode The changes of the fan speed power take place gradually.
Starting the tractor when it is very cold (in winter) the air
2.2.3. Manual position
conditioning is in start mode, until the temperature of the
engine condenser water reaches the preset value.
If the fan speed needs to be changed from the default
During the start mode: value of the automatic position, it is done by turning the
--- min. fan speed fan control knob (1) manually to the desired point.
--- the fresh air intake is on The fan speed will change immediately.
The starting mode will be ended, when the temperature of
the engine condenser water reaches the preset value orw- 2.2.4. OFF--- position
hen :
--- defrosting connected (off)
--- LO---mode connected By turning the fan control knob (1) into the OFF ---position
--- for the fan --- manual selected different speed (B), air conditioning is not activated.
so:
Priority of functions
--- the warm water valve is fully closed
The function with higher priority controls the operati-
--- the fan is not activated
ons according to the following table:
--- the recirculation of the indoor air is on
DEFROSTING high priority
--- the compressor is not activated
OFF function .
COMPRESSOR, RECIRCULA- . The tractor symbol on the LCD shows the recircula-
TION, FAN SPEED . tion of the indoor air activated.
.
If the defrosting (5) is activated, it will cancel the former
HI---setting mode, LO---setting low priority functions with the higher priority.
mode
If the OFF---mode, for instance has been selectedwith the 2.2.5. Liquid crystal display (2)
fan switch (1) the defrosting function (4) cancels the
OFF--- mode and activates the defrosting functions. Shown on the liquid crystal display (LCD) is:
a) the requested temperature with a variation of 0,5˚C (1
2.2.1. Fan control (1) ˚F) within a range of 20 to 24˚C (68 --- 76˚F) and a variati-
on of 1˚C or 2˚F beyond such range.
˚C LO 18 19 20 20.5 21 21.5 22
1 2
˚F LO 64 66 68 69 70 71 72
22.5 23 23.5 24 25 26 27 28 HI
A
73 74 75 76 78 80 82 84 HI
b) When the recirculation of the indoor air function is acti-

B vated, the display shows HI, LO or the tractor symbol de-
pending on the situation.
4
T1ch K6
2.2.6. Temperature selector switch (3)
If the A/C function (4) is activated, the fan speed increa-
ses.
The efficiency of the fan speed can vary, when the system
tries to keep to the adjusted cab temperature. 2
According to the sun heat radiation the fan speed also 3
increases.
2.2.2. AUTO position

T1ch K2
By turning the fan control (1) into the AUTO position (A),
the fan speed is automatically adjusted. Adjust the cab temperature desired by pressing the selec-
When pressing the switch A/C (4) in Auto mode, the eco- tor switch (3). The selected temperature is shown on the
nomic ECO---mode is reached. LCD (2).
If the selected cab temperature is lower than the outdoor
temperature, the numerical value (2) of the temperature
on the display flashes

www.maskinisten.net
2.2.7. HI--- setting mode When the recirculation of the indoor air function is activa-
ted, the compressor is activated normally and can be swit-
ched off by pressing the switch (4).
The economic ECO function, see point AUTO position on
the page 202.
2.2.10. Defrosting (5)
T1ch K3
The maximum heating effect will be reached by setting the

cabin temperature higher than 28˚C.
so:
--- the warm water valve fully opens
--- the fan speed is 75% of maximum speed (if operating 5 T1ch K5
automatically)
--- the recirculation of the indoor air is off Defrosting is activated by pressing the switch (5) (the
--- the blower is on (A/C led on) max. time function on is 3 min).
The led is on.
--- HI --- text is on the LCD display
2.2.8. LO---setting mode
T1ch K3
By pressing the switch again you can escape from the

T1ch K4
defrosting mode, and the former display mode returns
(the led light turns off) or cuts out automatically after 3
minutes.
The maximum cooling will be reached by setting the cabin
temperature lower than 18˚C. so:
so:
--- the warm water valve is fully open
--- the warm water valve is closed
--- the fan speed is 75% of maximum speed
--- the blower speed is maximum (if operating automatical-
ly) --- the fresh air intake is on
--- the recirculation of the indoor air is on --- the blower is on (A/C led on)
--- the blower is on (A/C led on) --- HI ---text is on the LCD display
--- LO --- text is on the LCD display

2.2.11. Selection of recirculation of the fresh
air/indoor air (6)
2.2.9. A/C(air conditioning system) (4)
6 T1ch K10
4 T1ch K7
The automatic on or off depends on the outside tempera-

The led (amber) is on, if the A/C is activated (regardless of ture.
the fan setting).
There are two alternatives, depending on the circumstan-
When the A/C is not activated, the compressor and the led ces : (recirculation on/off)
light are off.

www.maskinisten.net
To activate the cabin indoor air recirculation function,

press the push button (6) once; when the compressor
function is on, the display shows the tractor symbol toge-
ther with the arrow .
Pressing the push button again will deactive the previous

function and actives the fresh air function; the display
shows the tractor symbol together with the fresh air arrow
.
Pressing the switch the third time the automatic function is

on; the display shows the letter of the tractor symbol
(automatic).
Always when the control unit will be restarted and the

outdoor temperature is high or higher than the present
value stored, it is necessary to wait for two minutes in
order to clean ”cab ventilation”, before the recirculati-
on can be activated again.
After 25 minutes of continuous use the system always
deactivates the recirculation function for one minute.
When the outdoor temperature is high it is recommended
to use the fresh air circulation. This function is automati-
cally set if the automatic recirculation is selected.
3. Maintenance
Instructions see “Maintenance” on page 199.

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.6.3. Forest cab

1. General
6080---253
Switch for roof hatch wiper (3).

On the forest cab models the radio is placed on the left
6080---161
side of the roof console.
In the forest cab there are windows on the roof of the cab
3. Maintenance
at the rear end for good upwards visibility. Windows are
made from impact resistant material. Ventilations nozzles
have been added on the roof for de---misting the windows. 1
2. Operating instructions
2
2
2
6080---162
Open the roof hatch by pushing the opening catch (1)

upwards and push the hatch upwards with the handle (2).
To open the hatch fully (for emergency exit) detach the
gas spring upper end 2 from its fastener and push the
hatch fully open. 6080---164
On the roof there is a hatch (1) for maintenance of the

heater and air conditioning (extra equipment).
The cab air filters (2, 2 pcs) are placed outside the cab by
the doors. When closing the doors there is a small build
up of pressure which cleans the filters.
Filter maintenance should be in accordance with the
standard cab filter periodic maintenance schedule.
If the cab has the polycarbonate windows (always on the
roof) clean them according to the instructions for tractor
cleaning, starting on page 116.

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.6.4. Auto Comfort---Cabin suspension system
2
3
T1 K10
1. General
Semi---active system that controls the damping stiffness of
the cabin suspension system either automatically or man-
ually.
The system has two versions with air suspension of the
front axle or without it.

A
The system is controlled with the rocker switch (1) and the
potentiometer (2).
The switch has 3 positions:
The symbol side pressed down (spring return) is the
calibration position (done in the factory).
The calibration starts after pressing the switch 30 s.
A new calibration should be done by an authorized
workshop. The tractor user must not do the calibration.
B
The centre position (indicator light) is the control
position of the automatic damping.
T1 K11
The damping stiffness of the cabin suspension is affected
by:
--- unevenness of the driving surface, driving speed, When the air suspension is engaged the lock pins (A)
change of the PS, position of the shuttle gear and have to be removed of their holes. When you want to dis-
braking engage the air suspension, the lock pins have to be
placed in lock holes. Make sure that the ring pins of the
and
lock pins are locked in their places. If the lock holes do
--- Front axle movement in the air suspension front axle not line up when installing the lock pins:
system, giving advance information of the damping
--- stop the engine
need
--- turn the ignition switch on, move the shuttle lever to the
N---position (the parking brake is automatically engaged
when the engine is not running)
--- loose the locking wheel (B) to adjust the suspension
height a little to line up the holes

www.maskinisten.net
NOTE: After the adjustment lock the wheel (B) into the --- turning the potentiometer knob upwards increases the
middle point. Then there is enough suspension travel in stiffness
both directions when the suspension is operating.
3. Maintenance
The locking is used for maintenance. In addition to
ploughing with a fully mounted (three point) heavy plough
when the front axle load is low, the front suspension may 3.1. Service diagnostic
interfere with the draft control sensitivity operation.
The opposite side of the symbol pressed down is the The symbol lens (3) flashing light indicates the service
manual position. codes.
Damping stiffness of the cabin suspension is achieved If the light starts flashing, contact an authorized workshop.
with the potentiometer.
K 2.7. Hydraulic and towing device
K 2.7.1. Trailer hitch
1. General WARNING: Trailed single ---axle vehicles

must always be connected to the trailer
hitch. When driving with the trailer on a
WARNING: When using a trailer make sure slope, the eye of the drawbar must be of the
that the hitch latch is locked. turning type to prevent breakage.
When the hitch is loaded it must always be lowered using-
the hydraulic lift.
WARNING: Always check, when connecting
any implements, that the eye on the
implement drawbar engages the trailer hook
correctly.
2. The trailer hitch mechanic unlatching
3
T1ch K16
2.1. Instructions for operating 2. Move the hitch latch lever (3) to release the hitch, then
operate the inner switch for connecting implement (1)
to lower the hitch to the ground.
Lowering
Raising
1. Press the lift/stop/lower button (2) in the lowering
position, then use the trailer hitch, inner switch for 1. Reverse up to the trailer and align the hook with the
connecting the implement (1), to fully raise the linkage, trailer drawbar.
which will unlatch the hitch. 2. Press the trailer hitch, inner switch for connecting the
implement (1), until the hitch latches automatically.

www.maskinisten.net
3. Lower the linkage slightly, to allow the weight of the

trailer to be taken by the hitch latches. 5. Drawbar eye
3. Trailer hitch hydraulic unlatching SFS---ISO 5692
Th models
N K65
3.1. Instructions for operating
Lowering
1. Raise the linkage fully up with the inner switch for
connecting the implement (1) by pressing the opposite
side to the symbol. T K21
2. When the linkage is fully up keep the inner switch (1)

pressed down (in the lifting position) and IMPORTANT: Use only drawbar eyes which comply with
simultaneously press down the symbol side of the the regulations and are undamaged. When using other
switch for releasing the trailer hitch latch (2). than the allowed drawbar eyes the guarantee/warranty
3. Keep the switch for releasing the trailer hitch latch (2) lapses and responsibility becomes invalid.
pressed down and lower the towing device by
pressing the symbol side of the inner switch (1).
6. Adjusting and checking
Raising
1. Reverse up to the trailer and align the hook with the 6.1. Adjusting lifting links of trailer hitch
trailer drawbar.
2. Raise the linkage fully up with the inner switch (1) for
connecting the implement until the linkage latch locks.
3. After that lower the linkage slightly so that the towing
device is locked and supported by the latch.
4. Maintenance
4.1. Maintenance weekly
T K22
The lifting links should always have a certain amount of

clearance when the hydraulic lift is in its upper position.
1 1
However, they must be adjusted in such a way that the
N K66 trailer hitch is securely locked by the pawl, even when the
towing hook is loaded.
Lubricate the trailer hitch shaft and lever, 2 nipples (1). Before adjusting, raise the hydraulic lift to its upper
Use Valtra Grease Universal grease. position (do not by use the inner switch). The transport

www.maskinisten.net
height selector must be on the max position (towing hook 7. Specifications

unloaded). Check the adjustment by moving the lifting
links manually. Adjustment is correct when the link moves --- Control, hydraulically controlled
loosely and when the lift is lowered the towing hook is --- Max permissible vertical loading is 30 kN (the max. axle
locked positively by the pawl. Make sure that the spring loading must not be exceeded)
returns the pawl fully home. --- Trailer hitch height on the lower position from tyre center
Adjust the length of the links if necessary by removing the 705 mm
cotter at the upper end of the links and turning until the --- Trailer hitch height from ground (lower position and
correct length is obtained. Check that both lifting links tyres 18.4R34) 90 mm
are the same length after adjustment.
The lifting links may be tightened when lifting with inner
switch. K 2.7.2. Agricultural drawbar
Correctly adjusted lifting links ensure that the hydraulic lift
can be raised to its uppermost position. The trailer hitch is
locked when the lift is lowered to the point where the hitch
rests on the pawl, thereby preventing unnecessary
loading on the hydraulic pump and overheating of the oil.
6.2. Checking locking of trailer hitch 6---8 mm
T K25
An agricultural drawbar is available as an accessory

(several different models according to the marketing
areas). The drawbar is used for towing implements where
only part of the weight is on the drawbar (e.g. balers). The
max. weight of the drawbar implement is 5000 kg.
T K23
Agricultural towing device:
Make sure that the spring returns the pawl fully home. --- One model with the trailer hitch and the other fixed mo-
When the pawl is turned upwards the trailer hitch should del without the trailer hitch.
move up by 6---8 mm. --- Adjustable to four different distances from the PTO
shaft. In the two outer positions the drawbar can also be
6.3. Check wear of the trailer hitch adjusted laterally ±12.5° and ±25°, max. permissible
vertical load is 30 kN (drawbar in forward position) or
18 kN (drawbar in rearmost position).
Agricultural towing device (North America):

--- One model with the trailer hitch and the other fixed mo-
del without the trailer hitch.
min 44 mm
--- Adjustable to three different distances from the PTO
shaft. In two outermost positions the bar can also be
T K24
adjusted laterally±12,5˚ and ±25˚, max. permissible
vertical load is 30 kN (drawbar in forward position) and
18 kN (drawbar in rearmost position).
WARNING: When the trailer hitch has worn
down to 44 mm at the thinnest part, it has to Agricultural towing device light (Sweden):
be replaced.
--- Only with the trailer hitch
--- Adjustable to two different distances from the PTO shaft.
In the outermost position the bar can also be adjusted
laterally ±11˚ and ±22˚, and laterally to two different
positions, max. permissible vertical load is 10 kN
(drawbar in forward position) or 7.5 kN (drawbar in
rearmost position).

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.7.3. Towing device (Scharmüller) 2. Instructions for operating hitch
2.1.Adjusting the height of the jaw

1. General
WARNING: According to Law the driver has

to ensure that all relevant precautions are
followed (lockings) etc.
3
T K38
T K39
In the picture is the towing device frame with fixed hitch

(Piton Fix) (1) + agricultural towing device (2). The loc- Adjusting the height of the mechanical and automatic jaws
king (3) with trailer must be secured. happens in the same way.
The height of the jaw can be changed by first pulling lever
(1) upwards and then by turning it to left. Move the jaw
into the desired height and release the lever when the
locking pins lock the lever into the correct position and the
returning springs have relocated. The jaw can also be
lifted away from the frame by using this same lever.
WARNING: Changing the height of the jaw
is not possible if lever (1) is broken or it is
dirty. The jaw must be locked and secured
every time the height has been changed.

www.maskinisten.net
2.2.Connecting to the jaw automatically goes down. The towing pin can also be low-
ered by pushing lever (5) downwards.
Mechanical jaw
3 NOT LOCKED
2
PULLING PIN
LOCKED
T K27
WARNING: The drawbar pin is locked in the

down position when the security knob is
out. When coupling the trailer the drawbar
locking pin must be secured.
T K40
For lifting up the drawbar pin pull up the ring (3) at the top
of the coupling lever (2). T K28
WARNING: After coupling the trailer, check

that the pulling pin is completely down and To ensure the allowed pulling angles drawbar eyes with
locked. pulling pins of 30 --- 38 mm must only DIN 74054/11026
be used.
WARNING: When using jaws, where the A solid drawbar must be used because of the clearance in
towing pin is equipped with locking pin, the jaws.
make sure, when coupling the trailer, the
locking pin is locked. NOTE: Use only drawbar eyes which comply with the
regulations and are undamaged. When using other than
Automatic jaw the allowed drawbar eyes the guarantee/warranty lapses
and responsibility becomes invalid.
IMPORTANT: When using the hitch with the towing
device, take care that the link of the trailer does not touch
the drawbar body.
T K26
For connecting the trailer to the coupling, lift the puller up

by turning lever (4) to the upper position. When the draw
eye reaches the bottom of the draw gap, the coupling

www.maskinisten.net
3. Maintenance and greasing K 2.7.4. Euro trailer hitch
B B B
A
4 3
1
5
1 2
T K29
3.1. Clean regularly:

2
--- the main pin (1) (no pressure wash) T K30
--- the control unit of the puller pin (2)
--- the locking pin (3) (2 pcs) The Euro trailer hitch is mounted instead of the hitch and it
is used as a hitch.
3.2. Grease regularly:
The Euro trailer hitch (1) can be changed to the Euro draw
--- nipple (4), grease with Valtra Calsium LF grease. After bar (extra equipment, 2) by pressing down clamp (A) and
greasing turn the jaw from left to right at least 90°, this removing the pins (B).
will ensure the grease spreads evenly to the desired
When using the Euro trailer hitch the standard for the
surfaces.
drawbar eye is the same as when using the trailer hitch,
IMPORTANT: If the jaw is rusted e.g. due the fertiliser, do see page 208.
not use a rust---loosening agent for removing the rust,
take to an authorised Valtra workshop.
3.3. Grease if necessary or every 1000 hours:

--- nipple (5), use Valtra Calsium LF Grease
4. Specifications
--- Max permissible total weight for the tractor is 8000 kg,
with all jaws
--- Max permissible vertical loading trailer hitch is 1500 kg,
with all jaws
--- Wagon towing device frame with fixed hitch (Piton Fix)
max permissible vertical loading 2000 kg
--- Automatic drawbar, main pin diameter 31 or 38 mm
--- Mechanical drawbar, main pin diameter 31,5 mm or mo-
del Italy 28 mm, 43 mm, 50 mm
N K10
When the hitch or draw is not in use, it can be fastened to

the bracket (1).

www.maskinisten.net
2. Adjusting and checking 1. Instructions for operating

Adjusting and checking is done in the same way as with
the trailer hitch: 1.1. Lowering
--- Adjusting the lifting links of trailer hitch, see page 208.
--- Checking the locking of trailer hitch, see page 209.
--- Checking the wear of the trailer hitch, see page 209.
1
3. Specifications
N K65
--- Raise the linkage fully up with the inner switch for
connecting the implement (1) by pressing the opposite
side to the symbol.
--- When the linkage is fully up keep the inner switch (1)
pressed down (in the lifting position) and
simultaneously press down the symbol side of the
switch for releasing the trailer hitch latch (2).
T K100
The picture shows the horizontal distances of the pulling

point from the PTO shaft and max vertical loadings.
Euro trailer hitch with

K 2.7.5. T K48
hydraulic extension
--- Then the locking indicator for towing device (3) turns to
the rear position and the locking latch opens.
Th models.
--- Keep the switch for releasing the trailer hitch latch (2)
Euro trailer hitch with the hydraulic extension is like a Euro pressed down and lower the towing device by pressing
hitch, but it can also be moved hydraulically in a the symbol side of the inner switch (1).
longitudinal direction.
1.2. Trailer hitch/draw extension
When the frame of the towing device is lowered (unloc-

ked), it can be hydraulically extended backwards to make
it easier to attach the hitch/draw to the drawbar eye.

www.maskinisten.net
When changing the hitch/drawbar remove the fastening

pin (6) by pushing it from bottom.
When the hitch or draw is not in use, it can be fastened to
the bracket which is situated on the mudguard.
When using the Euro trailer hitch the standard for the
drawbar eye is the same as when using the trailer hitch,
see page 208.
1.4. Raising
--- Raise the linkage fully up with the inner switch for
connecting the implement (1) until the linkage latch
N K67
locks.
--- After that lower the linkage slightly so that the towing
device is locked and supported by the latch.
The hoses of the extension cylinder have been connected --- Finally retract the towing device totally by pushing the
according to the picture to the couplings of the 2. valve. lever (4) of the 2. valve.
The piston rod comes out to the (+) coupling and the --- Make sure that the towing device extension is locked by
piston rod goes in to the (---) coupling. pulling the lever (4) of the 2. valve. Then the towing
device must not retract. Finally push the lever (4) to
ensure that there is no pressure against the locking
pins.
4
N K68
--- The towing device extends when pulling the lever of the
2. valve.
--- The towing device retracts when pushing the lever of T K52
the 2. valve.
1.3. Trailer hitch/draw change NOTE: The towing device extension is locked when the
towing device is locked in the upmost position and
supported by the latch (the locking indicator (3) is fully
upright) and the extension locking pins (7) are down. The
distance of the roll pins from the frame is 2---6 mm.
2. Adjusting and checking

Adjusting and checking is done in the same way as with
the trailer hitch:
--- Adjusting the lifting links of trailer hitch, see page 208.
--- Checking the locking of trailer hitch, see page 209.
6 --- Checking the wear of the trailer hitch, see page 209.
T K51
When changing the hitch/drawbar the towing device frame

has to be lowered down and extended.

www.maskinisten.net
3. Specifications 1. Adjusting the automatic check links

--- Hydraulic raising/lowering and extension
--- Electrohydraulic locking of the towing device latch
--- Replaceable hitch or draw
--- Tractor’s maximum weight 8000 kg
--- Trailer hitch/drawbar is lowered down to the ground
when extended.
1 3
2
T K46
--- Unfasten the closure pin (1) and turn up the link (2) (fig-
ure A).
--- Lift up the turning handle (3) (figure B)
--- Adjust the length of the check link by turning the handle
(3) (figure C)
--- After completing the adjustment, perform the steps in
the reverse order and finally lock the check link adjust-
ment with the pin (1).
2. Floating position
T K54
The picture shows the towing point distances from the

take---off axle and the maximum vertical loads in a
horizontal direction. 4
K 2.7.6. Automatic check links 2

The check links are used to limit the sideways movement
of the lower links.
NOTE: Adjust the check links so that they will not come
into contact with the rear wheels.
T K45
The length of the link’s (2) holding chain (5) (with a spring
at its lower end) (4) can be adjusted by changing the at-
tachment point so that when the implement is lowered to
the working position, the link will not lock the check links,
but allows the floating position. But when the implement is
lifted up to the transport position, the check links rise up
to the links and are locked. The check links are then
locked in the transport position.
When the implement is lowered back into the working
position, the links come off the check links and the check
links are again in a floating position.
The amount of float is determined by the length of the
check links.

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.7.7. Front linkage
T1ch K28
The front linkage hydraulics, controlled with mechanical wheels may be lost.
valve, is connected to the third valve of the external
The implement following the ground contour has to be
hydraulic (extra equipment) (on driving direction the third
first lowered down carefully and just after that push the
lever (1) from front).
control lever to the floating position.
The front linkage with an electrical valve is controlled with
the joystick (2) in the extra armrest.
The lifting cylinders are double---action types. The mecha-
nical valve can be adjusted either to double--- or single---
action (instruction on page 110). The electric valve is al-
ways a double---action---type; when the valve is adjusted
to single---action, the lifting links do not lower with a small
load. It is recommended to use the third valve as double---
action.
3
The front linkage with mechanical controlled valve rises
when the lever (1) is pulled towards the driver and lowers
when the lever is pushed away from the driver. When
pushing the lever further away from the driver, it will be
engaged in the locked floating position; the machine will
then follow the contour of the ground. 2
The front linkage with electric controlled valve rises when 1
the joystick (2) is pulled backwards and lowers when the
2
lever is pushed forwards. The use of the floating positions 1
T K34
is explained in Electric front loader valves; see page 220.
The quick---coupling couple front can be controlled by
moving the joystick transverse (sideways).
Lifting links positions:
IMPORTANT: Always use the FLOATING position for
implements following the ground contour, otherwise the Working position --- the fastening pins are in the holes 1.
implement may be damaged or the traction for the front Floating position --- the fastening pins are in the holes 2.

www.maskinisten.net
Transport position --- the lifting links are folded up and 2.2. Maintenance every 50 hours
the fastening pins are in the holes 2.
Ensure, that the locking pins of the fastenings pins (3) are
in their places when the lifting links are mounted.
When using the front linkage, read the instructions for the
rear linkage. Notice also the following, when using the
front linkage:
--- Before folding the lifting links always lift the front linkage
fully up.
--- When driving on public roads, with an implement or
without an implement lift the front linkage fully up.
--- When you drive on public roads and there is an
implement on the front linkage covering the headlights,
the upper headlights (extra equipment) have to be
switched on.
WARNING: When you drive on public roads,
and there is no implement on the front
linkage, the lifting links have to be folded
up.
T K36
IMPORTANT: When using the front loader the front linkage
lifting link arms should be folded into the transport position.
Grease the pins of the lifting cylinders and the shaft of the
lifting links with Valtra Grease Universal.The grease nipple
2. Maintenance
for the shaft of the lifting links is placed on the rear side of
the axle.
2.1. General
3. Specifications
The type plate of the front linkage is placed on the front
part of the left frame bar. --- Lifting power: 35kN
1. Check regularly that all screws and nuts are tight. --- The diameter of the lifting cylinders, 2 pcs Ø 90 mm
--- Lifting range at the end of the lifting links 750 mm
--- The ends of the lifting links can be turned up
--- Quick coupling hooks, category 3/2
--- Front pulling eye as standard
4. Pressure accumulators for front linkage
T K37
T K35
2. Tighten all screws and nuts of the linkage after the first The pressure accumulators (1) are extra equipment for the
15---25 running hours. Check also that the hydraulic front linkage. There are pressure accumulators both for
connections have no leaks. the lift and lowering and they are continuously working.
When driving the pressure accumulators even out the
pressure peaks coming from the front linkage load. This
makes driving smoother and the stresses on the front lin-
kage are reduced.

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.7.8. Electric front loader valves

The front loader facility kit always includes the following --- Main switch of front loader hydraulics
equipment: --- Front loader socket
--- Two electrically controlled hydraulic valves As extra equipment
--- The armrest (for both right/left sides) that has a joystick --- Release switch for equipment locking
with two push buttons, the switch for the floating --- Softdrive (loader damping) switch
position of the arms and two different floating switches
(for continuous floating or floating controlled by push
button)
6 7
4 5 8
3
N K58
1 Main switch of front loader hydraulics The symbol side pressed down (spring return)= Front
2 Joystick loader hydraulics is activated. When pressing down the
3 Push buttons symbol side, push down locking device (A) to the
4 Switch for continuous floating position midpoint of the switch.
5 Activation switch for floating position to push buttons
The centre position = Front loader hydraulics on, when it
6 Softdrive (loader damping) switch,extra equipment
is first activated.
7 Release switch for equipment locking,extra equipment
8 Armrest The opposite side to the symbol pressed down = Front
loader hydraulics off.
1.Instructions for operation If the engine is stopped, the loader hydraulics has to be
activated again.
Read carefully the operator’s manual of the front loader.
Keep the auxiliary hydraulics on only when needed.
DANGER: Keep the auxiliary hydraulics
always off when driving on the road for
prevent unnecessary hydraulic steering
movements.
A 1.2. Joystick (2)
The maximum oil flow can be ”adjusted” individually, from

increase (+) and decrease (---) direction, adjustment by
an authorized Valtra workshop.
Raise/lower the loader
1 Move the lever backwards to lift the loader arm. Move the
N K59
lever forwards to lower the loader arm.
Empty/angle tool upwards
1.1. Main switch of front loader hydraulics (1)
Move the lever sideways towards you, to angle the tool
The switch has three positions: upwards.Move the lever sideways away from you to

www.maskinisten.net
empty the tool. Middle position = the floating position is on, when it is
activated.
1.3. Push buttons (3) The opposite side to the symbol pressed down = the
floating position is off.
2 The floating position also turns off:

--- by turning the main switch of the front loader hydraulics
(1) to the off position
--- by turning the ignition switch to the stop position
--- by turning the upper push button (3), when the
activating switch for the floating position to the bush
3A buttons (5) is on.
If the engine is stopped, the loader hydraulics (1) and the
3B continuous floating position (4) has to be activated again.
1.5. Floating Position Activation Switch (5)

N K72
When this switch is in the ON position, the push buttons
(3) on the joystick (2) can only be used for the floating
The joystick has two push buttons which can be used in position function.
front loader models.
Use of the change ---over valve, extra equipment
The symbol side pressed down = the floating position
The quick couplings on the left loader arms are controlled function is activated and the push buttons (3) on the
by pressing the upper contact button (3A) and the quick joystick (2) can now be used. With the switch fully
couplings on the right loader arms are controlled by pres- pressed the symbol side down, lock it in place by sliding
sing the lower button (3B). By pressing the button and the locking device (A) to the midpoint of the switch.
simultaneously turning the control lever (2) sideways to-
wards you, the pressure is in red connectors and by tur- To turn the floating position ON, press the lower push
ning it away from you, the pressure is in blue connectors. button (3B) on the joystick (2) and at the same time move
With these functions you can control the bale grap and the joystick forward or backwards. Also notice, that when
other extra equipment. the joystick is turned backwards at the same time, the
floating position is activated.
The bush buttons are used only for control of floating
position, when the activation of the bush buttons (5) is on. To turn the floating position OFF, press the upper push
button (3A) on the joystick (2).
1.4. Switch for continuous floating position (4) The floating position can also be turned off:
--- by moving the Floating Position Activation Switch (5) to
2 the OFF position,push the locking device (A) at the
same time to the midpoint of the switch.
--- by moving the loader hydraulics main switch (1) to the
A OFF position.
A --- by moving the ignition switch to the STOP position.
If both switches (4 and 5) are in the floating position, the
floating position can only be controlled ON and OFF with
the push buttons (3) on the joystick (2).
3A WARNING: When the floating position is not
needed, the floating position switches have
3B to be in OFF position.
4 5
N K75
When using floating position with this switch the push

buttons (3) of the joystick (2) are for use of the extra
valves and equipment locking. Further the transversal
movements of the joystick operate. The floating position is
always on even when the joystick and bush buttons are
used. Archetypal implements are e.g. sweeping
implement and area plough.
The switch has three positions:
The symbol side pressed down (spring---return, push
down locking device (A) to the midpoint of the switch) at
the same time the joystick is turned forward or rearward =
the floating position goes on. Also notice, that when the
joystick is turned backwards at the same time, the floating
position is activated

www.maskinisten.net
1.6. Softdrive (loader damping) switch (6)

1.8.1. Adjustments
2
4
1
3
6 7
N K61 5
With the Softdrive pressure accumulators can be N K48

connected to the hydraulic circuit of the loader arms.
When driving, the pressure accumulators soften the
pressure peaks caused by the loader. The ride is 1.8.1.1. Adjustment of declination (1)
smoother and the imposed loads on the loader and the
tractor are smaller. By turning the screw clockwise the arm rest front rises up
Softdrive can be connected during most tasks, but when and by turning the screw anticlockwise the front lowers.
special accuracy is needed in the loader handling, it can
be disconnected. 1.8.1.2. Adjustment of longitudinal direction (2)
Loosen the screw, adjust the length of the arm rest and
The symbol side pressed down = Softdrive on tighten the screw.
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down =
Softdrive off 1.8.1.3. Lifting to upright position (3)
More details from the operator’s manual of the front
loader. The rest can be raised to the upright position by lifting
front edge.
1.7. Release switch for equipment locking (7)

1.8.1.4. Height adjustment (4)
By pressing down simultaneously the upper contact
The height can be adjusted by changing the mounting of
button (3A) and the symbol side of the switch (7) and
the armrest, more instruction see the point “Armrest
moving the control lever (2) sideways away from you the
adjustment ” on page 198.
locking pins for equipment locking retract and release the
equipment from the loader frame and moving the lever
correspondingly sideways towards you the locking pins 1.8.1.5. Lateral adjustment of end part (5)
come out.
The end part can be turned slightly sideways.
1.8. Arm rest (8)
If you want to move the armrest to the other side, contact

an authorized Valtra workshop.

www.maskinisten.net
adjusted to single or double---action.

1.9. Quick coupling plate of front loader (Valtra
Quick) The flow control is adjusted steplessly by turning control
knob (1):
--- When turning counterclockwise the flow increases
--- When turning clockwise the flow decreases
The first valve does not operate, if the flow control is fully
closed.
The flow control valve does not limit the number of extra
valves, but 3rd and 4th valves can be fitted, if required.
The oil flow control valve makes it possible for
A simultaneous use of the first valve and the hydraulic
power lift or some other valve.
The flow control is useful in the following applications:
C When small output is required

--- When using the small hydraulic cylinders, the output of
70 litres causes the cylinder(s) to move too quickly, e.g.
forage harvester controls, control of grass cutter blades
B and lifting equipment, hydraulically controlled sprayers
etc.
Use of the hydraulic motors

N K42
--- For controlling hydraulic motors, like brush machines,
conveyors, harvesters. With the flow control valve the
Extra equipment of the loader hydraulic motor rotation speed can be infinitely
When detaching the tubes of the loader from the coupling adjusted.
plate (A) first press down the safety lock (B) and the turn
the lever (C) to the open position. When several functions are required at the same
time
WARNING: Hold the lever firmly so that the
pressure of the lever does not hit your --- E.g. hydraulic motor functions on potato and root
hand. harvesters do not stop when using the hydraulic
cylinders or power lift. When working with a rear loader,
the hydraulic power lift and the loader can be used
When clamping the coupling plate (A) turn the lever (C) to simultaneously.
the closed direction until the safety lock (B) pops up.
1. Coupling and operating instructions for
K 2.7.9. Flow control valve hydraulic motor
1.1. To single direction rotating hydraulic motor

1 2
Connection
T1ch K12
In the driving direction the first valve (2) flow 0---65 l/min 6080---218
can be adjusted with the flow control valve (1) (blue

quick couplings behind the tractor). The flow is The control levers and the valve output couplings have the
constant regardless of revs. If the pumps total output is same colour codes. Also the valve output couplings are
not needed on the first valve, the rest of the output can be marked with +/ --- symbols.
used simultaneously for other working hydraulics or the
--- Connect the hydraulic motor pressure coupling to the
hydraulic power lift.
blue + quick---action coupling.
When using the flow control, the first valve can be

www.maskinisten.net
--- Connect the hydraulic motor return coupling to the 1/2” 2. Coupling and operating instructions for
return coupling (C), extra equipment 1” coupling. cylinder
Operating instructions
Connection
2 Single--- or double---action cylinders can be connected

1 with the oil flow control valve.
T1ch K13
6080---219
--- In the driving direction the first valve (2) has to be

adjusted to single---action (instructions on page 110). --- The coupling of one side of the cylinder piston connects
--- In continuous use of the hydraulic motor the valve can to the blue + quick---action coupling. In a single---action
also be position locked (instructions on page 110). cylinder this connection is sufficient.
--- When lever (2) is pulled towards the seat the hydraulic --- The coupling of the other side of cylinder piston rod
motor rotates. connects to the blue ---quick---action coupling.
--- The hydraulic motor rotating speed can be stepplessly
adjusted with the oil flow control valve (1). Operating instructions
1.2. For two directional rotating hydraulic motor
NOTE: When stopping the two directional rotating 1

hydraulic motor and/or when changing the direction, the
hydraulic motor can be damaged, if it is not fitted with 2
inner pressure limiting valves.
Connection
--- Connect the hydraulic motor pressure couplings to the
blue quick---action couplings.
--- The coupling of hydraulic motor return is connected to
the 1/2” return coupling (C), extra equipment 1”
coupling.
Operating instructions
T1ch K14
--- In the driving direction the first valve (2) has to be
adjusted to a double---action (instructions on page 110).
---When in continuous use the hydraulic motor rotating --- When using a double---action cylinder the first valve (2)
direction valve can be in locked position (instructions on in the driving direction has to be adjusted to a double---
page 110). action and the single action cylinder correspondingly to
--- The hydraulic motor rotation direction can be changed single---action (instructions on page 110).
by separate movements of the levers. --- When the lever (2) is pulled towards the seat the piston
--- The oil flow control valve (1) adjusts the rotation speed rod comes out and when pushed away from the seat
regardless of direction. the piston rod goes in.
--- In double---action cylinders the oil flow control valve (1)
adjusts the movement speed in both directions.

www.maskinisten.net
K 2.8. Other equipment

1. Drill holes Ø 22 mm
Mounting readiness for the ex-
K 2.8.1.
tra equipment in the front housing
On both sides of the front housing it is possible to mount
two attaching points for extra equipment according to the
following instructions.
T1 K13
Inside of the left side plate.

1. Drill holes Ø 22 mm
T1 K3
Remove the left side plate by removing the three screws.

The right side plate screws are in the corresponding pla-
ces, see the picture.
T1 K12
Inside of the right side plate.

www.maskinisten.net
1 2
T1 K14
1 Right side
2 Left side
3 sleeve (374 707 00)
screw (HA8338 M10x70)
washer (JD9104 10x2,5)
In the opposite side fitted threaded rivet M10
4 sleeve (374 707 00)

screw (HA8338 M10x70)
washer (JD9104 10x2,5)
nut (JB8905 NM10)
The mounting kit fitted (in parenthesis the Valtra order
numbers). The length of the sleeve 37470700 is 52 mm,
the outer Ø 20 mm and the inner Ø 11 mm.
T1 K9
The side plates in place and the mounting kit fitted.

www.maskinisten.net
L. Alphabetical index
A Coolant system, specifications, 163

Action to be taken during use, 98 Counter pressures when using return connection for
Adjusting track width, 153 auxiliary hydraulics, 180
Agricultural drawbar, 209 Cruise control, extra equipment, 76, 96
Agroline---instrument panel, 53 D
Air conditioning, automatic, 201
Air conditioning, extra equipment, 199 Detailed table of contents, 4
Air conditioning, manual, 199 Differential lock, 97
Air filter, 143 Differential lock switch, 73
Air filters, maintenance, 123 Differential lock, rear axle, specifications, 164
Air suspension of front axle, extra equipment, 195 Dimensions and weights, 157
Air suspension---driver’s seat, extra equipment, 197 Direction indicator, 51
Alphabetical index, 225 Display, 38
Alternator, 145 Draft control, 108
Attaching implements, 112 Draft control selector, 79
Auto Comfort---Cabin suspension system, Drive balance control switch, 79
extra equipment, 206 Driver’s seat, air suspension, 197
Automatic air conditioning, 201 Driver’s seat, illustrations, 34
Automatic check links, lower links, 215 Driver’s seat, more detail, 89
Automatic traction control, Th models, 95 Driving, 94
Auxiliary hydraulic, controls on RH side, 83 Driving speeds at different rear PTO nominal revs, 169
Auxiliary hydraulics, 109 Driving start, 93
Auxiliary hydraulics, controls, introduction, 29 Driving, controls on RH side, 69
Auxiliary hydraulics, specifications, 180 Dynamic rolling radius, 158
B E
Battery checks and maintenance, 145 Electric main circuit switch, extra equipment, 188
Biodiesel fuel, 119 Electrical system, extra equipment,
Bleeding brake system, 150, 151 operating and service, 187
Bleeding clutch system of air, 148 Electrical system, specifications, 163
Bleeding fuel system, 143 Electro---hydraulic linkage, specifications, 179
Brake pedal free travel, adjusting, 149 Electronic engine management (EEM), 15
Brake pedals, 35 Emergency brake, extra equipment, 194
Brake system bleeding, 150, 151 Engine fuel,quality requirements, 119
Brake system, extra equipment, Engine lubrication system, specifications, 162
operating and service, 191 Engine oil filter, changing, 129
Brake system, specifications, 178 Engine oil, changing, 129
Brakes, presentation, 18 Engine speed range selector, 97
Engine, presentation, 14
C Engine, specifications, 161
Cab and shields, extra equipment, Equipment catalogue, 185
operating and service, 197 Euro trailer hitch with hydraulic extension,
Change oil in power transmission/hydraulic, 134 extra equipment, 213
Changing selection of driving start--- and Euro trailer hitch, extra equipment, 212
shuttle---automatic ON/OFF, 45 Extra and alternative equipment, 185
Changing the Agroline tyre parameters Extra equipment catalogue, 185
for different tyres, 57 Extra equipment, operating and service, 187
Changing the parameters of the Proline instrument panel F
LCD display (liquid crystal display), 65
Check links, 105 Filter system, 119
Checks and adjustments, 143 Final drives, specifications, 164
Cleaning instructions, 116 Flexible front mudguards, extra equipment, 196
Clutch, presentation, 15 Flow control valve, 221
Clutch, T121c---T171c, specifications, 163 Fluid brake valve of the trailer, extra equipment, 193
Code number table for calibrating, 183 Forest cab, alternative equipment, 205
Combination switch, 51 Front linkage, optional equipment, 216
Common Rail, 15 Front loader,electric front loader valves,
Control Stop, 187 extra equipment, 218
Controls on LH side, illustrations, 32 Front power take---off, optional equipment, 189
Controls on LH side, more detail, 86 Front roof console, illustrations, 33
Controls on RH side, auxiliary hydraulic, 83 Front wheel drive, 97
Controls on RH side, driving, 69 Fuel, 119
Controls on RH side, illustrations, 27 Fuel filter changing, 136
Controls on RH side, more detail, 69 Fuel storage, 119
Controls on RH side, rear linkage, 78 Fuel system and air cleaner, 162
Controls on RH side, rear power take---off, 80 Fuel system bleeding, 143
Controls on RH side, side pillar control panel, 83 Fuse list, 146
Conversion table for common units, 228 Fuses, 146
---225--- L. Alphabetical index

www.maskinisten.net
G Ploughing with a fully mounted plough, 113

Gearbox, specifications, 164 Ploughing with a reversible plough, 114
General description, 10 Ploughing with a semi---mounted plough, 114
Grease, 120 Ploughing with Autocontrol, brief summary, 115
Points to note during the first 50 hours running, 91
H Position control, 107
Headlight adjustment, 147 Position control knob, 78
HiShift, 70 Power shuttle when driving, 94
HiShift---switch, 94 Power shuttle, T121h---T191h, specifications, 163
HiTech power shuttle, general description, 16 Power take---off, 101
Hydraulic and drawbar, extra equipment, Power take---off shafts, 102
operating and service, 207 Power take---off, specifications, 168
Hydraulic lift, using, 107 Power transmission, presentation, 15
Hydraulic linkage, specifications, 181 Power transmission, specifications, 163
Hydraulic motor, 111 Powered front axle,Technical specifications, 178
Hydraulic system, presentation, 21 Powershift gear, driving, 95
Hydraulic system, specifications, 179 Powershift, pre---programming switch, 37
Powershift---automatics, Th models, 96
I Pre---programming switch of Power Shift, 37
Illustration, 10 Pressure filters, transmission/hydraulic, 132
Implement signal connection, extra equipment, 188 Programming of Powershift, Th models, 95
Indicator lights on instrument panel, 54, 60 Proline instrument panel LCD display setting switch, 65
Instrument panel, Agroline, illustrations, 25 Proline---instrument panel, 59
Instrument panel, controls, illustrations, 24 Proportional ground speed, specifications, 177
Instrument panel, illustrations, 24 PTO control lever, 80
Instrument panel, more detail, 36 PTO switch, 81
Instrument panel, Proline, illustrations, 26 Push buttons for Powershift, 70
Instruments and controls, more detail, 35
Instruments and controls, presentation, 23 Q
Quality requirements of engine fuel, 119
L Quick couple ball joints for lower links, 106
LCD---display, 55, 61 Quick couplings for lower links, 105
LCD---display unit in Agroline instrument panel, 55
LCD---display unit in Proline instrument panel, 61 R
Lift/stop/lower switch, 78 Radar, 79
Lifting links, 104 Range lever, 69
Lifting links of trailer hitch, adjusting, Rear linkage, controls on RH side, 78
extra equipment, 208 Rear mudguards adjustment, 99
Light switch, 52 Rear power take---off, controls on RH side, 80
Linkage/ Power take---off, controls, introduction, 28 Rear PTO engaging speed, 48
Lowering speed control, 78, 108 Rear side controls, introduction, 32
Recommended fuel and lubricants, 118
M Relays, RH side panel, 146
Main table of contents, 2 Release wire setting of quick couplings for lower links, 106
Maintenance, 116 Resetting driving speed / tyre parameters, 47
Maintenance --- cooling system, 144 Resetting parameters, 45
Maintenance daily or every 10 hours, 124 Resetting tyre parameters, 47
Maintenance every 1000 hours (or yearly), 134 Return coupling, 111
Maintenance every 2000 hours (or every other year), 139 Reverse drive controls (h models), extra equipment, 194
Maintenance every 500 hours, 129 Right hand side roof console, illustrations, 33
Maintenance weekly or every 50 hours, 125 Right--- side panel / arm rest controls, driving,
Manual air conditioning, 199 illustrations, 27
Mounting readiness for the extra equipment in the front Right---side panel, other controls, introduction, 31
housing, 223 Roof console on the front side, 87
Mudguards adjustment, 99 Roof console on the right side, 88
Roof fan, 88
O
Oil changing in power transmission/hydraulic, 134 S
Oil recommendations according Safety precautions, 7
to outdoor temperature, 118 Safety rules, 7
Operating instructions, 100 Serial numbers of your tractors, 1
Other controls, controls on RH side, 85 Service function codes, 39
Other controls, illustrations, 34 Shuttle lever, 70
Other controls, more detail, 90 Side pillar control panel, controls on RH side, 83
Side pillar controls, introduction, 30
P Sigma Power, 102
Parking brake, adjusting, 149, 151 Slip control, extra equipment, 79
Parking brake, Nc---models, 86 Speed gear lever, 69
Pedals, illustrations, 23 Speed Radius Index, 158
Pedals, more detail, 35 Speed ranges, 165
Periodic maintenance, 123 Starter switch, 52
Permissible axle loadings, 158 Starting and running, 91
Ploughing, 113 Starting gas, 92
L. Alphabetical index ---226---

www.maskinisten.net
Starting the engine, 91

Steering system, extra equipment,
operating and service, 194
Steering system, presentation, 20
Steering system, specifications, 179
Stopping, 98
Storing the tractor, 155
Stud dimensions and spacing for wheel discs, 182
Switch 4WD, 72
Switch for automatic traction control, 74
Switch for Powershift---automatics, 73
Switch for the Auto---Guide, 77
T
Technical specifications, 157
Temperature control, 88
The trailer hitch mechanic unlatching, 207
Three---point linkage, 104
To the operator, 3
Toe---in, checking and adjusting, 152
Towing device (Scharmüller), extra equipment, 210
Towing the tractor, 99
Track widths, 160
Tractor cleaning, 116
Trailer, 103
Trailer air pressure brakes, extra equipment, 191
Trailer hitch, 207
Trailer hitch Euro with hydraulic extension,
extra equipment, 213
Trailer hitch Euro, extra equipment, 212
Trailer hitch hydraulic unlatching, 208
Trailer socket, 103
Transport height, 107
Transport height selector, 78
Turning circle radius, 179
Tyre loadings and pressures, 159
Tyres (alternative tyre equipment), 158
U
Upper link using, 114
Using the hydraulic lift, 107
V
Valve adjustment between single/double---action, 110
Valve functions, auxiliary hydraulic, 109
W
Washing instructions, 116
Welding, 145
Wheel nuts tightening torques, 159
---227--- L. Alphabetical index

www.maskinisten.net
Conversion table for common units
Metric Weights and Measures with Customary Equivalents

Length
1 millimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.03937 inch
1 centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.3937 inch
1 meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 39.37 inches
= 3.281 feet
= 1.094 yards
1 kilometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.6214 mile
Area
1 square centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.155 square inch
1 square meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.196 yards
= 10.764 square feet
1 hectare (10,000 m2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2.471 acres
1 square kilometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.386 square mile
= 247.1 acres
Capacity or volume
1 cubic centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.061 cubic inch
1 cubic meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 35.315 cubic feet
= 1.308 cubic yards
1 milliliter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0352 fluid ounce (U.K.)
= 0.0338 fluid ounce (U.S.)
1 liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 35.20 fluid ounces (U.K.)
= 1.7598 pints (U.K.)
= 0.8799 quart (U.K.)
= 0.220 gallon (U.K.)
= 0.0275 bushel (U.K.)
= 0.110 peck (U.K.)
= 33.81 fluid ounces (U.S.)
= 2.1134 pints (U.S.)
= 1.0567 quarts (U.S.)
= 0.2642 gallon (U.S.)
= 0.0284 bushel (U.S.)
= 0.1135 peck (U.S.)
= 0.908 dry quart (U.S.)
1 kiloliter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 219.97 gallons (U.K.)
= 264.17 gallons (U.S.)
Weight
1 gram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.03527 ounce (avdp.)
1 kilogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 35.274 ounces (avdp.)
= 2.205 pounds (avdp.)
1 metric ton (1,000 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.984 ton (long)
= 1.102 tons (short)
= 2204.6 pounds (avdp.)
Volume per unit area
1 liter/hectare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.089 gallon (U.K.)/acre
= 0.107 gallon (U.S.)/acre
Weight per unit area
1 kilogram/square centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 14.22 pounds (avdp.)/square inch
1 kilogram/hectare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.892 pound (avdp.)/acre
Area per unit weight
1 square centimeter/kilogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0703 square inch/pound (avdp.)
Temperature conversion formulas
Centigrade (Celsius) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 5/9 (Fahrenheit ---32)
Fahrenheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 9/5 centigrade (Celsius +32)
Illumination
1 foot---candle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 10.764 lux
1 lux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0929 foot---candle
---228---
www.maskinisten.net

Travel speed
1 km/h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.62 mph
1 mph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.61 km/h
Drawbar pull
1 kN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 224.81 lbf
1 lbf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 4.4482 N
Power (identified by such terms as crankshaft power, pto power,
belt power, drawbar power; indicating the point at which the
measurement was taken)
1 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.3596 hp
1 hp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.7355 kW
Engine torque
1 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.738 lbf ft
1 lbf ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.356 Nm
Fuel economy
1 kg/kWh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.278 kg/MJ
= 1.644 lb/hph
1 lb/hph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.169 kg/MJ
= 0.608 kg/kWh
Engine displacement
1 liter (dm3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 61.024 in3
100 in3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.6387 liters (dm3)
Hydraulic pump pressure
1 MPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 145.037 psi
1000 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 6.8948 MPa
Tyre pressure
100 kPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 14.5037 psi
1 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 6.8948 kPa
When conversions are made the results should be rounded to a meaningful number of digits, relative to the accuracy of
original measurements. Values for weights and volumes are based on pure water at 4˚C. under 760 mm of atmospheric
pressure.
For additional conversion factors, or for greater accuracy, refer to National Bureau of Standards Misc. Publ. 233 or to the
Handbook of Chemistry and Physics.
---229---
www.maskinisten.net
Customary Weights and Measures with Metric Equivalents

Length
1 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2.54 centimeters
1 foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 30.48 centimeters
= 0.3048 meter
1 yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.9144 meter
1 mile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1609.34 meters
= 1.609 kilometers
Area
1 square inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 6.452 square centimeters
1 square foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0929 square meter
1 square yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.8361 square meter
1 acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.4047 hectare
1 square mile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 259.0 hectares
Capacity or volume
1 cubic inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 16.387 cubic centimeters
1 cubic foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0283 cubic meter
1 cubic yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.7646 cubic meter
1 fluid ounce (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 28.409 milliliters
= 0.0284 liter
1 fluid ounce (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 29.586 milliliters
= 0.0296 liter
1 liquid pint (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0568 liter
1 liquid pint (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.4732 liter
1 liquid quart (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.1365 liters
1 liquid quart (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.9463 liter
1 gallon (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 4.5461 liters
1 gallon (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 3.7853 liters
1 bushel (U.K.) = 4 pecks (U.K.) = 8 gallons (U.K.) . . . . = 36.3687 liters
1 bushel (U.S.) = 4 pecks (U.S.) = 32 dry quarts (U.S.) . = 35.2391 liters
1 peck (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 9.0922 liters
1 peck (U.S.) = 8 dry quarts (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 8.8098 liters
1 dry quart (U.S.) = 1 1/6 liquid quarts (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . = 1.1012 liters
Weight
1 ounce (avdp.) = 28.50 grams
1 pound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 453.592 grams
= 0.4536 kilogram
1 ton (short) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.907 ton (metric)
1 ton (long) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.016 ton (metric)
= 1016.05 kilograms
Volume per unit area
1 gallon (U.K.)/acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 11.234 liters/hectare
1 gallon (U.S.)/acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 9.354 liters/hectare
Weight per unit area
1 pound (avdp.)/square inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0703 kilogram/square centimeter
1 pound (avdp.)/acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.121 kilograms/hectare
Area per unit weight
1 square inch/pound (avdp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 14.22 square centimeters/kilogram
---230---
www.maskinisten.net
Brief summary
--- rim---wheel disc (front and rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Nm
Capacity data dm3 (litres)
Tyre pressure
Engine oil (with filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Rear axle Front axle
Engine cooling system: Pres- Pres-
--- T121c---T131c, T121h---T131h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tyre sure Tyre sure
--- T161c---T171c, T151eh---T171h, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 bar bar
--- T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 680/75R32 1.6 14.9R28 1.6
Power transmission/hydraulic system (filling quantity/ 460/85R38 1.6 380/85R28 1.6
available volume of oil): 18.4R38 1.6 420/70R28 1.6
min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 / 30 520/70R38 1.6 420/85R28 1.6
max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 / 40
520/85R38 1.6 16.9R28 1.6
Powered front axle: 20.8R38 1.6 440/65R28 1.6
--- differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 540/65R38 1.4 480/65R28 1.6
--- hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 x 1 580/70R38 1.6 480/70R28 1.6
Powered industri front axle (standard T161c---T171c, 600/65R38 1.6 520/60R28 1.6
T151eh---T191h): 600/65R38 E1 1.6 540/65R28 1.6
---differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 650/60R38 1.6 600/65R28 1.6
--- hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 x 1,5 650/65R38 1.6 460/85R30 1.6
650/65R38 E1 1.0 480/70R30 1.6
Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 650/75R38 2.4 540/65R30 1.6
710/70R38 1.6 540/70R30 1.6
---Extra fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
480/80R42 1.4 230/95R36 3.6
Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,5 520/85R42 1.6 400/80R28 IND 3.2
Clutch fluid reservoir, Tc models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,2 20.8R42 1.4 440/80R28 IND 3.2
650/65R42 2.4 540/65R30 IND 3.2
Clutch fluid reservoir, (HiShift), Tc models, extra equip-
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,25 620/70R42 1.6 500/60--26.5 FOR 2.4
270/95R48 3.6 14.9--28/14 FOR 3.0
Washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 480/80R38 IND 3.2 16.9--28/14 FOR 2.7
Washer fluid reservoir (forest equipment, extra equip- 540/80R38 IND 3.2 500/65R28 FOR 2.4
ment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,5 650/65R42 IND 3.2 540/65R28 FOR 2.4
600/65--34 FOR 2.4 540/70R30 FOR 2.4
18.4--38/14 FOR 2.6
Technical data 20.8--38/14 FOR 2.6
600/65R38 FOR 2.4
650/65R38 FOR 2.4
Hydraulic system pressure:
Low pressure circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MPa (18 bar)
Working hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . 19,6 MPa (196 bar)
(With tyres shown in Technical Specifications)
Total weight of tractor, kg
T121c, T121h 5590
T131c, T131h 5590
T151eh 5930
T161c, T161h 5930
T171c, T171h 5980
T191h 5980
Max height of tractor, mm

T121c, T121h 2996
T131c, T131h 2996
T151eh 3046
T161c, T161h 3046
T171c, T171h 3046
T191h 3046
Tightening torques, wheel nuts:

---wheel nuts, front 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Nm
--- wheel nuts, rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Nm
---231---
www.maskinisten.net
Ref no 39 839 21 3 (05/2008)

Printed in Finland by Kopijyvä
English
Valtra Inc.
FIN---44200 Suolahti,
Finland
Tel. +358 20 45501 Copyright E 2005 by Valtra Inc. All rights reserved.
www.valtra.com

Valtra T-Series-Classic-Hitech Manual Sec Wat

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Valtra T-Series-Classic-Hitech Manual Sec Wat

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

www.maskinisten.

Operator’s manual T121c---T171c, T121h---T191h

Model = model indication used by service / spare part

If you need spare parts or service, give the

Type plate EEC

Tractor serial number

Engine number Industrial front axle number

Main table of contents

A Detailed table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 --- 6

B Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 --- 9

C General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 --- 22

D Instruments and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 --- 90

E Starting and running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 --- 99

F Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 --- 115

G Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 --- 122

H Periodic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 --- 142

I Checks and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 --- 156

J Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 --- 184

K Extra and alternative equipment . . . . . . . . 185 --- 224

L Alphabetical index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 --- 227

A. Detailed table of contents

Serial numbers of your tractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1. Fixed displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

A. Detailed table of contents ---4---

F 3. Three ---point linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 I 4. Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

---5--- A. Detailed table of contents

2. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 L. Alphabetical index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

A. Detailed table of contents ---6---

---7--- B. Safety precautions

WARNING: When using the trailer always

B. Safety precautions ---8---

implement if the parking brake is applied or the wheels

28 Radar --- DO NOT to go under a tractor which has

35 Engine stop and restart --- If the engine has stalled

---9--- B. Safety precautions

C 1. Illustration, VALTRA T121c---T171c, T121h---T191h

C. General description ---10---

Left side of tractor:

A The models T121c---T171c, when with HiShift switch

---11--- C. General description

Right side of tractor:

C. General description ---12---

Rear view of tractor: 6. Trailer socket

---13--- C. General description

Front view of tractor:

service bulletins and special training courses he is kept

Before leaving the factory the tractor was thoroughly T131h---T191h

C. General description ---14---

engine range there is also Transport boost range in use.

These engines have lower fuel consumption and cleaner

The clutch is disengaged hydraulically and is coupled to

---15--- C. General description

C 4.2. HiTech power shuttle

In tractors with the HiTech power shuttle unit the

C. General description ---16---

electro---hydraulically. When 4WD is engaged the springs

Control of the Powershift function is also controlled by the

C 4.5. Rear axle

C 4.6. Powered front axle Th models

The control unit of the gearbox also controls the function

---17--- C. General description

C 5.1. Unboosted system

T121c---T131c and T121h---T131h

C. General description ---18---